US20150038430A1 - Therapeutic peptidomimetic macrocycles - Google Patents

Therapeutic peptidomimetic macrocycles Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20150038430A1
US20150038430A1 US14/325,933 US201414325933A US2015038430A1 US 20150038430 A1 US20150038430 A1 US 20150038430A1 US 201414325933 A US201414325933 A US 201414325933A US 2015038430 A1 US2015038430 A1 US 2015038430A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
independently
peptidomimetic macrocycle
amino acid
peptidomimetic
cancer
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US14/325,933
Inventor
Huw M NASH
David Allen Annis
Rosana Kapeller-Libermann
Tomi K. Sawyer
Noriyuki Kawahata
Jiawen Han
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Aileron Therapeutics Inc
Original Assignee
Aileron Therapeutics Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Aileron Therapeutics Inc filed Critical Aileron Therapeutics Inc
Priority to US14/325,933 priority Critical patent/US20150038430A1/en
Assigned to AILERON THERAPEUTICS, INC. reassignment AILERON THERAPEUTICS, INC. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: HAN, JIAWEN, ANNIS, DAVID ALLEN, KAPELLER-LIBERMANN, ROSANA, KAWAHATA, NORIYUKI, SAWYER, TOMI K., NASH, HUW M.
Assigned to AILERON THERAPEUTICS, INC. reassignment AILERON THERAPEUTICS, INC. CHANGE OF ADDRESS Assignors: AILERON THERAPEUTICS, INC.
Publication of US20150038430A1 publication Critical patent/US20150038430A1/en
Priority to US16/023,606 priority patent/US20190071469A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K7/00Peptides having 5 to 20 amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K7/64Cyclic peptides containing only normal peptide links
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00Medicinal preparations containing peptides
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00Medicinal preparations containing peptides
    • A61K38/04Peptides having up to 20 amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K38/12Cyclic peptides, e.g. bacitracins; Polymyxins; Gramicidins S, C; Tyrocidins A, B or C
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00Medicinal preparations containing peptides
    • A61K38/16Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • A61K38/17Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • A61K38/1703Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans from vertebrates
    • A61K38/1709Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans from vertebrates from mammals
    • A61K38/1761Apoptosis related proteins, e.g. Apoptotic protease-activating factor-1 (APAF-1), Bax, Bax-inhibitory protein(s)(BI; bax-I), Myeloid cell leukemia associated protein (MCL-1), Inhibitor of apoptosis [IAP] or Bcl-2
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K45/00Medicinal preparations containing active ingredients not provided for in groups A61K31/00 - A61K41/00
    • A61K45/06Mixtures of active ingredients without chemical characterisation, e.g. antiphlogistics and cardiaca
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00Antineoplastic agents
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00Antineoplastic agents
    • A61P35/02Antineoplastic agents specific for leukemia
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/02Immunomodulators

Definitions

  • Uncontrolled cell proliferation is implicated in a wide number of disorders ranging from cancer to immunoproliferative diseases. For example, in the U.S. alone, cancer surpasses heart disease as the leading cause of death for the largest fraction of the population (Journal of the National Cancer Institute, Vol. 97, No. 5, Mar. 2, 2005, p. 330) and contributes to more than 500,000 deaths annually. Despite decades of intense research efforts in this area, the treatment of cell proliferative disorders remains a challenge.
  • the present invention addresses this and other needs.
  • the invention provides compositions and methods of treatment based on the surprising finding that certain peptidomimetic macrocycles exhibit unexpected specificity, efficacy and potency when used for treatment of cell proliferative disorders.
  • the present invention provides a method of treating cancer in a human patient in need thereof comprising administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle, wherein the cancer is selected from the group consisting of small cell lung carcinoma, melanoma, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, renal cancer, breast cancer, pancreatic cancer, and Ph+ acute lymphocytic leukemia (Ph+ ALL).
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycle comprises an ⁇ -helix.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycle comprises a BH3 domain.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycle can be, for example, a BIM polypeptide.
  • an amino acid sequence of the BIM polypeptide is more than about 60% identical to an amino acid sequence IWIAQELR*IGD*FNAYYARR (SEQ ID NO: 1) wherein * is a tethered amino acid.
  • the amino acid sequence of the BIM polypeptide is more than about 80% identical to an amino acid sequence IWIAQELR*IGD*FNAYYARR (SEQ ID NO: 1) wherein * is a tethered amino acid.
  • an amino acid sequence of said BIM polypeptide may be more than about 95% identical to an amino acid sequence IWIAQELR*IGD*FNAYYARR (SEQ ID NO: 1) wherein * is a tethered amino acid.
  • the cancer is at least 2-fold less sensitive to treatment using a corresponding cross-linked BID polypeptide as measured in an in vitro cell viability assay. In other embodiments, the cancer is at least 5-fold less sensitive to treatment using a corresponding cross-linked BID polypeptide as measured in an in vitro cell viability assay. In yet other embodiments, the cancer is at least 8-fold less sensitive to treatment using a corresponding cross-linked BID polypeptide as measured in an in vitro cell viability assay.
  • the cancer is breast cancer, for example an invasive breast carcinoma such as an invasive ductal carcinoma.
  • the cancer is prostate cancer.
  • the cancer is ovarian cancer.
  • the cancer is pancreatic cancer.
  • the cancer is renal cancer.
  • the cancer is Ph+ acute lymphocytic leukemia (Ph+ ALL).
  • the invention also provides a method of treating cancer in a human patient in need thereof comprising administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle, wherein the cancer is colon cancer.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycle comprises an ⁇ -helix.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycle comprises a BH3 domain.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycle can be, for example, a BID polypeptide.
  • an amino acid sequence of the BID polypeptide is more than about 60% identical to a sequence DIIRNIARHLA*VGD*NleDRSI (SEQ ID NO: 2) and wherein * is a tethered amino acid and Nle is norleucine.
  • an amino acid sequence of the BID polypeptide is more than about 80% identical to a sequence DIIRNIARHLA*VGD*NleDRSI (SEQ ID NO: 2) wherein * is a tethered amino acid and Nle is norleucine.
  • an amino acid sequence of said BID polypeptide may be more than about 95% identical to a sequence DIIRNIARHLA*VGD*NleDRSI (SEQ ID NO: 2) wherein * is a tethered amino acid and Nle is norleucine.
  • the cancer is at least 2-fold less sensitive to treatment using a corresponding cross-linked BIM polypeptide as measured in an in vitro cell viability assay.
  • the cancer is at least 5-fold less sensitive to treatment using a corresponding cross-linked BIM polypeptide as measured in an in vitro cell viability assay. In yet other embodiments, the cancer is at least 8-fold less sensitive to treatment using a corresponding cross-linked BIM polypeptide as measured in an in vitro cell viability assay.
  • a method of treating cancer in a human patient in need thereof comprising administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle wherein said peptidomimetic macrocycle shows an EC 50 lower than about 5 ⁇ M when tested in an in vitro cell viability assay against a cell line derived from said cancer.
  • the EC 50 may be lower than about 4 ⁇ M.
  • the EC 50 may be lower than about 3 ⁇ M.
  • the EC 50 may be lower than about 2 ⁇ M.
  • the EC 50 may be lower than about 1 ⁇ M.
  • the in vitro assay is performed in the presence of serum.
  • the assay may be performed in 10% human serum.
  • the cancer is selected from the group consisting of ovarian cancer, skin cancer, prostate cancer, renal cancer, breast cancer, pancreatic cancer, small-cell lung cancer, colon cancer, multiple myeloma, Burkitt's lymphoma, acute lymphocytic leukemia (ALL) of T cell lineage or B cell lineage or mixed lineage, chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL), cutaneous T cell lymphoma (CTCL), acute myelocytic leukemia (AML), chronic myelocytic leukemia, and follicular lymphoma.
  • ALL acute lymphocytic leukemia
  • CLL chronic lymphocytic leukemia
  • CCL chronic lymphocytic leukemia
  • CCL chronic lymphocytic leukemia
  • AML acute myelocytic leukemia
  • chronic myelocytic leukemia chronic myelocytic leukemia
  • the present invention provides a method of treating cancer in a human patient in need thereof comprising administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle, wherein the cancer is selected from the group consisting of ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, renal cancer, breast cancer, pancreatic cancer, and Ph+ acute lymphocytic leukemia.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycle comprises an ⁇ -helix.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycle comprises a BH3 domain.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycle can be, for example, a BIM polypeptide.
  • an amino acid sequence of the BIM polypeptide is more than about 60% identical to an amino acid sequence IWIAQELR*IGD*FNAYYARR (SEQ ID NO: 1) wherein * is a tethered amino acid.
  • the amino acid sequence of the BIM polypeptide is more than about 80% identical to an amino acid sequence IWIAQELR*IGD*FNAYYARR (SEQ ID NO: 1) wherein * is a tethered amino acid.
  • an amino acid sequence of said BIM polypeptide may be more than about 95% identical to an amino acid sequence IWIAQELR*IGD*FNAYYARR (SEQ ID NO: 1) wherein * is a tethered amino acid.
  • the cancer is selected from the group consisting of colon cancer, small-cell lung cancer, liver cancer, ovarian cancer, skin cancer, prostate cancer, renal cancer, breast cancer, pancreatic cancer, glioma, multiple myeloma, Burkitt's lymphoma, acute lymphocytic leukemia (ALL) of T cell lineage or B cell lineage or mixed lineage, chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL), cutaneous T cell lymphoma (CTCL), acute myelocytic leukemia (AML), chronic myelocytic leukemia and follicular lymphoma.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycle comprises an ⁇ -helix.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycle comprises a BH3 domain.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycle can be, for example, a BID polypeptide.
  • an amino acid sequence of the BID polypeptide is more than about 60% identical to a sequence DIIRNIARHLA*VGD*NleDRSI (SEQ ID NO: 2) and wherein * is a tethered amino acid and Nle is norleucine.
  • an amino acid sequence of the BID polypeptide is more than about 80% identical to a sequence DIIRNIARHLA*VGD*NleDRSI (SEQ ID NO: 2) wherein * is a tethered amino acid and Nle is norleucine.
  • an amino acid sequence of said BID polypeptide may be more than about 95% identical to a sequence DIIRNIARHLA*VGD*NleDRSI (SEQ ID NO: 2) wherein * is a tethered amino acid and Nle is norleucine.
  • the present invention additionally provides a method of treating a disorder in a human patient in need thereof comprising administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle, comprising a) preparing a peptidomimetic macrocycle by introducing a cross-link between two amino acid residues of a polypeptide; b) testing the peptidomimetic macrocycle for the presence or absence of an immunogenic response; and c) administering the peptidomimetic macrocycle to a patient if said immunogenic response does not cause a substantial side-effect.
  • the non-immunogenicity may be evidenced as minimal antibody response in an in vivo assay in rodents such as mice, in non-human primates, or in humans.
  • a compound which is nonimmunogenic When administered to a human patient, a compound which is nonimmunogenic may induce no substantial or minimal side-effects related to its immunogenicity in the patient.
  • the disorder may be, for example, cancer, a metabolic disease, cardiovascular disease, inflammatory disease or a degenerative disease.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycle comprises an ⁇ -helix.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycle comprises a BH3 domain.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycle can be, for example, a BID polypeptide.
  • an amino acid sequence of the BID polypeptide is more than about 60% identical to a sequence DIIRNIARHLA*VGD*NleDRSI (SEQ ID NO: 2) and wherein * is a tethered amino acid and Nle is norleucine.
  • an amino acid sequence of the BID polypeptide is more than about 80% identical to a sequence DIIRNIARHLA*VGD*NleDRSI (SEQ ID NO: 2) wherein * is a tethered amino acid and Nle is norleucine.
  • an amino acid sequence of said BID polypeptide may be more than about 95% identical to a sequence DIIRNIARHLA*VGD*NleDRSI (SEQ ID NO: 2) wherein * is a tethered amino acid and Nle is norleucine.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycle may also be, for example, a BIM polypeptide.
  • an amino acid sequence of the BIM polypeptide is more than about 60% identical to an amino acid sequence IWIAQELR*IGD*FNAYYARR (SEQ ID NO: 1) wherein * is a tethered amino acid.
  • the amino acid sequence of the BIM polypeptide is more than about 80% identical to an amino acid sequence IWIAQELR*IGD*FNAYYARR (SEQ ID NO: 1) wherein * is a tethered amino acid.
  • an amino acid sequence of said BIM polypeptide may be more than about 95% identical to an amino acid sequence IWIAQELR*IGD*FNAYYARR (SEQ ID NO: 1) wherein * is a tethered amino acid.
  • the invention provides a method of treating an immunoproliferative disorder in a human patient in need thereof comprising administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycle may reduce activated hPBL proliferation by more than about 5%, 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, or 50% in an in vitro BrdU incorporation assay.
  • the immunoproliferative disease may be, for example, a lymphoproliferative disorder, or an autoimmune disease, for example, systemic lupus erythematosus.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycle can be, for example, a BID polypeptide.
  • an amino acid sequence of the BID polypeptide is more than about 60% identical to a sequence DIIRNIARHLA*VGD*NleDRSI (SEQ ID NO: 2) and wherein * is a tethered amino acid and Nle is norleucine.
  • an amino acid sequence of the BID polypeptide is more than about 80% identical to a sequence DIIRNIARHLA*VGD*NleDRSI (SEQ ID NO: 2) wherein * is a tethered amino acid and Nle is norleucine.
  • an amino acid sequence of said BID polypeptide may be more than about 95% identical to a sequence DIIRNIARHLA*VGD*NleDRSI (SEQ ID NO: 2) wherein * is a tethered amino acid and Nle is norleucine.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycle may also be, for example, a BIM polypeptide.
  • an amino acid sequence of the BIM polypeptide is more than about 60% identical to an amino acid sequence IWIAQELR*IGD*FNAYYARR (SEQ ID NO: 1) wherein * is a tethered amino acid.
  • the amino acid sequence of the BIM polypeptide is more than about 80% identical to an amino acid sequence IWIAQELR*IGD*FNAYYARR (SEQ ID NO: 1) wherein * is a tethered amino acid.
  • an amino acid sequence of said BIM polypeptide may be more than about 95% identical to an amino acid sequence IWIAQELR*IGD*FNAYYARR (SEQ ID NO: 1) wherein * is a tethered amino acid.
  • an ⁇ -carbon atom in said peptidomimetic macrocycle may be additionally substituted with independent substituents of formula R—, wherein R— is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroalkyl, or heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-.
  • R— is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroalkyl, or heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-.
  • R— is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroalkyl, or heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-.
  • an ⁇ -carbon atom to which the crosslinker is attached is additionally substituted with a substituent of
  • two ⁇ -carbon atoms in a peptidomimetic macrocycle are additionally substituted with independent substituents of formula R—.
  • two ⁇ -carbon atoms to which the crosslinker is attached are additionally substituted with independent substituents of formula R—.
  • two ⁇ -carbon atoms to which the crosslinker is not attached are additionally substituted with independent substituents of formula R—.
  • R— may be, for example, alkyl such as methyl, ethyl, propyl or isopropyl.
  • the crosslinker may connect two ⁇ -carbon atoms.
  • R— and any portion of the crosslinker taken together form a cyclic structure.
  • the crosslinker is formed of consecutive carbon-carbon bonds. In still other embodiments, the crosslinker contains about 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 or 13 consecutive bonds. In yet other embodiments, the crosslinker comprises at least about 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9 carbon atoms.
  • a method of treating cancer in a human patient in need thereof comprising administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle wherein said peptidomimetic macrocycle interacts with Mcl-1.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycle antagonizes the interaction between Mcl-1 and pro-apoptotic proteins such as Bid, Bim, Bax or Bak.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention are used to treat cancer in a human patient wherein the cancer is resistant to ABT-737 or an analog thereof, or is resistant to a compound that possesses an affinity greater than 1, 2, 5 or 10 ⁇ M for Mcl-1.
  • the invention further provides a method of treating ABT-737 resistant small cell lung cancer in a human patient in need thereof comprising administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle, wherein the peptidomimetic macrocycle comprises a BH3 domain.
  • the invention also provides a method of treating prostate cancer in a human patient in need thereof comprising administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle, wherein the peptidomimetic macrocycle comprises a BH3 domain.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycle is administered in conjunction with a standard method of care.
  • the standard method of care may, for example, be chemotherapy.
  • the standard method of care may be radiation therapy.
  • the standard method of care is surgery.
  • FIG. 1 shows the sensitivity of 24 different tumor cell lines to treatment with 20 ⁇ M SP-1.
  • FIG. 2 shows the sensitivity of 7 human leukemia/lymphoma cell lines to treatment with 5 ⁇ M of either SP-1 or SP-4.
  • FIG. 3 shows the sensitivity of twelve human solid tumor lines to treatment with 20 ⁇ M of either SP-1 or SP-4.
  • FIG. 4 shows EC 50 curves for SP-1 or SP-4 tested against a variety of cell lines.
  • FIGS. 5-15 describe EC 50 curves for SP-1, SP-2, SP-3, SP-4, SP-5 and SP-6 tested against several individual cell lines.
  • FIG. 16 indicates that SP-1 does not induce programmed cell death of resting human peripheral lymphocytes (hPBLs).
  • FIG. 17 exemplifies that SP-1 is as effective as rapamycin in blocking the proliferation of hPBLs activated by PMA+ionomycin+LPS treatment.
  • FIGS. 18 and 19 show that SP-1 decreases tumor burden in a SEMK2 human leukemia xenograft model.
  • FIG. 20 shows that SP-1 does not elicit an antibody response in rodents.
  • FIG. 21 illustrates that SP-1 is highly stable, and maintains its helical conformation as temperature increases up to 64° C.
  • FIG. 22 describes the human plasma stability of a series of peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention.
  • FIG. 23 describes the mouse plasma stability of a series of peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention.
  • FIG. 24 shows the pharmacokinetic properties of SP-1 and SP-4 exhibit in rats.
  • FIG. 25 describes the induction of programmed cell death in Jurkat tumor cells by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in the absence of human serum and compares the potency of BH3 peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention to BCL-2/BCL-XL-specific antagonists such as ABT-737.
  • FIG. 26 describes the induction of programmed cell death in Jurkat tumor cell line by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in the presence of 10% human serum and compares the potency of BH3 peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention to BCL-2/BCL-XL-specific antagonists such as ABT-737.
  • FIG. 27 compares the binding affinity of several BH3 peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention and ABT-737 to Bcl-X L , Bcl-2, and Mcl-1.
  • FIG. 28 shows efficacy of peptidomimetic macrocycles to a number of hematological malignancies.
  • FIG. 29 illustrates the varied Bcl-2 family protein expression profile of cell lines sensitive to treatment by compositions of the invention.
  • FIG. 30 compares efficacy of peptidomimetic macrocycles with ABT-737 in Raji, an ABT-737 resistant Burkitt's lymphoma cell line.
  • FIG. 31 illustrates efficacy of BH3 peptidomimetic macrocycles against a variety of solid tumor cell lines.
  • FIG. 32 depicts induction of programmed cell death by a peptidomimetic macrocycle of the invention in an ABT-737 resistant small cell lung cancer line (NCI-H82).
  • FIG. 33 shows suppression of SEMK-2 tumor progression in NOD-SCID mice by compounds of the invention.
  • FIG. 34 describes induction of programmed cell death by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in an ovarian tumor cell line (OVCAR8), treated in the absence of serum.
  • FIG. 35 depicts induction of programmed cell death by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in an ovarian tumor cell line (OVCAR8), treated in the presence of 2% human serum.
  • FIG. 36 depicts induction of programmed cell death by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in a melanoma cell line (A375), treated in the absence of serum.
  • FIG. 37 depicts induction of programmed cell death by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in a melanoma cell line (A375), treated in the presence of 2% human serum.
  • FIG. 38 depicts induction of programmed cell death by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in a breast tumor cell line (MDA-MD-231-Met), treated in the absence of serum.
  • FIG. 39 depicts induction of programmed cell death by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in a breast tumor cell line (MDA-MD-231-Met), treated in 2% human serum.
  • FIG. 40 depicts induction of programmed cell death by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in a prostate tumor cell line (PC3), treated in the absence of serum.
  • FIG. 41 depicts induction of programmed cell death by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in a prostate tumor cell line (PC3), treated in 2% human serum.
  • PC3 prostate tumor cell line
  • FIG. 42 depicts induction of programmed cell death by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in a small cell lung cancer cell line (NCI-H-82), treated in the absence of serum.
  • FIG. 43 depicts a Western Blot showing variable expression of various BCL-family proteins in cancers that are sensitive to peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention.
  • FIG. 44 depicts a timeline for mouse treatment in a prostate cancer orthotopic xenograft model.
  • FIG. 45 depicts efficacy of a peptidomimetic macrocycle of the invention in a prostate cancer orthotopic xenograft model.
  • FIG. 46 describes induction of programmed cell death by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in a T-cell leukemia cell line (Jurkat), treated in the absence of serum.
  • FIG. 47 describes induction of programmed cell death by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in a mixed-lineage T/B-cell leukemia cell line (SEMK2), treated in the absence of serum.
  • SEMK2 mixed-lineage T/B-cell leukemia cell line
  • FIG. 48 describes induction of programmed cell death by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in a T-cell leukemia cell line (MOLT-4), treated in the absence of serum.
  • MOLT-4 T-cell leukemia cell line
  • FIG. 49 describes induction of programmed cell death by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in a diffuse large B-cell lymphoma cell line (DHL-6), treated in the absence of serum.
  • DHL-6 diffuse large B-cell lymphoma cell line
  • FIG. 50 describes induction of programmed cell death by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in a mixed-lineage T/B-cell leukemia cell line (RS4;11), treated in the absence of serum.
  • RS4;11 mixed-lineage T/B-cell leukemia cell line
  • FIG. 51 describes induction of programmed cell death by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in a Burkitt's lymphoma cell line (Raji), treated in the absence of serum.
  • FIG. 52 describes induction of programmed cell death by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in a multiple myeloma cell line (MM1S), treated in the absence of serum.
  • M1S multiple myeloma cell line
  • FIG. 53 depicts efficacy of a peptidomimetic macrocycle of the invention in a SEMK2 leukemia orthotopic xenograft model, as measured by reduced tumor burden in treated animals.
  • FIG. 54 depicts efficacy of a peptidomimetic macrocycle of the invention in a SEMK2 leukemia orthotopic xenograft model, as measured by reduced tumor burden in treated animals.
  • FIG. 55 depicts efficacy of a peptidomimetic macrocycle of the invention in a SEMK2 leukemia orthotopic xenograft model, as measured by increased survival of treated animals.
  • FIG. 56 shows sequence-specific and structure-specific binding of peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention to the pro-apoptotic target protein BAX in multiple myeloma (MM1S) cell lysates, as demonstrated by immunoprecipitation with the stapled SP-4 peptide.
  • M1S multiple myeloma
  • treating and “to treat”, mean to alleviate symptoms, eliminate the causation either on a temporary or permanent basis, or to prevent or slow the appearance of symptoms.
  • treatment includes alleviation, elimination of causation (temporary or permanent) of, or prevention of symptoms and disorders associated with any condition.
  • the treatment may be a pre-treatment as well as a treatment at the onset of symptoms.
  • standard method of care refers to any therapeutic or diagnostic method, compound, or practice which is part of the standard of care for a particular indication.
  • the “standard of care” may be established by any authority such as a health care provider or a national or regional institute for any diagnostic or treatment process that a clinician should follow for a certain type of patient, illness, or clinical circumstance. Exemplary standard of care methods for various type of cancers are provided for instance by the the National Cancer Institute.
  • cell proliferative disorder encompasses cancer, hyperproliferative disorders, neoplastic disorders, immunoproliferative disorders and other disorders.
  • a “cell proliferative disorder” relates to cells having the capacity for autonomous growth, i.e., an abnormal state or condition characterized by rapidly proliferating cell growth.
  • Hyperproliferative and neoplastic disease states may be categorized as pathologic, i.e., characterizing or constituting a disease state, or may be categorized as non-pathologic, i.e., a deviation from normal but not associated with a disease state.
  • metastatic tumor can arise from a multitude of primary tumor types, including but not limited to those of breast, lung, liver, colon and ovarian origin.
  • Primary tumor types including but not limited to those of breast, lung, liver, colon and ovarian origin.
  • Primary tumor types including but not limited to those of breast, lung, liver, colon and ovarian origin.
  • Primary tumor types including but not limited to those of breast, lung, liver, colon and ovarian origin.
  • Primary tumor growth and immunoproliferative diseases include proliferation of cells associated with wound repair.
  • cellular proliferative and/or differentiative disorders include cancer, e.g., carcinoma, sarcoma, or metastatic disorders.
  • the term “derived from” in the context of the relationship between a cell line and a related cancer signifies that the cell line may be established from any cancer in a specific broad category of cancers.
  • microcycle refers to a molecule having a chemical structure including a ring or cycle formed by at least 9 covalently bonded atoms.
  • peptidomimetic macrocycle refers to a compound comprising a plurality of amino acid residues joined by a plurality of peptide bonds and at least one macrocycle-forming linker which forms a macrocycle between a first naturally-occurring or non-naturally-occurring amino acid residue (or analog) and a second naturally-occurring or non-naturally-occurring amino acid residue (or analog) within the same molecule.
  • Peptidomimetic macrocycles include embodiments where the macrocycle-forming linker connects the ⁇ carbon of the first amino acid residue (or analog) to the ⁇ carbon of the second amino acid residue (or analog).
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycles optionally include one or more non-peptide bonds between one or more amino acid residues and/or amino acid analog residues, and optionally include one or more non-naturally-occurring amino acid residues or amino acid analog residues in addition to any which form the macrocycle.
  • the term “stability” refers to the maintenance of a defined secondary structure in solution by a peptidomimetic macrocycle of the invention as measured by circular dichroism, NMR or another biophysical measure, or resistance to proteolytic degradation in vitro or in vivo.
  • Non-limiting examples of secondary structures contemplated in this invention are ⁇ -helices, ⁇ -turns, and ⁇ -pleated sheets.
  • helical stability refers to the maintenance of a helical structure by a peptidomimetic macrocycle of the invention as measured by circular dichroism or NMR.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention exhibit at least a 1.25, 1.5, 1.75 or 2-fold increase in ⁇ -helicity as determined by circular dichroism compared to a corresponding uncrosslinked polypeptide.
  • amino acid refers to a molecule containing both an amino group and a carboxyl group bound to a carbon which is designated the ⁇ -carbon.
  • Suitable amino acids include, without limitation, both the D- and L-isomers of the naturally-occurring amino acids, as well as non-naturally occurring amino acids prepared by organic synthesis or other metabolic routes. Unless the context specifically indicates otherwise, the term amino acid, as used herein, is intended to include amino acid analogs.
  • naturally occurring amino acid refers to any one of the twenty amino acids commonly found in peptides synthesized in nature, and known by the one letter abbreviations A, R, N, C, D, Q, E, G, H, I, L, K, M, F, P, S, T, W, Y and V.
  • amino acid analog or “non-natural amino acid” refers to a molecule which is structurally similar to an amino acid and which can be substituted for an amino acid in the formation of a peptidomimetic macrocycle.
  • Amino acid analogs include, without limitation, compounds which are structurally identical to an amino acid, as defined herein, except for the inclusion of one or more additional methylene groups between the amino and carboxyl group (e.g., ⁇ -amino ⁇ -carboxy acids), or for the substitution of the amino or carboxy group by a similarly reactive group (e.g., substitution of the primary amine with a secondary or tertiary amine, or substitution or the carboxy group with an ester).
  • non-essential amino acid residue is a residue that can be altered from the wild-type sequence of a polypeptide (e.g., a BH3 domain or the p53 MDM2 binding domain) without abolishing or substantially altering its essential biological or biochemical activity (e.g., receptor binding or activation).
  • essential amino acid residue is a residue that, when altered from the wild-type sequence of the polypeptide, results in abolishing or substantially abolishing the polypeptide's essential biological or biochemical activity.
  • a “conservative amino acid substitution” is one in which the amino acid residue is replaced with an amino acid residue having a similar side chain.
  • Families of amino acid residues having similar side chains have been defined in the art. These families include amino acids with basic side chains (e.g., K, R, H), acidic side chains (e.g., D, E), uncharged polar side chains (e.g., G, N, Q, S, T, Y, C), nonpolar side chains (e.g., A, V, L, I, P, F, M, W), beta-branched side chains (e.g., T, V, I) and aromatic side chains (e.g., Y, F, W, H).
  • basic side chains e.g., K, R, H
  • acidic side chains e.g., D, E
  • uncharged polar side chains e.g., G, N, Q, S, T, Y, C
  • nonpolar side chains e.g., A, V, L
  • a predicted nonessential amino acid residue in a BH3 polypeptide is preferably replaced with another amino acid residue from the same side chain family.
  • Other examples of acceptable substitutions are substitutions based on isosteric considerations (e.g. norleucine for methionine) or other properties (e.g. 2-thienylalanine for phenylalanine).
  • member refers to the atoms that form or can form the macrocycle, and excludes substituent or side chain atoms.
  • cyclodecane, 1,2-difluoro-decane and 1,3-dimethyl cyclodecane are all considered ten-membered macrocycles as the hydrogen or fluoro substituents or methyl side chains do not participate in forming the macrocycle.
  • amino acid side chain refers to a moiety attached to the ⁇ -carbon in an amino acid.
  • amino acid side chain for alanine is methyl
  • amino acid side chain for phenylalanine is phenylmethyl
  • amino acid side chain for cysteine is thiomethyl
  • amino acid side chain for aspartate is carboxymethyl
  • amino acid side chain for tyrosine is 4-hydroxyphenylmethyl
  • Other non-naturally occurring amino acid side chains are also included, for example, those that occur in nature (e.g., an amino acid metabolite) or those that are made synthetically (e.g., an ⁇ , ⁇ di-substituted amino acid).
  • ⁇ , ⁇ di-substituted amino acid refers to a molecule or moiety containing both an amino group and a carboxyl group bound to a carbon (the ⁇ -carbon) that is attached to two natural or non-natural amino acid side chains.
  • polypeptide encompasses two or more naturally or non-naturally-occurring amino acids joined by a covalent bond (e.g., an amide bond).
  • Polypeptides as described herein include full length proteins (e.g., fully processed proteins) as well as shorter amino acid sequences (e.g., fragments of naturally-occurring proteins or synthetic polypeptide fragments).
  • microcyclization reagent or “macrocycle-forming reagent” as used herein refers to any reagent which may be used to prepare a peptidomimetic macrocycle of the invention by mediating the reaction between two reactive groups.
  • Reactive groups may be, for example, an azide and alkyne
  • macrocyclization reagents include, without limitation, Cu reagents such as reagents which provide a reactive Cu(I) species, such as CuBr, CuI or CuOTf, as well as Cu(II) salts such as Cu(CO 2 CH 3 ) 2 , CuSO 4 , and CuCl 2 that can be converted in situ to an active Cu(I) reagent by the addition of a reducing agent such as ascorbic acid or sodium ascorbate.
  • Macrocyclization reagents may additionally include, for example, Ru reagents known in the art such as Cp*RuCl(PPh 3 ) 2 , [Cp*RuCl] 4 or other Ru reagents which may provide a reactive Ru(II) species.
  • the reactive groups are terminal olefins.
  • the macrocyclization reagents or macrocycle-forming reagents are metathesis catalysts including, but not limited to, stabilized, late transition metal carbene complex catalysts such as Group VIII transition metal carbene catalysts.
  • such catalysts are Ru and Os metal centers having a +2 oxidation state, an electron count of 16 and pentacoordinated.
  • the reactive groups are thiol groups.
  • the macrocyclization reagent is, for example, a linker functionalized with two thiol-reactive groups such as halogen groups.
  • halo or halogen refers to fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine or a radical thereof.
  • alkyl refers to a hydrocarbon chain that is a straight chain or branched chain, containing the indicated number of carbon atoms. For example, C 1 -C 10 indicates that the group has from 1 to 10 (inclusive) carbon atoms in it. In the absence of any numerical designation, “alkyl” is a chain (straight or branched) having 1 to 20 (inclusive) carbon atoms in it.
  • alkylene refers to a divalent alkyl (i.e., —R—).
  • alkenyl refers to a hydrocarbon chain that is a straight chain or branched chain having one or more carbon-carbon double bonds.
  • the alkenyl moiety contains the indicated number of carbon atoms. For example, C 2 -C 10 indicates that the group has from 2 to 10 (inclusive) carbon atoms in it.
  • lower alkenyl refers to a C 2 -C 6 alkenyl chain. In the absence of any numerical designation, “alkenyl” is a chain (straight or branched) having 2 to 20 (inclusive) carbon atoms in it.
  • alkynyl refers to a hydrocarbon chain that is a straight chain or branched chain having one or more carbon-carbon triple bonds.
  • the alkynyl moiety contains the indicated number of carbon atoms.
  • C 2 -C 10 indicates that the group has from 2 to 10 (inclusive) carbon atoms in it.
  • lower alkynyl refers to a C 2 -C 6 alkynyl chain.
  • alkynyl is a chain (straight or branched) having 2 to 20 (inclusive) carbon atoms in it.
  • aryl refers to a 6-carbon monocyclic or 10-carbon bicyclic aromatic ring system wherein 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4 atoms of each ring are substituted by a substituent. Examples of aryl groups include phenyl, naphthyl and the like.
  • arylalkyl or the term “aralkyl” refers to alkyl substituted with an aryl.
  • arylalkoxy refers to an alkoxy substituted with aryl.
  • Arylalkyl refers to an aryl group, as defined above, wherein one of the aryl group's hydrogen atoms has been replaced with a C 1 -C 5 alkyl group, as defined above.
  • Representative examples of an arylalkyl group include, but are not limited to, 2-methylphenyl, 3-methylphenyl, 4-methylphenyl, 2-ethylphenyl, 3-ethylphenyl, 4-ethylphenyl, 2-propylphenyl, 3-propylphenyl, 4-propylphenyl, 2-butylphenyl, 3-butylphenyl, 4-butylphenyl, 2-pentylphenyl, 3-pentylphenyl, 4-pentylphenyl, 2-isopropylphenyl, 3-isopropylphenyl, 4-isopropylphenyl, 2-isobutylphenyl, 3-isobutylphenyl, 4-isopropylphenyl
  • Arylamido refers to an aryl group, as defined above, wherein one of the aryl group's hydrogen atoms has been replaced with one or more —C(O)NH 2 groups.
  • Representative examples of an arylamido group include 2-C(O)NH2-phenyl, 3-C(O)NH 2 -phenyl, 4-C(O)NH 2 -phenyl, 2-C(O)NH 2 -pyridyl, 3-C(O)NH 2 -pyridyl, and 4-C(O)NH 2 -pyridyl,
  • Alkylheterocycle refers to a C 1 -C 5 alkyl group, as defined above, wherein one of the C 1 -C 5 alkyl group's hydrogen atoms has been replaced with a heterocycle.
  • Representative examples of an alkylheterocycle group include, but are not limited to, —CH 2 CH 2 -morpholine, —CH 2 CH 2 -piperidine, —CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 -morpholine, and —CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 -imidazole.
  • Alkylamido refers to a C 1 -C 5 alkyl group, as defined above, wherein one of the C 1 -C 5 alkyl group's hydrogen atoms has been replaced with a —C(O)NH 2 group.
  • an alkylamido group include, but are not limited to, —CH 2 —C(O)NH 2 , —CH 2 CH 2 —C(O)NH 2 , —CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 C(O)NH 2 , —CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 C(O)NH 2 , —CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 C(O)NH 2 , —CH 2 CH(C(O)NH 2 )CH 3 , —CH 2 CH(C(O)NH 2 )CH 2 CH 3 , —CH(C(O)NH 2 )CH 2 CH 3 , —C(CH 3 ) 2 CH 2 C(O)NH 2 , —CH 2 —CH 2 —NH—C(O)—CH 3 , —CH 2 —CH 2 —NH—C(O)—CH 3 , —CH 2 —CH 2 —NH—C(O)—CH 3 , —CH 2 —CH 2 —NH—C(O)—CH 3
  • Alkanol refers to a C 1 -C 5 alkyl group, as defined above, wherein one of the C 1 -C 5 alkyl group's hydrogen atoms has been replaced with a hydroxyl group.
  • Representative examples of an alkanol group include, but are not limited to, —CH 2 OH, —CH 2 CH 2 OH, —CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OH, —CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OH, —CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OH, —CH 2 CH(OH)CH 3 , —CH 2 CH(OH)CH 2 CH 3 , —CH(OH)CH 3 and —C(CH 3 ) 2 CH 2 OH.
  • Alkylcarboxy refers to a C 1 -C 5 alkyl group, as defined above, wherein one of the C 1 -C 5 alkyl group's hydrogen atoms has been replaced with a —COOH group.
  • Representative examples of an alkylcarboxy group include, but are not limited to, —CH 2 COOH, —CH 2 CH 2 COOH, —CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 COOH, —CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 COOH, —CH 2 CH(COOH)CH 3 , —CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 COOH, —CH 2 CH(COOH)CH 2 CH 3 , —CH(COOH)CH 2 CH 3 and —C(CH 3 ) 2 CH 2 COOH.
  • cycloalkyl as employed herein includes saturated and partially unsaturated cyclic hydrocarbon groups having 3 to 12 carbons, preferably 3 to 8 carbons, and more preferably 3 to 6 carbons, wherein the cycloalkyl group additionally is optionally substituted.
  • Some cycloalkyl groups include, without limitation, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclohexyl, cyclohexenyl, cycloheptyl, and cyclooctyl.
  • heteroaryl refers to an aromatic 5-8 membered monocyclic, 8-12 membered bicyclic, or 11-14 membered tricyclic ring system having 1-3 heteroatoms if monocyclic, 1-6 heteroatoms if bicyclic, or 1-9 heteroatoms if tricyclic, said heteroatoms selected from O, N, or S (e.g., carbon atoms and 1-3, 1-6, or 1-9 heteroatoms of O, N, or S if monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic, respectively), wherein 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4 atoms of each ring are substituted by a substituent.
  • heteroaryl groups include pyridyl, furyl or furanyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, pyrimidinyl, thiophenyl or thienyl, quinolinyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, and the like.
  • heteroarylalkyl or the term “heteroaralkyl” refers to an alkyl substituted with a heteroaryl.
  • heteroarylalkoxy refers to an alkoxy substituted with heteroaryl.
  • heteroarylalkyl or the term “heteroaralkyl” refers to an alkyl substituted with a heteroaryl.
  • heteroarylalkoxy refers to an alkoxy substituted with heteroaryl.
  • heterocyclyl refers to a nonaromatic 5-8 membered monocyclic, 8-12 membered bicyclic, or 11-14 membered tricyclic ring system having 1-3 heteroatoms if monocyclic, 1-6 heteroatoms if bicyclic, or 1-9 heteroatoms if tricyclic, said heteroatoms selected from O, N, or S (e.g., carbon atoms and 1-3, 1-6, or 1-9 heteroatoms of O, N, or S if monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic, respectively), wherein 0, 1, 2 or 3 atoms of each ring are substituted by a substituent.
  • heterocyclyl groups include piperazinyl, pyrrolidinyl, dioxanyl, morpholinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, and the like.
  • substituted refers to a group replacing a second atom or group such as a hydrogen atom on any molecule, compound or moiety.
  • Suitable substituents include, without limitation, halo, hydroxy, mercapto, oxo, nitro, haloalkyl, alkyl, alkaryl, aryl, aralkyl, alkoxy, thioalkoxy, aryloxy, amino, alkoxycarbonyl, amido, carboxy, alkanesulfonyl, alkylcarbonyl, and cyano groups.
  • the compounds of this invention contain one or more asymmetric centers and thus occur as racemates and racemic mixtures, single enantiomers, individual diastereomers and diastereomeric mixtures. All such isomeric forms of these compounds are included in the present invention unless expressly provided otherwise.
  • the compounds of this invention are also represented in multiple tautomeric forms, in such instances, the invention includes all tautomeric forms of the compounds described herein (e.g., if alkylation of a ring system results in alkylation at multiple sites, the invention includes all such reaction products). All such isomeric forms of such compounds are included in the present invention unless expressly provided otherwise. All crystal forms of the compounds described herein are included in the present invention unless expressly provided otherwise.
  • the terms “increase” and “decrease” mean, respectively, to cause a statistically significantly (i.e., p ⁇ 0.1) increase or decrease of at least 5%.
  • variable is equal to any of the values within that range.
  • variable is equal to any integer value within the numerical range, including the end-points of the range.
  • variable is equal to any real value within the numerical range, including the end-points of the range.
  • a variable which is described as having values between 0 and 2 takes the values 0, 1 or 2 if the variable is inherently discrete, and takes the values 0.0, 0.1, 0.01, 0.001, or any other real values ⁇ 0 and ⁇ 2 if the variable is inherently continuous.
  • on average represents the mean value derived from performing at least three independent replicates for each data point.
  • biological activity encompasses structural and functional properties of a macrocycle of the invention.
  • Biological activity is, for example, structural stability, alpha-helicity, affinity for a target, resistance to proteolytic degradation, cell penetrability, intracellular stability, in vivo stability, or any combination thereof.
  • any protein or polypeptide with a known primary amino acid sequence which contains a helical structure believed to impart biological activity is the subject of the present invention.
  • the sequence of the polypeptide can be analyzed and amino acid analogs containing groups reactive with macrocyclization reagents can be substituted at the appropriate positions.
  • the appropriate positions are determined by ascertaining which molecular surface(s) of the secondary structure is (are) required for biological activity and, therefore, across which other surface(s) the macrocycle forming linkers of the invention can form a macrocycle without sterically blocking the surface(s) required for biological activity.
  • Such determinations are made using methods such as X-ray crystallography of complexes between the secondary structure and a natural binding partner to visualize residues (and surfaces) critical for activity; by sequential mutagenesis of residues in the secondary structure to functionally identify residues (and surfaces) critical for activity; or by other methods.
  • the appropriate amino acids are substituted with the amino acids analogs and macrocycle-forming linkers of the invention.
  • one surface of the helix e.g., a molecular surface extending longitudinally along the axis of the helix and radially 45-135° about the axis of the helix
  • a macrocycle-forming linker is designed to link two ⁇ -carbons of the helix while extending longitudinally along the surface of the helix in the portion of that surface not directly required for activity.
  • the peptide sequence is derived from the BCL-2 family of proteins.
  • the BCL-2 family is defined by the presence of up to four conserved BCL-2 homology (BH) domains designated BH1, BH2, BH3, and BH4, all of which include ⁇ -helical segments (Chittenden et al. (1995), EMBO 14:5589; Wang et al. (1996), Genes Dev. 10:2859).
  • Anti-apoptotic proteins, such as BCL-2 and BCL-X L display sequence conservation in all BH domains.
  • Pro-apoptotic proteins are divided into “multidomain” family members (e.g., BAK, BAX), which possess homology in the BH1, BH2, and BH3 domains, and “BH3-domain only” family members (e.g., BID, BAD, BIM, BIK, NOXA, PUMA), that contain sequence homology exclusively in the BH3 amphipathic ⁇ -helical segment.
  • BCL-2 family members have the capacity to form homo- and heterodimers, suggesting that competitive binding and the ratio between pro- and anti-apoptotic protein levels dictates susceptibility to death stimuli.
  • Anti-apoptotic proteins function to protect cells from pro-apoptotic excess, i.e., excessive programmed cell death.
  • Additional “security” measures include regulating transcription of pro-apoptotic proteins and maintaining them as inactive conformers, requiring either proteolytic activation, dephosphorylation, or ligand-induced conformational change to activate pro-death functions.
  • death signals received at the plasma membrane trigger apoptosis via a mitochondrial pathway.
  • the mitochondria can serve as a gatekeeper of cell death by sequestering cytochrome c, a critical component of a cytosolic complex which activates caspase 9, leading to fatal downstream proteolytic events.
  • Multidomain proteins such as BCL-2/BCL-X L and BAK/BAX play dueling roles of guardian and executioner at the mitochondrial membrane, with their activities further regulated by upstream BH3-only members of the BCL-2 family.
  • BID is a member of the BH3-domain only family of pro-apoptotic proteins, and transmits death signals received at the plasma membrane to effector pro-apoptotic proteins at the mitochondrial membrane.
  • BID has the capability of interacting with both pro- and anti-apoptotic proteins, and upon activation by caspase 8, triggers cytochrome c release and mitochondrial apoptosis.
  • amphipathic ⁇ -helical BH3 segment of pro-apoptotic family members may function as a death domain and thus may represent a critical structural motif for interacting with multidomain apoptotic proteins.
  • Structural studies have shown that the BH3 helix can interact with anti-apoptotic proteins by inserting into a hydrophobic groove formed by the interface of BH1, 2 and 3 domains.
  • Activated BID can be bound and sequestered by anti-apoptotic proteins (e.g., BCL-2 and BCL-X L ) and can trigger activation of the pro-apoptotic proteins BAX and BAK, leading to cytochrome c release and a mitochondrial apoptosis program.
  • BAD is also a BH3-domain only pro-apoptotic family member whose expression triggers the activation of BAX/BAK.
  • BAD displays preferential binding to anti-apoptotic family members, BCL-2 and BCL-X L .
  • BAD BH3 domain exhibits high affinity binding to BCL-2
  • BAD BH3 peptide is unable to activate cytochrome c release from mitochondria in vitro, suggesting that BAD is not a direct activator of BAX/BAK.
  • Mitochondria that over-express BCL-2 are resistant to BID-induced cytochrome c release, but co-treatment with BAD can restore BID sensitivity.
  • Induction of mitochondrial apoptosis by BAD appears to result from either: (1) displacement of BAX/BAK activators, such as BID and BID-like proteins, from the BCL-2/BCL-XL binding pocket, or (2) selective occupation of the BCL-2/BCL-XL binding pocket by BAD to prevent sequestration of BID-like proteins by anti-apoptotic proteins.
  • BID and BID-like proteins are two classes of BH3-domain only proteins.
  • a polypeptide of the invention contains one crosslink. In other embodiments of the method, said polypeptide contains two cross-links. In some embodiments of the method, one crosslink connects two ⁇ -carbon atoms. In other embodiments of the method, one ⁇ -carbon atom to which one crosslink is attached is substituted with a substituent of formula R—. In another embodiment of the method, two ⁇ -carbon atoms to which one crosslink is attached are substituted with independent substituents of formula R—. In one embodiment of the methods of the invention, R— is alkyl. For example, R— is methyl. Alternatively, R— and any portion of one crosslink taken together can form a cyclic structure. In another embodiment of the method, one crosslink is formed of consecutive carbon-carbon bonds. For example, one crosslink may comprise at least 8, 9, 10, 11, or 12 consecutive bonds. In other embodiments, one crosslink may comprise at least 7, 8, 9, 10, or 11 carbon atoms.
  • the crosslinked polypeptide comprises an ⁇ -helical domain of a BCL-2 family member.
  • the crosslinked polypeptide comprises a BH3 domain.
  • the crosslinked polypeptide comprises at least 60%, 70%, 80%, 85%, 90% or 95% of any of the sequences in Tables 1, 2, 3 and 4.
  • the crosslinked polypeptide penetrates cell membranes by an energy-dependent process and binds to an intracellular target.
  • said helical polypeptide contains one crosslink. In other embodiments, said helical polypeptide contains two cross-links.
  • one crosslink connects two ⁇ -carbon atoms.
  • one ⁇ -carbon atom to which one crosslink is attached is substituted with a substituent of formula R—.
  • two ⁇ -carbon atoms to which one crosslink is attached are substituted with independent substituents of formula R—.
  • R— is alkyl.
  • R— is methyl.
  • R— and any portion of one crosslink taken together can form a cyclic structure.
  • one crosslink is formed of consecutive carbon-carbon bonds.
  • one crosslink may comprise at least 8, 9, 10, 11, or 12 consecutive bonds.
  • one crosslink may comprise at least 7, 8, 9, 10, or 11 carbon atoms.
  • the crosslinked polypeptide comprises an ⁇ -helical domain of a BCL-2 family member.
  • the crosslinked polypeptide comprises a BH3 domain.
  • the crosslinked polypeptide comprises at least 60%, 70%, 80%, 85%, 90% or 95% of any of the sequences in Tables 1, 2, 3 and 4.
  • the crosslinked polypeptide penetrates cell membranes by an energy-dependent process and binds to an intracellular target.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention have the Formula (I):
  • each A, C, D, and E is independently a natural or non-natural amino acid
  • B is a natural or non-natural amino acid, amino acid analog
  • R 1 and R 2 are independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroalkyl, or heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-;
  • R 3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloaryl, or heterocycloaryl, optionally substituted with R 5 ;
  • L is a macrocycle-forming linker of the formula -L 1 -L 2 -;
  • L 1 and L 2 are independently alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, heteroalkylene, cycloalkylene, heterocycloalkylene, cycloarylene, heterocycloarylene, or [—R 4 —K—R 4 -] n , each being optionally substituted with R 5 ;
  • each R 4 is alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, heteroalkylene, cycloalkylene, heterocycloalkylene, arylene, or heteroarylene;
  • each K is O, S, SO, SO 2 , CO, CO 2 , or CONR 3 ;
  • each R 5 is independently halogen, alkyl, —OR 6 , —N(R 6 ) 2 , —SR 6 , —SOR E , —SO 2 R 6 , —CO 2 R 6 , a fluorescent moiety, a radioisotope or a therapeutic agent;
  • each R 6 is independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, a fluorescent moiety, a radioisotope or a therapeutic agent;
  • R 7 is —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, cycloaryl, or heterocycloaryl, optionally substituted with R 5 , or part of a cyclic structure with a D residue;
  • R 8 is —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, cycloaryl, or heterocycloaryl, optionally substituted with R 5 , or part of a cyclic structure with an E residue;
  • each of v and w is independently an integer from 1-1000;
  • each of x, y, and z is independently an integer from 0-10; u is an integer from 1-10; and n is an integer from 1-5.
  • At least one of R 1 and R 2 is alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-. In another example, both R 1 and R 2 are independently alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-. In some embodiments, at least one of R 1 and R 2 is methyl. In other embodiments, R 1 and R 2 are methyl.
  • x+y+z is at least 3. In other embodiments of the invention, x+y+z is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10.
  • Each occurrence of A, B, C, D or E in a macrocycle or macrocycle precursor of the invention is independently selected.
  • a sequence represented by the formula [A] x when x is 3, encompasses embodiments where the amino acids are not identical, e.g. Gln-Asp-Ala as well as embodiments where the amino acids are identical, e.g. Gln-Gln-Gln. This applies for any value of x, y, or z in the indicated ranges.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycle of the invention comprises a secondary structure which is an ⁇ -helix and R 8 is —H, allowing intrahelical hydrogen bonding.
  • at least one of A, B, C, D or E is an ⁇ , ⁇ -disubstituted amino acid.
  • B is an ⁇ , ⁇ -disubstituted amino acid.
  • at least one of A, B, C, D or E is 2-aminoisobutyric acid.
  • at least one of A, B, C, D or E is
  • the length of the macrocycle-forming linker L as measured from a first C ⁇ to a second C ⁇ is selected to stabilize a desired secondary peptide structure, such as an ⁇ -helix formed by residues of the peptidomimetic macrocycle including, but not necessarily limited to, those between the first C ⁇ to a second C ⁇ .
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycle of Formula (I) is:
  • each R 1 and R 2 is independently independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroalkyl, or heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycle of Formula (I) is:
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycle of Formula (I) is a compound of any of the formulas shown below:
  • AA represents any natural or non-natural amino acid side chain and “ ” is [D] v , [E] w as defined above, and n is an integer between 0 and 20, 50, 100, 200, 300, 400 or 500. In some embodiments, n is 0. In other embodiments, n is less than 50.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention have the Formula (II):
  • each A, C, D, and E is independently a natural or non-natural amino acid
  • B is a natural or non-natural amino acid, amino acid analog
  • R 1 and R 2 are independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroalkyl, or heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-;
  • R 3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloaryl, or heterocycloaryl, optionally substituted with R 5 ;
  • L is a macrocycle-forming linker of the formula
  • L 1 , L 2 and L 3 are independently alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, heteroalkylene, cycloalkylene, heterocycloalkylene, cycloarylene, heterocycloarylene, or [—R 4 —K—R 4 -] n , each being optionally substituted with R 5 ;
  • each R 4 is alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, heteroalkylene, cycloalkylene, heterocycloalkylene, arylene, or heteroarylene;
  • each K is O, S, SO, SO 2 , CO, CO 2 , or CONR 3 ;
  • each R 5 is independently halogen, alkyl, —OR 6 , —N(R 6 ) 2 , —SR 6 , —SOR E , —SO 2 R 6 , —CO 2 R 6 , a fluorescent moiety, a radioisotope or a therapeutic agent;
  • each R 6 is independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, a fluorescent moiety, a radioisotope or a therapeutic agent;
  • R 7 is —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, cycloaryl, or heterocycloaryl, optionally substituted with R 5 , or part of a cyclic structure with a D residue;
  • R 8 is —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, cycloaryl, or heterocycloaryl, optionally substituted with R 5 , or part of a cyclic structure with an E residue;
  • each of v and w is independently an integer from 1-1000;
  • each of x, y, and z is independently an integer from 0-10; u is an integer from 1-10; and
  • n is an integer from 1-5.
  • At least one of R 1 and R 2 is alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-. In another example, both R 1 and R 2 are independently alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-. In some embodiments, at least one of R 1 and R 2 is methyl. In other embodiments, R 1 and R 2 are methyl.
  • x+y+z is at least 3. In other embodiments of the invention, x+y+z is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10.
  • Each occurrence of A, B, C, D or E in a macrocycle or macrocycle precursor of the invention is independently selected.
  • a sequence represented by the formula [A] x when x is 3, encompasses embodiments where the amino acids are not identical, e.g. Gln-Asp-Ala as well as embodiments where the amino acids are identical, e.g. Gln-Gln-Gln. This applies for any value of x, y, or z in the indicated ranges.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycle of the invention comprises a secondary structure which is an ⁇ -helix and R 8 is —H, allowing intrahelical hydrogen bonding.
  • at least one of A, B, C, D or E is an ⁇ , ⁇ -disubstituted amino acid.
  • B is an ⁇ , ⁇ -disubstituted amino acid.
  • at least one of A, B, C, D or E is 2-aminoisobutyric acid.
  • at least one of A, B, C, D or E is
  • the length of the macrocycle-forming linker L as measured from a first C ⁇ to a second C ⁇ is selected to stabilize a desired secondary peptide structure, such as an ⁇ -helix formed by residues of the peptidomimetic macrocycle including, but not necessarily limited to, those between the first C ⁇ to a second C ⁇ .
  • the invention provides peptidomimetic macrocycles of Formula (III):
  • each A, C, D, and E is independently a natural or non-natural amino acid;
  • B is a natural or non-natural amino acid, amino acid analog,
  • R 1 and R 2 are independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroalkyl, or heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-;
  • R 3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloaryl, or heterocycloaryl, unsubstituted or substituted with R 5 ;
  • L 1 , L 2 , L 3 and L 4 are independently alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, heteroalkylene, cycloalkylene, heterocycloalkylene, cycloarylene, heterocycloarylene or [—R 4 —K—R 4 -]n, each being unsubstituted or substituted with R
  • K is O, S, SO, SO 2 , CO, CO 2 , or CONR 3 ;
  • R 7 is —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl,
  • At least one of R 1 and R 2 is alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-. In another example, both R 1 and R 2 are independently alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-. In some embodiments, at least one of R 1 and R 2 is methyl. In other embodiments, R 1 and R 2 are methyl.
  • x+y+z is at least 3. In other embodiments of the invention, x+y+z is 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10.
  • Each occurrence of A, B, C, D or E in a macrocycle or macrocycle precursor of the invention is independently selected.
  • a sequence represented by the formula [A] x when x is 3, encompasses embodiments where the amino acids are not identical, e.g. Gln-Asp-Ala as well as embodiments where the amino acids are identical, e.g. Gln-Gln-Gln. This applies for any value of x, y, or z in the indicated ranges.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycle of the invention comprises a secondary structure which is an ⁇ -helix and R 8 is —H, allowing intrahelical hydrogen bonding.
  • at least one of A, B, C, D or E is an ⁇ , ⁇ -disubstituted amino acid.
  • B is an ⁇ , ⁇ -disubstituted amino acid.
  • at least one of A, B, C, D or E is 2-aminoisobutyric acid.
  • at least one of A, B, C, D or E is
  • the length of the macrocycle-forming linker [-L 1 -S-L 2 -S-L 3 -] as measured from a first C ⁇ to a second C ⁇ is selected to stabilize a desired secondary peptide structure, such as an ⁇ -helix formed by residues of the peptidomimetic macrocycle including, but not necessarily limited to, those between the first C ⁇ to a second C ⁇ .
  • Macrocycles or macrocycle precursors are synthesized, for example, by solution phase or solid-phase methods, and can contain both naturally-occurring and non-naturally-occurring amino acids. See, for example, Hunt, “The Non-Protein Amino Acids” in Chemistry and Biochemistry of the Amino Acids , edited by G. C. Barrett, Chapman and Hall, 1985.
  • the thiol moieties are the side chains of the amino acid residues L-cysteine, D-cysteine, ⁇ -methyl-L cysteine, ⁇ -methyl-D-cysteine, L-homocysteine, D-homocysteine, ⁇ -methyl-L-homocysteine or ⁇ -methyl-D-homocysteine.
  • a bis-alkylating reagent is of the general formula X-L 2 -Y wherein L 2 is a linker moiety and X and Y are leaving groups that are displaced by —SH moieties to form bonds with L 2 .
  • X and Y are halogens such as I, Br, or Cl.
  • D and/or E in the compound of Formula I, II or III are further modified in order to facilitate cellular uptake.
  • lipidating or PEGylating a peptidomimetic macrocycle facilitates cellular uptake, increases bioavailability, increases blood circulation, alters pharmacokinetics, decreases immunogenicity and/or decreases the needed frequency of administration.
  • At least one of [D] and [E] in the compound of Formula I, II or III represents a moiety comprising an additional macrocycle-forming linker such that the peptidomimetic macrocycle comprises at least two macrocycle-forming linkers.
  • a peptidomimetic macrocycle comprises two macrocycle-forming linkers.
  • any of the macrocycle-forming linkers described herein may be used in any combination with any of the sequences shown in Tables 1-4 and also with any of the R— substituents indicated herein.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycle comprises at least one ⁇ -helix motif.
  • A, B and/or C in the compound of Formula I, II or III include one or more ⁇ -helices.
  • ⁇ -helices include between 3 and 4 amino acid residues per turn.
  • the ⁇ -helix of the peptidomimetic macrocycle includes 1 to 5 turns and, therefore, 3 to 20 amino acid residues.
  • the ⁇ -helix includes 1 turn, 2 turns, 3 turns, 4 turns, or 5 turns.
  • the macrocycle-forming linker stabilizes an ⁇ -helix motif included within the peptidomimetic macrocycle.
  • the length of the macrocycle-forming linker L from a first C ⁇ to a second C ⁇ is selected to increase the stability of an ⁇ -helix.
  • the macrocycle-forming linker spans from 1 turn to 5 turns of the ⁇ -helix. In some embodiments, the macrocycle-forming linker spans approximately 1 turn, 2 turns, 3 turns, 4 turns, or 5 turns of the ⁇ -helix. In some embodiments, the length of the macrocycle-forming linker is approximately 5 ⁇ to 9 ⁇ per turn of the ⁇ -helix, or approximately 6 ⁇ to 8 ⁇ per turn of the ⁇ -helix.
  • the length is equal to approximately 5 carbon-carbon bonds to 13 carbon-carbon bonds, approximately 7 carbon-carbon bonds to 11 carbon-carbon bonds, or approximately 9 carbon-carbon bonds.
  • the length is equal to approximately 8 carbon-carbon bonds to 16 carbon-carbon bonds, approximately 10 carbon-carbon bonds to 14 carbon-carbon bonds, or approximately 12 carbon-carbon bonds.
  • the macrocycle-forming linker spans approximately 3 turns of an ⁇ -helix, the length is equal to approximately 14 carbon-carbon bonds to 22 carbon-carbon bonds, approximately 16 carbon-carbon bonds to 20 carbon-carbon bonds, or approximately 18 carbon-carbon bonds.
  • the length is equal to approximately 20 carbon-carbon bonds to 28 carbon-carbon bonds, approximately 22 carbon-carbon bonds to 26 carbon-carbon bonds, or approximately 24 carbon-carbon bonds.
  • the macrocycle-forming linker spans approximately 5 turns of an ⁇ -helix, the length is equal to approximately 26 carbon-carbon bonds to 34 carbon-carbon bonds, approximately 28 carbon-carbon bonds to 32 carbon-carbon bonds, or approximately 30 carbon-carbon bonds.
  • the linkage contains approximately 4 atoms to 12 atoms, approximately 6 atoms to 10 atoms, or approximately 8 atoms.
  • the linkage contains approximately 7 atoms to 15 atoms, approximately 9 atoms to 13 atoms, or approximately 11 atoms.
  • the linkage contains approximately 13 atoms to 21 atoms, approximately 15 atoms to 19 atoms, or approximately 17 atoms.
  • the linkage contains approximately 19 atoms to 27 atoms, approximately 21 atoms to 25 atoms, or approximately 23 atoms.
  • the linkage contains approximately 25 atoms to 33 atoms, approximately 27 atoms to 31 atoms, or approximately 29 atoms.
  • the resulting macrocycle forms a ring containing approximately 17 members to 25 members, approximately 19 members to 23 members, or approximately 21 members.
  • the macrocycle-forming linker spans approximately 2 turns of the ⁇ -helix, the resulting macrocycle forms a ring containing approximately 29 members to 37 members, approximately 31 members to 35 members, or approximately 33 members.
  • the resulting macrocycle forms a ring containing approximately 44 members to 52 members, approximately 46 members to 50 members, or approximately 48 members.
  • the resulting macrocycle forms a ring containing approximately 59 members to 67 members, approximately 61 members to 65 members, or approximately 63 members.
  • the macrocycle-forming linker spans approximately 5 turns of the ⁇ -helix, the resulting macrocycle forms a ring containing approximately 74 members to 82 members, approximately 76 members to 80 members, or approximately 78 members.
  • the invention provides peptidomimetic macrocycles of Formula (IV) or (IVa):
  • each A, C, D, and E is independently a natural or non-natural amino acid
  • B is a natural or non-natural amino acid, amino acid analog
  • R 1 and R 2 are independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroalkyl, or heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-, or part of a cyclic structure with an E residue;
  • R 3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloaryl, or heterocycloaryl, optionally substituted with R 5 ;
  • L is a macrocycle-forming linker of the formula -L 1 -L 2 -;
  • L 1 and L 2 are independently alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, heteroalkylene, cycloalkylene, heterocycloalkylene, cycloarylene, heterocycloarylene, or [—R 4 —K—R 4 -] n , each being optionally substituted with R 5 ;
  • each R 4 is alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, heteroalkylene, cycloalkylene, heterocycloalkylene, arylene, or heteroarylene;
  • each K is O, S, SO, SO 2 , CO, CO 2 , or CONR 3 ;
  • each R 5 is independently halogen, alkyl, —OR 6 , —N(R 6 ) 2 , —SR 6 , —SOR E , —SO 2 R 6 , —CO 2 R 6 , a fluorescent moiety, a radioisotope or a therapeutic agent;
  • each R 6 is independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, a fluorescent moiety, a radioisotope or a therapeutic agent;
  • R 7 is —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, cycloaryl, or heterocycloaryl, optionally substituted with R 5 ;
  • V is an integer from 1-1000;
  • w is an integer from 1-1000;
  • x is an integer from 0-10;
  • y is an integer from 0-10;
  • z is an integer from 0-10;
  • n is an integer from 1-5.
  • At least one of R 1 and R 2 is alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-. In another example, both R 1 and R 2 are independently alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-. In some embodiments, at least one of R 1 and R 2 is methyl. In other embodiments, R 1 and R 2 are methyl.
  • x+y+z is at least 3. In other embodiments of the invention, x+y+z is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10.
  • Each occurrence of A, B, C, D or E in a macrocycle or macrocycle precursor of the invention is independently selected.
  • a sequence represented by the formula [A] x when x is 3, encompasses embodiments where the amino acids are not identical, e.g. Gln-Asp-Ala as well as embodiments where the amino acids are identical, e.g. Gln-Gln-Gln. This applies for any value of x, y, or z in the indicated ranges.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycle of the invention comprises a secondary structure which is an ⁇ -helix and R 8 is —H, allowing intrahelical hydrogen bonding.
  • at least one of A, B, C, D or E is an ⁇ , ⁇ -disubstituted amino acid.
  • B is an ⁇ , ⁇ -disubstituted amino acid.
  • at least one of A, B, C, D or E is 2-aminoisobutyric acid.
  • at least one of A, B, C, D or E is
  • the length of the macrocycle-forming linker L as measured from a first C ⁇ to a second C ⁇ is selected to stabilize a desired secondary peptide structure, such as an ⁇ -helix formed by residues of the peptidomimetic macrocycle including, but not necessarily limited to, those between the first C ⁇ to a second C ⁇ .
  • Peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention may be prepared by any of a variety of methods known in the art.
  • any of the residues indicated by “X” in Tables 1, 2, 3 or 4 may be substituted with a residue capable of forming a crosslinker with a second residue in the same molecule or a precursor of such a residue.
  • peptidomimetic macrocycles of Formula I
  • the ⁇ , ⁇ -disubstituted amino acids and amino acid precursors disclosed in the cited references may be employed in synthesis of the peptidomimetic macrocycle precursor polypeptides. Following incorporation of such amino acids into precursor polypeptides, the terminal olefins are reacted with a metathesis catalyst, leading to the formation of the peptidomimetic macrocycle.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocyles of the invention are of Formula IV or IVa. Methods for the preparation of such macrocycles are described, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 7,202,332.
  • the synthesis of these peptidomimetic macrocycles involves a multi-step process that features the synthesis of a peptidomimetic precursor containing an azide moiety and an alkyne moiety; followed by contacting the peptidomimetic precursor with a macrocyclization reagent to generate a triazole-linked peptidomimetic macrocycle.
  • Macrocycles or macrocycle precursors are synthesized, for example, by solution phase or solid-phase methods, and can contain both naturally-occurring and non-naturally-occurring amino acids. See, for example, Hunt, “The Non-Protein Amino Acids” in Chemistry and Biochemistry of the Amino Acids , edited by G. C. Barrett, Chapman and Hall, 1985.
  • an azide is linked to the ⁇ -carbon of a residue and an alkyne is attached to the ⁇ -carbon of another residue.
  • the azide moieties are azido-analogs of amino acids L-lysine, D-lysine, alpha-methyl-L-lysine, alpha-methyl-D-lysine, L-ornithine, D-ornithine, alpha-methyl-L-ornithine or alpha-methyl-D-ornithine.
  • the alkyne moiety is L-propargylglycine.
  • the alkyne moiety is an amino acid selected from the group consisting of L-propargylglycine, D-propargylglycine, (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-4-pentynoic acid, (R)-2-amino-2-methyl-4-pentynoic acid, (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-5-hexynoic acid, (R)-2-amino-2-methyl-5-hexynoic acid, (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-6-heptynoic acid, (R)-2-amino-2-methyl-6-heptynoic acid, (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-7-octynoic acid, (R)-2-amino-2-methyl-7-octynoic acid, (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-8-nonynoic acid and (R)-2-amino-2-methyl-8-nonynoic acid.
  • the invention provides a method for synthesizing a peptidomimetic macrocycle, the method comprising the steps of contacting a peptidomimetic precursor of Formula V or Formula VI:
  • R 12 is —H when the macrocyclization reagent is a Cu reagent and R 12 is —H or alkyl when the macrocyclization reagent is a Ru reagent; and further wherein said contacting step results in a covalent linkage being formed between the alkyne and azide moiety in Formula III or Formula IV.
  • R 12 may be methyl when the macrocyclization reagent is a Ru reagent.
  • R 1 and R 2 are alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroalkyl, or heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-.
  • both R 1 and R 2 are independently alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroalkyl, or heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-.
  • At least one of A, B, C, D or E is an ⁇ , ⁇ -disubstituted amino acid.
  • B is an ⁇ , ⁇ -disubstituted amino acid.
  • at least one of A, B, C, D or E is 2-aminoisobutyric acid.
  • R 1 and R 2 are alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-. In another example, both R 1 and R 2 are independently alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-. In some embodiments, at least one of R 1 and R 2 is methyl. In other embodiments, R 1 and R 2 are methyl.
  • the macrocyclization reagent may be a Cu reagent or a Ru reagent.
  • the peptidomimetic precursor is purified prior to the contacting step.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycle is purified after the contacting step.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycle is refolded after the contacting step.
  • the method may be performed in solution, or, alternatively, the method may be performed on a solid support.
  • Also envisioned herein is performing the method of the invention in the presence of a target macromolecule that binds to the peptidomimetic precursor or peptidomimetic macrocycle under conditions that favor said binding.
  • the method is performed in the presence of a target macromolecule that binds preferentially to the peptidomimetic precursor or peptidomimetic macrocycle under conditions that favor said binding.
  • the method may also be applied to synthesize a library of peptidomimetic macrocycles.
  • the alkyne moiety of the peptidomimetic precursor of Formula V or Formula VI is a sidechain of an amino acid selected from the group consisting of L-propargylglycine, D-propargylglycine, (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-4-pentynoic acid, (R)-2-amino-2-methyl-4-pentynoic acid, (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-5-hexynoic acid, (R)-2-amino-2-methyl-5-hexynoic acid, (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-6-heptynoic acid, (R)-2-amino-2-methyl-6-heptynoic acid, (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-7-octynoic acid, (R)-2-amino-2-methyl-7-octynoic acid, (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-8-nonynoic acid, and (R)-2-amino-2-amino
  • the azide moiety of the peptidomimetic precursor of Formula V or Formula VI is a sidechain of an amino acid selected from the group consisting of ⁇ -azido-L-lysine, ⁇ -azido-D-lysine, ⁇ -azido- ⁇ -methyl-L-lysine, ⁇ -azido- ⁇ -methyl-D-lysine, ⁇ -azido- ⁇ -methyl-L-ornithine, and ⁇ -azido- ⁇ -methyl-D-ornithine.
  • x+y+z is 3, and and A, B and C are independently natural or non-natural amino acids. In other embodiments, x+y+z is 6, and and A, B and C are independently natural or non-natural amino acids.
  • [D] v and/or [E] w comprise additional peptidomimetic macrocycles or macrocyclic structures.
  • [D] v may have the formula:
  • each A, C, D′, and E′ is independently a natural or non-natural amino acid
  • B is a natural or non-natural amino acid, amino acid analog
  • R 1 and R 2 are independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroalkyl, or heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-, or part of a cyclic structure with an E residue;
  • R 3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloaryl, or heterocycloaryl, optionally substituted with R 5 ;
  • L 1 and L 2 are independently alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, heteroalkylene, cycloalkylene, heterocycloalkylene, cycloarylene, heterocycloarylene, or [—R 4 —K—R 4 -] n , each being optionally substituted with R 5 ;
  • each R 4 is alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, heteroalkylene, cycloalkylene, heterocycloalkylene, arylene, or heteroarylene;
  • each K is O, S, SO, SO 2 , CO, CO 2 , or CONR 3 ;
  • each R 5 is independently halogen, alkyl, —OR 6 , —N(R 6 ) 2 , —SR 6 , —SOR E , —SO 2 R 6 , —CO 2 R 6 , a fluorescent moiety, a radioisotope or a therapeutic agent;
  • each R 6 is independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, a fluorescent moiety, a radioisotope or a therapeutic agent;
  • R 7 is —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, cycloaryl, or heterocycloaryl, optionally substituted with R 5 ;
  • v is an integer from 1-1000;
  • w is an integer from 1-1000;
  • x is an integer from 0-10.
  • [E] w has the formula:
  • the contacting step is performed in a solvent selected from the group consisting of protic solvent, aqueous solvent, organic solvent, and mixtures thereof.
  • the solvent may be chosen from the group consisting of H 2 O, THF, THF/H 2 O, tBuOH/H 2 O, DMF, DIPEA, CH 3 CN or CH 2 Cl 2 , ClCH 2 CH 2 Cl or a mixture thereof.
  • the solvent may be a solvent which favors helix formation.
  • peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention are made, for example, by chemical synthesis methods, such as described in Fields et al., Chapter 3 in Synthetic Peptides: A User's Guide , ed. Grant, W. H. Freeman & Co., New York, N. Y., 1992, p. 77.
  • peptides are synthesized using the automated Merrifield techniques of solid phase synthesis with the amine protected by either tBoc or Fmoc chemistry using side chain protected amino acids on, for example, an automated peptide synthesizer (e.g., Applied Biosystems (Foster City, Calif.), Model 430A, 431, or 433).
  • One manner of producing the peptidomimetic precursors and peptidomimetic macrocycles described herein uses solid phase peptide synthesis (SPPS).
  • SPPS solid phase peptide synthesis
  • the C-terminal amino acid is attached to a cross-linked polystyrene resin via an acid labile bond with a linker molecule.
  • This resin is insoluble in the solvents used for synthesis, making it relatively simple and fast to wash away excess reagents and by-products.
  • the N-terminus is protected with the Fmoc group, which is stable in acid, but removable by base. Side chain functional groups are protected as necessary with base stable, acid labile groups.
  • peptidomimetic precursors are produced, for example, by conjoining individual synthetic peptides using native chemical ligation. Alternatively, the longer synthetic peptides are biosynthesized by well known recombinant DNA and protein expression techniques. Such techniques are provided in well-known standard manuals with detailed protocols.
  • To construct a gene encoding a peptidomimetic precursor of this invention the amino acid sequence is reverse translated to obtain a nucleic acid sequence encoding the amino acid sequence, preferably with codons that are optimum for the organism in which the gene is to be expressed.
  • a synthetic gene is made, typically by synthesizing oligonucleotides which encode the peptide and any regulatory elements, if necessary.
  • the synthetic gene is inserted in a suitable cloning vector and transfected into a host cell. The peptide is then expressed under suitable conditions appropriate for the selected expression system and host.
  • the peptide is purified and characterized by standard methods.
  • the peptidomimetic precursors are made, for example, in a high-throughput, combinatorial fashion using, for example, a high-throughput polychannel combinatorial synthesizer (e.g., Thuramed TETRAS multichannel peptide synthesizer from CreoSalus, Louisville, Ky. or Model Apex 396 multichannel peptide synthesizer from AAPPTEC, Inc., Louisville, Ky.).
  • a high-throughput polychannel combinatorial synthesizer e.g., Thuramed TETRAS multichannel peptide synthesizer from CreoSalus, Louisville, Ky. or Model Apex 396 multichannel peptide synthesizer from AAPPTEC, Inc., Louisville, Ky.
  • each R 1 , R 2 , R 7 and R 8 is —H; each L 1 is —(CH 2 ) 4 —; and each L 2 is —(CH 2 )—.
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 7 , R 8 , L 1 and L 2 can be independently selected from the various structures disclosed herein.
  • Synthetic Scheme 1 describes the preparation of several compounds of the invention.
  • Ni(II) complexes of Schiff bases derived from the chiral auxiliary (S)-2-[N—(N′-benzylprolyl)amino]benzophenone (BPB) and amino acids such as glycine or alanine are prepared as described in Belokon et al. (1998), Tetrahedron Asymm. 9:4249-4252.
  • the resulting complexes are subsequently reacted with alkylating reagents comprising an azido or alkynyl moiety to yield enantiomerically enriched compounds of the invention. If desired, the resulting compounds can be protected for use in peptide synthesis.
  • the peptidomimetic precursor contains an azide moiety and an alkyne moiety and is synthesized by solution-phase or solid-phase peptide synthesis (SPPS) using the commercially available amino acid N- ⁇ -Fmoc-L-propargylglycine and the N- ⁇ -Fmoc-protected forms of the amino acids (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-4-pentynoic acid, (S)-2-amino-6-heptynoic acid, (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-6-heptynoic acid, N-methyl- ⁇ -azido-L-lysine, and N-methyl- ⁇ -azido-D-lysine.
  • SPPS solution-phase or solid-phase peptide synthesis
  • the peptidomimetic precursor is then deprotected and cleaved from the solid-phase resin by standard conditions (e.g., strong acid such as 95% TFA).
  • the peptidomimetic precursor is reacted as a crude mixture or is purified prior to reaction with a macrocyclization reagent such as a Cu(I) in organic or aqueous solutions (Rostovtsev et al. (2002), Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. 41:2596-2599; Tornoe et al. (2002), J. Org. Chem. 67:3057-3064; Deiters et al. (2003), J. Am. Chem. Soc.
  • the triazole forming reaction is performed under conditions that favor ⁇ -helix formation.
  • the macrocyclization step is performed in a solvent chosen from the group consisting of H 2 O, THF, CH 3 CN, DMF, DIPEA, tBuOH or a mixture thereof.
  • the macrocyclization step is performed in DMF.
  • the macrocyclization step is performed in a buffered aqueous or partially aqueous solvent.
  • the peptidomimetic precursor contains an azide moiety and an alkyne moiety and is synthesized by solid-phase peptide synthesis (SPPS) using the commercially available amino acid N- ⁇ -Fmoc-L-propargylglycine and the N- ⁇ -Fmoc-protected forms of the amino acids (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-4-pentynoic acid, (S)-2-amino-6-heptynoic acid, (5)-2-amino-2-methyl-6-heptynoic acid, N-methyl- ⁇ -azido-L-lysine, and N-methyl- ⁇ -azido-D-lysine.
  • SPPS solid-phase peptide synthesis
  • the peptidomimetic precursor is reacted with a macrocyclization reagent such as a Cu(I) reagent on the resin as a crude mixture
  • a macrocyclization reagent such as a Cu(I) reagent
  • the resultant triazole-containing peptidomimetic macrocycle is then deprotected and cleaved from the solid-phase resin by standard conditions (e.g., strong acid such as 95% TFA).
  • the macrocyclization step is performed in a solvent chosen from the group consisting of CH 2 Cl 2 , ClCH 2 CH 2 Cl, DMF, THF, NMP, DIPEA, 2,6-lutidine, pyridine, DMSO, H 2 O or a mixture thereof.
  • the macrocyclization step is performed in a buffered aqueous or partially aqueous solvent.
  • the peptidomimetic precursor contains an azide moiety and an alkyne moiety and is synthesized by solution-phase or solid-phase peptide synthesis (SPPS) using the commercially available amino acid N- ⁇ -Fmoc-L-propargylglycine and the N- ⁇ -Fmoc-protected forms of the amino acids (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-4-pentynoic acid, (S)-2-amino-6-heptynoic acid, (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-6-heptynoic acid, N-methyl- ⁇ -azido-L-lysine, and N-methyl- ⁇ -azido-D-lysine.
  • SPPS solution-phase or solid-phase peptide synthesis
  • the peptidomimetic precursor is then deprotected and cleaved from the solid-phase resin by standard conditions (e.g., strong acid such as 95% TFA).
  • the peptidomimetic precursor is reacted as a crude mixture or is purified prior to reaction with a macrocyclization reagent such as a Ru(II) reagents, for example Cp*RuCl(PPh 3 ) 2 or [Cp*RuCl] 4 (Rasmussen et al. (2007), Org. Lett. 9:5337-5339; Zhang et al. (2005), J. Am. Chem. Soc. 127:15998-15999).
  • the macrocyclization step is performed in a solvent chosen from the group consisting of DMF, CH 3 CN and THF.
  • the peptidomimetic precursor contains an azide moiety and an alkyne moiety and is synthesized by solid-phase peptide synthesis (SPPS) using the commercially available amino acidN- ⁇ -Fmoc-L-propargylglycine and the N- ⁇ -Fmoc-protected forms of the amino acids (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-4-pentynoic acid, (S)-2-amino-6-heptynoic acid, (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-6-heptynoic acid, N-methyl- ⁇ -azido-L-lysine, and N-methyl- ⁇ -azido-D-lysine.
  • SPPS solid-phase peptide synthesis
  • the peptidomimetic precursor is reacted with a macrocyclization reagent such as a Ru(II) reagent on the resin as a crude mixture.
  • a macrocyclization reagent such as a Ru(II) reagent on the resin as a crude mixture.
  • the reagent can be Cp*RuCl(PPh 3 ) 2 or [Cp*RuCl] 4 (Rasmussen et al. (2007), Org. Lett. 9:5337-5339; Zhang et al. (2005), J. Am. Chem. Soc. 127:15998-15999).
  • the macrocyclization step is performed in a solvent chosen from the group consisting of CH 2 Cl 2 , ClCH 2 CH 2 Cl, CH 3 CN, DMF, and THF.
  • peptidomimetic macrocycles are shown in Table 5 (SEQ ID NOS 77-88, respectively, in order of appearance). “Nle” represents norleucine and replaces a methionine residue. It is envisioned that similar linkers are used to synthesize peptidomimetic macrocycles based on the polypeptide sequences disclosed in Table 1 through Table 4.
  • the present invention contemplates the use of non-naturally-occurring amino acids and amino acid analogs in the synthesis of the peptidomimetic macrocycles described herein.
  • Any amino acid or amino acid analog amenable to the synthetic methods employed for the synthesis of stable triazole containing peptidomimetic macrocycles can be used in the present invention.
  • L-propargylglycine is contemplated as a useful amino acid in the present invention.
  • other alkyne-containing amino acids that contain a different amino acid side chain are also useful in the invention.
  • L-propargylglycine contains one methylene unit between the ⁇ -carbon of the amino acid and the alkyne of the amino acid side chain.
  • the invention also contemplates the use of amino acids with multiple methylene units between the ⁇ -carbon and the alkyne.
  • the azido-analogs of amino acids L-lysine, D-lysine, alpha-methyl-L-lysine, and alpha-methyl-D-lysine are contemplated as useful amino acids in the present invention.
  • other terminal azide amino acids that contain a different amino acid side chain are also useful in the invention.
  • the azido-analog of L-lysine contains four methylene units between the ⁇ -carbon of the amino acid and the terminal azide of the amino acid side chain.
  • the invention also contemplates the use of amino acids with fewer than or greater than four methylene units between the ⁇ -carbon and the terminal azide. Table 6 shows some amino acids useful in the preparation of peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention.
  • the amino acids and amino acid analogs are of the D-configuration. In other embodiments they are of the L-configuration. In some embodiments, some of the amino acids and amino acid analogs contained in the peptidomimetic are of the D-configuration while some of the amino acids and amino acid analogs are of the L-configuration. In some embodiments the amino acid analogs are ⁇ , ⁇ -disubstituted, such as ⁇ -methyl-L-propargylglycine, ⁇ -methyl-D-propargylglycine, ⁇ -azido-alpha-methyl-L-lysine, and ⁇ -azido-alpha-methyl-D-lysine.
  • amino acid analogs are N-alkylated, e.g., N-methyl-L-propargylglycine, N-methyl-D-propargylglycine, N-methyl- ⁇ -azido-L-lysine, and N-methyl- ⁇ -azido-D-lysine.
  • the —NH moiety of the amino acid is protected using a protecting group, including without limitation -Fmoc and -Boc. In other embodiments, the amino acid is not protected prior to synthesis of the peptidomimetic macrocycle.
  • peptidomimetic macrocycles of Formula III are synthesized.
  • the following synthetic schemes describe the preparation of such compounds.
  • the illustrative schemes depict amino acid analogs derived from L- or D-cysteine, in which L 1 and L 3 are both —(CH 2 )—.
  • L 1 and L 3 can be independently selected from the various structures disclosed herein.
  • the symbols “[AA] m ”, “[AA] m ”, “[AA] o ” represent a sequence of amide bond-linked moieties such as natural or unnatural amino acids.
  • each occurrence of “AA” is independent of any other occurrence of “AA”, and a formula such as “[AA] m ” encompasses, for example, sequences of non-identical amino acids as well as sequences of identical amino acids.
  • the peptidomimetic precursor contains two —SH moieties and is synthesized by solid-phase peptide synthesis (SPPS) using commercially available N- ⁇ -Fmoc amino acids such as N- ⁇ -Fmoc-S-trityl-L-cysteine or N- ⁇ -Fmoc-S-trityl-D-cysteine.
  • SPPS solid-phase peptide synthesis
  • Alpha-methylated versions of D-cysteine or L-cysteine are generated by known methods (Seebach et al. (1996), Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl.
  • N- ⁇ -Fmoc-S-trityl monomers by known methods (“ Bioorganic Chemistry: Peptides and Proteins ”, Oxford University Press, New York: 1998, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference).
  • the precursor peptidomimetic is then deprotected and cleaved from the solid-phase resin by standard conditions (e.g., strong acid such as 95% TFA).
  • the precursor peptidomimetic is reacted as a crude mixture or is purified prior to reaction with X-L 2 -Y in organic or aqueous solutions.
  • the alkylation reaction is performed under dilute conditions (i.e.
  • the alkylation reaction is performed in organic solutions such as liquid NH 3 (Mosberg et al. (1985), J. Am. Chem. Soc. 107:2986-2987; Szewczuk et al. (1992), Int. J. Peptide Protein Res. 40:233-242), NH 3 /MeOH, or NH 3 /DMF (Or et al. (1991), J. Org. Chem. 56:3146-3149).
  • the alkylation is performed in an aqueous solution such as 6M guanidinium HCL, pH 8 (Brunel et al. (2005), Chem. Commun. (20):2552-2554).
  • the solvent used for the alkylation reaction is DMF or dichloroethane.
  • the precursor peptidomimetic contains two or more —SH moieties, of which two are specially protected to allow their selective deprotection and subsequent alkylation for macrocycle formation.
  • the precursor peptidomimetic is synthesized by solid-phase peptide synthesis (SPPS) using commercially available N- ⁇ -Fmoc amino acids such as N- ⁇ -Fmoc-S-p-methoxytrityl-L-cysteine or N- ⁇ -Fmoc-S-p-methoxytrityl-D-cysteine.
  • SPPS solid-phase peptide synthesis
  • Alpha-methylated versions of D-cysteine or L-cysteine are generated by known methods (Seebach et al. (1996), Angew. Chem. Int. Ed.
  • the alkylation reaction is performed in organic solutions such as liquid NH 3 (Mosberg et al. (1985), J. Am. Chem. Soc. 107:2986-2987; Szewczuk et al. (1992), Int. J. Peptide Protein Res. 40:233-242), NH 3 /MeOH or NH 3 /DMF (Or et al. (1991), J. Org. Chem. 56:3146-3149).
  • the alkylation reaction is performed in DMF or dichloroethane.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycle is then deprotected and cleaved from the solid-phase resin by standard conditions (e.g., strong acid such as 95% TFA).
  • the peptidomimetic precursor contains two or more —SH moieties, of which two are specially protected to allow their selective deprotection and subsequent alkylation for macrocycle formation.
  • the peptidomimetic precursor is synthesized by solid-phase peptide synthesis (SPPS) using commercially available N- ⁇ -Fmoc amino acids such as N- ⁇ -Fmoc-S-p-methoxytrityl-L-cysteine, N- ⁇ -Fmoc-S-p-methoxytrityl-D-cysteine, N- ⁇ -Fmoc-S—S-t-butyl-L-cysteine, and N- ⁇ -Fmoc-S—S-t-butyl-D-cysteine.
  • SPPS solid-phase peptide synthesis
  • Alpha-methylated versions of D-cysteine or L-cysteine are generated by known methods (Seebach et al. (1996), Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl . 35:2708-2748, and references therein) and then converted to the appropriately protected N- ⁇ -Fmoc-S-p-methoxytrityl or N- ⁇ -Fmoc-S—S-t-butyl monomers by known methods ( Bioorganic Chemistry: Peptides and Proteins , Oxford University Press, New York: 1998, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference).
  • the S—S-tButyl protecting group of the peptidomimetic precursor is selectively cleaved by known conditions (e.g., 20% 2-mercaptoethanol in DMF, reference: Gauß et al. (2005), J. Comb. Chem. 7:174-177).
  • the precursor peptidomimetic is then reacted on the resin with a molar excess of X-L 2 -Y in an organic solution.
  • the reaction takes place in the presence of a hindered base such as diisopropylethylamine.
  • the Mmt protecting group of the peptidomimetic precursor is then selectively cleaved by standard conditions (e.g., mild acid such as 1% TFA in DCM).
  • the peptidomimetic precursor is then cyclized on the resin by treatment with a hindered base in organic solutions.
  • the alkylation reaction is performed in organic solutions such as NH 3 /MeOH or NH 3 /DMF (Or et al. (1991), J. Org. Chem. 56:3146-3149).
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycle is then deprotected and cleaved from the solid-phase resin by standard conditions (e.g., strong acid such as 95% TFA).
  • the peptidomimetic precursor contains two L-cysteine moieties.
  • the peptidomimetic precursor is synthesized by known biological expression systems in living cells or by known in vitro, cell-free, expression methods.
  • the precursor peptidomimetic is reacted as a crude mixture or is purified prior to reaction with X-L2-Y in organic or aqueous solutions.
  • the alkylation reaction is performed under dilute conditions (i.e. 0.15 mmol/L) to favor macrocyclization and to avoid polymerization.
  • the alkylation reaction is performed in organic solutions such as liquid NH 3 (Mosberg et al. (1985), J. Am. Chem. Soc.
  • the alkylation is performed in an aqueous solution such as 6M guanidinium HCL, pH 8 (Brunel et al. (2005), Chem. Commun. (20):2552-2554). In other embodiments, the alkylation is performed in DMF or dichloroethane.
  • the alkylation is performed in non-denaturing aqueous solutions, and in yet another embodiment the alkylation is performed under conditions that favor ⁇ -helical structure formation. In yet another embodiment, the alkylation is performed under conditions that favor the binding of the precursor peptidomimetic to another protein, so as to induce the formation of the bound ⁇ -helical conformation during the alkylation.
  • X and Y are envisioned which are suitable for reacting with thiol groups.
  • each X or Y is independently be selected from the general category shown in Table 5.
  • X and Y are halides such as —Cl, —Br or —I.
  • Any of the macrocycle-forming linkers described herein may be used in any combination with any of the sequences shown in Tables 1-4 and also with any of the R— substituents indicated herein.
  • Table 8 shows exemplary macrocycles of the invention (SEQ ID NOS 89-94, respectively, in order of appearance).
  • N L represents norleucine and replaces a methionine residue. It is envisioned that similar linkers are used to synthesize peptidomimetic macrocycles based on the polypeptide sequences disclosed in Table 1 through Table 4.
  • the present invention contemplates the use of both naturally-occurring and non-naturally-occurring amino acids and amino acid analogs in the synthesis of the peptidomimetic macrocycles of Formula (III).
  • Any amino acid or amino acid analog amenable to the synthetic methods employed for the synthesis of stable bis-sulfhydryl containing peptidomimetic macrocycles can be used in the present invention.
  • cysteine is contemplated as a useful amino acid in the present invention.
  • sulfur containing amino acids other than cysteine that contain a different amino acid side chain are also useful.
  • cysteine contains one methylene unit between the ⁇ -carbon of the amino acid and the terminal —SH of the amino acid side chain.
  • the invention also contemplates the use of amino acids with multiple methylene units between the ⁇ -carbon and the terminal —SH.
  • Non-limiting examples include ⁇ -methyl-L-homocysteine and ⁇ -methyl-D-homocysteine.
  • the amino acids and amino acid analogs are of the D-configuration. In other embodiments they are of the L-configuration.
  • some of the amino acids and amino acid analogs contained in the peptidomimetic are of the D-configuration while some of the amino acids and amino acid analogs are of the L-configuration.
  • the amino acid analogs are ⁇ , ⁇ -disubstituted, such as ⁇ -methyl-L-cysteine and ⁇ -methyl-D-cysteine.
  • the invention includes macrocycles in which macrocycle-forming linkers are used to link two or more —SH moieties in the peptidomimetic precursors to form the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention.
  • the macrocycle-forming linkers impart conformational rigidity, increased metabolic stability and/or increased cell penetrability.
  • the macrocycle-forming linkages stabilize the ⁇ -helical secondary structure of the peptidomimetic macrocyles.
  • the macrocycle-forming linkers are of the formula X-L 2 -Y, wherein both X and Y are the same or different moieties, as defined above.
  • Both X and Y have the chemical characteristics that allow one macrocycle-forming linker -L 2 - to bis alkylate the bis-sulfhydryl containing peptidomimetic precursor.
  • the linker -L 2 - includes alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, heteroalkylene, cycloalkylene, heterocycloalkylene, cycloarylene, or heterocycloarylene, or —R 4 —K—R 4 —, all of which can be optionally substituted with an R 5 group, as defined above.
  • one to three carbon atoms within the macrocycle-forming linkers -L 2 -, other than the carbons attached to the —SH of the sulfhydryl containing amino acid, are optionally substituted with a heteroatom such as N, S or O.
  • the L 2 component of the macrocycle-forming linker X-L 2 -Y may be varied in length depending on, among other things, the distance between the positions of the two amino acid analogs used to form the peptidomimetic macrocycle. Furthermore, as the lengths of L 1 and/or L 3 components of the macrocycle-forming linker are varied, the length of L 2 can also be varied in order to create a linker of appropriate overall length for forming a stable peptidomimetic macrocycle. For example, if the amino acid analogs used are varied by adding an additional methylene unit to each of L 1 and L 3 , the length of L 2 are decreased in length by the equivalent of approximately two methylene units to compensate for the increased lengths of L 1 and L 3 .
  • L 2 is an alkylene group of the formula —(CH 2 )— n , where n is an integer between about 1 and about 15. For example, n is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10. In other embodiments, L 2 is an alkenylene group. In still other embodiments, L 2 is an aryl group.
  • Table 9 shows additional embodiments of X-L 2 -Y groups.
  • Additional methods of forming peptidomimetic macrocycles which are envisioned as suitable to perform the present invention include those disclosed by Mustapa, M. Firouz Mohd et al., J. Org. Chem (2003), 68, pp. 8193-8198; Yang, Bin et al. Bioorg Med. Chem. Lett. (2004), 14, pp. 1403-1406; U.S. Pat. No. 5,364,851; U.S. Pat. No. 5,446,128; U.S. Pat. No. 5,824,483; U.S. Pat. No. 6,713,280; and U.S. Pat. No. 7,202,332.
  • aminoacid precursors are used containing an additional substituent R— at the alpha position.
  • Such aminoacids are incorporated into the macrocycle precursor at the desired positions, which may be at the positions where the crosslinker is substituted or, alternatively, elsewhere in the sequence of the macrocycle precursor. Cyclization of the precursor is then effected according to the indicated method.
  • the properties of the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention are assayed, for example, by using the methods described below.
  • polypeptides with ⁇ -helical domains will reach a dynamic equilibrium between random coil structures and ⁇ -helical structures, often expressed as a “percent helicity”.
  • unmodified pro-apoptotic BH3 domains are predominantly random coils in solution, with ⁇ -helical content usually under 25%.
  • Peptidomimetic macrocycles with optimized linkers possess, for example, an alpha-helicity that is at least two-fold greater than that of a corresponding uncrosslinked polypeptide.
  • macrocycles of the invention will possess an alpha-helicity of greater than 50%.
  • aqueous solution e.g. 50 mM potassium phosphate solution at pH 7, or distilled H 2 O, to concentrations of 25-50 ⁇ M.
  • Circular dichroism (CD) spectra are obtained on a spectropolarimeter (e.g., Jasco J-710) using standard measurement parameters (e.g. temperature, 20° C.; wavelength, 190-260 nm; step resolution, 0.5 nm; speed, 20 nm/sec; accumulations, 10; response, 1 sec; bandwidth, 1 nm; path length, 0.1 cm).
  • the ⁇ -helical content of each peptide is calculated by dividing the mean residue ellipticity (e.g. [ ⁇ ]222 obs) by the reported value for a model helical decapeptide (Yang et al. (1986), Methods Enzymol. 130:208)).
  • a peptidomimetic macrocycle of the invention comprising a secondary structure such as an ⁇ -helix exhibits, for example, a higher melting temperature than a corresponding uncrosslinked polypeptide.
  • peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention exhibit Tm of >60° C. representing a highly stable structure in aqueous solutions.
  • Tm is determined by measuring the change in ellipticity over a temperature range (e.g.
  • spectropolarimeter e.g., Jasco J-710
  • standard parameters e.g. wavelength 222 nm; step resolution, 0.5 nm; speed, 20 nm/sec; accumulations, 10; response, 1 sec; bandwidth, 1 nm; temperature increase rate: 1° C./min; path length, 0.1 cm.
  • the amide bond of the peptide backbone is susceptible to hydrolysis by proteases, thereby rendering peptidic compounds vulnerable to rapid degradation in vivo. Peptide helix formation, however, typically buries the amide backbone and therefore may shield it from proteolytic cleavage.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the present invention may be subjected to in vitro trypsin proteolysis to assess for any change in degradation rate compared to a corresponding uncrosslinked polypeptide.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycle and a corresponding uncrosslinked polypeptide are incubated with trypsin agarose and the reactions quenched at various time points by centrifugation and subsequent HPLC injection to quantitate the residual substrate by ultraviolet absorption at 280 nm.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycle and peptidomimetic precursor (5 mcg) are incubated with trypsin agarose (Pierce) (S/E ⁇ 125) for 0, 10, 20, 90, and 180 minutes. Reactions are quenched by tabletop centrifugation at high speed; remaining substrate in the isolated supernatant is quantified by HPLC-based peak detection at 280 nm.
  • Peptidomimetic macrocycles with optimized linkers possess, for example, an ex vivo half-life that is at least two-fold greater than that of a corresponding uncrosslinked polypeptide, and possess an ex vivo half-life of 12 hours or more.
  • a variety of assays may be used.
  • a peptidomimetic macrocycle and/or a corresponding uncrosslinked polypeptide (2 mcg) are each incubated with fresh mouse, rat and/or human serum (e.g. 1-2 mL) at 37° C. for 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, and 24 hours. Samples of differing macrocycle concentration may be prepared by serial dilution with serum.
  • the samples are extracted by transferring 100 ⁇ l of sera to 2 ml centrifuge tubes followed by the addition of 10 ⁇ L of 50% formic acid and 500 ⁇ L acetonitrile and centrifugation at 14,000 RPM for 10 min at 4 ⁇ 2° C. The supernatants are then transferred to fresh 2 ml tubes and evaporated on Turbovap under N 2 ⁇ 10 psi, 37° C. The samples are reconstituted in 100 ⁇ L of 50:50 acetonitrile:water and submitted to LC-MS/MS analysis. Equivalent or similar procedures for testing ex vivo stability are known and may be used to determine stability of macrocycles in serum.
  • FPA fluorescence polarization assay
  • fluoresceinated peptidomimetic macrocycles (25 nM) are incubated with the acceptor protein (25-1000 nM) in binding buffer (140 mM NaCl, 50 mM Tris-HCL, pH 7.4) for 30 minutes at room temperature. Binding activity is measured, for example, by fluorescence polarization on a luminescence spectrophotometer (e.g. Perkin-Elmer LS50B). Kd values may be determined by nonlinear regression analysis using, for example, Graphpad Prism software (GraphPad Software, Inc., San Diego, Calif.).
  • a peptidomimetic macrocycle of the invention shows, in some instances, similar or lower Kd than a corresponding uncrosslinked polypeptide.
  • Acceptor proteins for BH3-peptides such as BCL-2, BCL-X L , BAX or MCL1 may, for example, be used in this assay. Additional methods to perform such assays are described in the Example section below.
  • a fluorescence polarization assay utilizing a fluoresceinated peptidomimetic macrocycle derived from a peptidomimetic precursor sequence is used, for example.
  • the FPA technique measures the molecular orientation and mobility using polarized light and fluorescent tracer. When excited with polarized light, fluorescent tracers (e.g., FITC) attached to molecules with high apparent molecular weights (e.g.
  • FITC-labeled peptides bound to a large protein emit higher levels of polarized fluorescence due to their slower rates of rotation as compared to fluorescent tracers attached to smaller molecules (e.g. FITC-labeled peptides that are free in solution).
  • a compound that antagonizes the interaction between the fluoresceinated peptidomimetic macrocycle and an acceptor protein will be detected in a competitive binding FPA experiment.
  • putative antagonist compounds (1 nM to 1 mM) and a fluoresceinated peptidomimetic macrocycle (25 nM) are incubated with the acceptor protein (50 nM) in binding buffer (140 mM NaCl, 50 mM Tris-HCL, pH 7.4) for 30 minutes at room temperature.
  • Antagonist binding activity is measured, for example, by fluorescence polarization on a luminescence spectrophotometer (e.g. Perkin-Elmer LS50B).
  • Kd values may be determined by nonlinear regression analysis using, for example, Graphpad Prism software (GraphPad Software, Inc., San Diego, Calif.).
  • Any class of molecule such as small organic molecules, peptides, oligonucleotides or proteins can be examined as putative antagonists in this assay.
  • Acceptor proteins for BH3-peptides such as BCL2, BCL-XL, BAX or MCL1 can be used in this assay. Additional methods to perform such assays are described in the Example section below.
  • FITC-labeled fluoresceinated
  • biotinylated compounds for 4 hrs in the absence of serum, followed by serum replacement and further incubation that ranges from 4-18 hrs.
  • Opti-MEM Invitrogen
  • Cells are then pelleted and incubated in lysis buffer (50 mM Tris [pH 7.6], 150 mM NaCl, 1% CHAPS and protease inhibitor cocktail) for 10 minutes at 4° C.
  • NP-40 or Triton X-100 may be used instead of CHAPS. Extracts are centrifuged at 14,000 rpm for 15 minutes and supernatants collected and incubated with 10 ⁇ l goat anti-FITC antibody or streptavidin-coated beads for 2 hrs, rotating at 4° C. followed by further 2 hrs incubation at 4° C. with protein A/G Sepharose (50 ⁇ l of 50% bead slurry).). No secondary step is necessary if using streptavidin beads to pull down biotinylated compounds. Alternatively FITC-labeled or biotinylated compounds are incubated with cell lysates, prepared as described above, for 2 hrs, rotating at 4° C.
  • the beads and cell lysates may be electrophoresed using 4%-12% gradient Bis-Tris gels followed by transfer into Immobilon-P membranes. After blocking, blots may be incubated with an antibody that detects FITC or biotin, respectively and also with one or more antibodies that detect proteins that bind to the peptidomimetic macrocycle, including BCL2, MCL1, BCL-XL, A1, BAX, and BAK. The lysate blots are also probed with anti-Hsc-70 for loading control. Alternatively, after electrophoresis the gel may be silver stained to detect proteins that come down specifically with FITC-labeled or biotinylated compounds.
  • a peptidomimetic macrocycle is, for example, more cell permeable compared to a corresponding uncrosslinked polypeptide.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycles are more cell permeable than a corresponding uncrosslinked polypeptides.
  • Peptidomimetic macrocycles with optimized linkers possess, for example, cell penetrability that is at least two-fold greater than a corresponding uncrosslinked polypeptide, and often 20% or more of the applied peptidomimetic macrocycle will be observed to have penetrated the cell after 4 hours.
  • peptidomimetic macrocycles and corresponding uncrosslinked polypeptides To measure the cell penetrability of peptidomimetic macrocycles and corresponding uncrosslinked polypeptides, intact cells are incubated with fluoresceinated peptidomimetic macrocycles or corresponding uncrosslinked polypeptides (10 ⁇ M) for 4 hrs in serum free media at 37° C., washed twice with media and incubated with trypsin (0.25%) for 10 min at 37° C. The cells are washed again and resuspended in PBS. Cellular fluorescence is analyzed, for example, by using either a FACSCalibur flow cytometer or Cellomics' KineticScan® HCS Reader. Additional methods of quantitating cellular penetration may be used. A particular method is described in more details in the Examples provided.
  • EC 50 refers to the half maximal effective concentration, which is the concentration of peptidomimetic macrocycle at which 50% the population is viable.
  • assays that measure Annexin V and caspase activation are optionally used to assess whether the peptidomimetic macrocycles kill cells by activating the apoptotic machinery.
  • the Cell Titer-glo assay is used which determines cell viability as a function of intracellular ATP concentration.
  • the compounds are, for example, administered to mice and/or rats by IV, IP, SC, PO or inhalation routes at concentrations ranging from 0.1 to 50 mg/kg and blood specimens withdrawn at 0′, 5′, 15′, 30′, 1 hr, 4 hrs, 8 hrs, 12 hrs, 24 hrs and 48 hrs post-injection. Levels of intact compound in 25 ⁇ L of fresh serum are then measured by LC-MS/MS as described herein.
  • the compounds are, for example, given alone (IP, IV, SC, PO, by inhalation or nasal routes) or in combination with sub-optimal doses of relevant chemotherapy (e.g., cyclophosphamide, doxorubicin, etoposide).
  • relevant chemotherapy e.g., cyclophosphamide, doxorubicin, etoposide.
  • 5 ⁇ 10 6 SEMK2 cells (established from the bone marrow of a patient with acute lymphoblastic leukemia) that stably express luciferase are injected by tail vein in NOD-SCID, SCID-beige or NOD.IL2rg KO mice 3 hrs after they have been subjected to total body irradiation.
  • Non-radiated mice may also be used for these studies. If left untreated, this form of leukemia is fatal in 3 weeks in this model. The leukemia is readily monitored, for example, by injecting the mice with D-luciferin (60 mg/kg) and imaging the anesthetized animals (e.g., Xenogen In Vivo Imaging System, Caliper Life Sciences, Hopkinton, Mass.). Total body bioluminescence is quantified by integration of photonic flux (photons/sec) by Living Image Software (Caliper Life Sciences, Hopkinton, Mass.).
  • D-luciferin 60 mg/kg
  • Imaging the anesthetized animals e.g., Xenogen In Vivo Imaging System, Caliper Life Sciences, Hopkinton, Mass.
  • Total body bioluminescence is quantified by integration of photonic flux (photons/sec) by Living Image Software (Caliper Life Sciences, Hopkinton, Mass.).
  • Peptidomimetic macrocycles alone or in combination with sub-optimal doses of relevant chemotherapeutics agents are, for example, administered to leukemic mice (8-10 days after injection/day 1 of experiment, in bioluminescence range of 14-16) by tail vein or IP routes at doses ranging from 0.1 mg/kg to 50 mg/kg for 7 to 21 days.
  • the mice are imaged throughout the experiment every other day and survival monitored daily for the duration of the experiment.
  • Expired mice are optionally subjected to necropsy at the end of the experiment.
  • Another animal model is implantation into NOD-SCID mice of DoHH2, a cell line derived from human follicular lymphoma, that stably expresses luciferase. These in vivo tests optionally generate preliminary pharmacokinetic, pharmacodynamic and toxicology data.
  • peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention are selected and separated in treatment and one or more control groups, wherein the treatment group is administered a peptidomimetic macrocycle of the invention, while the control groups receive a placebo, a known anti-cancer drug, or the standard of care.
  • the treatment safety and efficacy of the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention can thus be evaluated by performing comparisons of the patient groups with respect to factors such as survival and quality-of-life.
  • the patient group treated with a peptidomimetic macrocyle show improved long-term survival compared to a patient control group treated with a placebo or the standard of care.
  • Methods of administration include but are not limited to intradermal, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intravenous, subcutaneous, intranasal, epidural, oral, sublingual, intracerebral, intravaginal, transdermal, rectal, by inhalation, or topical by application to ears, nose, eyes, or skin.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention also include pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives or prodrugs thereof.
  • a “pharmaceutically acceptable derivative” means any pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, salt of an ester, pro-drug or other derivative of a compound of this invention which, upon administration to a recipient, is capable of providing (directly or indirectly) a compound of this invention.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives may increase the bioavailability of the compounds of the invention when administered to a mammal (e.g., by increasing absorption into the blood of an orally administered compound) or which increases delivery of the active compound to a biological compartment (e.g., the brain or lymphatic system) relative to the parent species.
  • Some pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives include a chemical group which increases aqueous solubility or active transport across the gastrointestinal mucosa.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention are modified by covalently or non-covalently joining appropriate functional groups to enhance selective biological properties.
  • modifications include those which increase biological penetration into a given biological compartment (e.g., blood, lymphatic system, central nervous system), increase oral availability, increase solubility to allow administration by injection, alter metabolism, and alter rate of excretion.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the compounds of this invention include those derived from pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic and organic acids and bases.
  • suitable acid salts include acetate, adipate, benzoate, benzenesulfonate, butyrate, citrate, digluconate, dodecylsulfate, formate, fumarate, glycolate, hemisulfate, heptanoate, hexanoate, hydrochloride, hydrobromide, hydroiodide, lactate, maleate, malonate, methanesulfonate, 2-naphthalenesulfonate, nicotinate, nitrate, palmoate, phosphate, picrate, pivalate, propionate, salicylate, succinate, sulfate, tartrate, tosylate and undecanoate.
  • Salts derived from appropriate bases include alkali metal (e.g., sodium), alkaline earth metal (e.g., magnesium), ammonium and N
  • pharmaceutically acceptable carriers include either solid or liquid carriers.
  • Solid form preparations include powders, tablets, pills, capsules, cachets, suppositories, and dispersible granules.
  • a solid carrier can be one or more substances, which also acts as diluents, flavoring agents, binders, preservatives, tablet disintegrating agents, or an encapsulating material. Details on techniques for formulation and administration are well described in the scientific and patent literature, see, e.g., the latest edition of Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Maack Publishing Co, Easton Pa.
  • the carrier is a finely divided solid, which is in a mixture with the finely divided active component.
  • the active component is mixed with the carrier having the necessary binding properties in suitable proportions and compacted in the shape and size desired.
  • Suitable solid excipients are carbohydrate or protein fillers include, but are not limited to sugars, including dextrose, lactose, sucrose, mannitol, or sorbitol; starch from corn, wheat, rice, potato, or other plants; cellulose such as methyl cellulose, hydroxypropylmethyl-cellulose, or sodium carboxymethylcellulose; and gums including arabic and tragacanth; as well as proteins such as gelatin and collagen.
  • disintegrating or solubilizing agents are added, such as the cross-linked polyvinyl pyrrolidone, agar, alginic acid, or a salt thereof, such as sodium alginate.
  • Liquid form preparations include solutions, suspensions, and emulsions, for example, water or water/propylene glycol solutions.
  • liquid preparations can be formulated in solution in aqueous polyethylene glycol solution.
  • parenteral refers modes of administration including intravenous, intraarterial, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intrasternal, and subcutaneous.
  • the pharmaceutical preparation is preferably in unit dosage form.
  • the preparation is subdivided into unit doses containing appropriate quantities of the active component.
  • the unit dosage form can be a packaged preparation, the package containing discrete quantities of preparation, such as packeted tablets, capsules, and powders in vials or ampoules.
  • the unit dosage form can be a capsule, tablet, cachet, or lozenge itself, or it can be the appropriate number of any of these in packaged form.
  • compositions of this invention comprise a combination of a peptidomimetic macrocycle and one or more additional therapeutic or prophylactic agents
  • both the compound and the additional agent should be present at dosage levels of between about 1 to 100%, and more preferably between about 5 to 95% of the dosage normally administered in a monotherapy regimen.
  • the additional agents are administered separately, as part of a multiple dose regimen, from the compounds of this invention.
  • those agents are part of a single dosage form, mixed together with the compounds of this invention in a single composition.
  • the present invention provides novel peptidomimetic macrocycles that are useful in competitive binding assays to identify agents which bind to the natural ligand(s) of the proteins or peptides upon which the peptidomimetic macrocycles are modeled.
  • labeled peptidomimetic macrocycles based on BH3 can be used in a BCL-X L binding assay along with small molecules that competitively bind to BCL-X L .
  • Competitive binding studies allow for rapid in vitro evaluation and determination of drug candidates specific for the BH3/BCL-X L system.
  • the invention further provides for the generation of antibodies against the peptidomimetic macrocycles.
  • these antibodies specifically bind both the peptidomimetic macrocycle and the BH3 peptidomimetic precursors upon which the peptidomimetic macrocycles are derived.
  • Such antibodies for example, disrupt the BH3/BCL-XL systems, respectively.
  • the present invention provides for both prophylactic and therapeutic methods of treating a subject at risk of (or susceptible to) a disorder or having a disorder associated with aberrant (e.g., insufficient or excessive) BCL-2 family member expression or activity (e.g., extrinsic or intrinsic apoptotic pathway abnormalities). It is believed that some BCL-2 type disorders are caused, at least in part, by an abnormal level of one or more BCL-2 family members (e.g., over or under expression), or by the presence of one or more BCL-2 family members exhibiting abnormal activity. As such, the reduction in the level and/or activity of the BCL-2 family member or the enhancement of the level and/or activity of the BCL-2 family member, is used, for example, to ameliorate or reduce the adverse symptoms of the disorder.
  • aberrant e.g., insufficient or excessive
  • BCL-2 family member expression or activity e.g., extrinsic or intrinsic apoptotic pathway abnormalities.
  • BCL-2 family member expression or activity e.g.
  • the compounds of the invention are used to treat disorders associated with expression or overexpression of Mcl-1.
  • Mcl-1 has been shown to be expressed in many tissues and neoplastic cell lines and is thought to participate in the development of malignancies (Thallinger et al. (2004) Clin. Cancer Res. 10:4185-4191).
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention may be used for the treatment of such malignancies.
  • the disorder being treated is differentially responsive to the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention.
  • the cancer is treated with a BIM peptidomimetic macrocycle and is at least 2-fold less sensitive to treatment using a BID polypeptide (such as a BID peptidomimetic macrocycle or uncrosslinked polypeptide) as measured in an in vitro cell viability assay.
  • a BID polypeptide such as a BID peptidomimetic macrocycle or uncrosslinked polypeptide
  • the cancer is at least 5-fold less sensitive to treatment using a BID polypeptide as measured in an in vitro cell viability assay.
  • the cancer is at least 8-fold less sensitive to treatment using a BID polypeptide as measured in an in vitro cell viability assay.
  • the cancer is treated with a BID peptidomimetic macrocycle and is at least 2-fold less sensitive to treatment using a BIM polypeptide (such as a BIM peptidomimetic macrocycle or uncrosslinked polypeptide) as measured in an in vitro cell viability assay.
  • a BIM polypeptide such as a BIM peptidomimetic macrocycle or uncrosslinked polypeptide
  • the cancer is at least 5-fold less sensitive to treatment using a BIM polypeptide as measured in an in vitro cell viability assay.
  • the cancer is at least 8-fold less sensitive to treatment using a BIM polypeptide as measured in an in vitro cell viability assay.
  • a method of treating a human patient comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of a BCL-family protein and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of the BCL-family protein is detected.
  • BCL-family proteins include, for example, BCL-2, BCL-XL, MCL-1, Bfl1/A1, BOO/DIVA, NRH/NR13, BAX, BAD, BAK, BOK, BIK, PUMA, BIM, BMF, BLK, BNIP3, HRK, NIX, SPIKE, and Noxa.
  • a method of treating a human patient comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of BCL-2 in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of BCL-2 is detected.
  • a method of treating a human patient comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of BCL-XL in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of BCL-XL is detected.
  • a method of treating a human patient comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of MCL-1 in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of MCL-1 is detected.
  • a method of treating a human patient comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of BAX in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of BAX is detected.
  • a method of treating a human patient comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of BAD in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of BAD is detected.
  • a method of treating a human patient comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of BAK in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of BAK is detected.
  • a method of treating a human patient comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of PUMA in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of PUMA is detected.
  • a method of treating a human patient comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of Noxa in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of Noxa is detected.
  • a method of treating a human patient comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of Noxa in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of Noxa is detected.
  • a method of treating a human patient comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of Bfl1/A1 in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of Bfl1/A1 is detected.
  • a method of treating a human patient comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of BOO/DIVA in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of BOO/DIVA is detected.
  • a method of treating a human patient comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of NRH/NR13 in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of NRH/NR13 is detected.
  • a method of treating a human patient comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of BOK in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of BOK is detected.
  • a method of treating a human patient comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of BIK in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of BIK is detected.
  • a method of treating a human patient comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of BMF in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of BMF is detected.
  • a method of treating a human patient comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of BLK in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of BLK is detected.
  • a method of treating a human patient comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of BNIP3 in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of BNIP3 is detected.
  • a method of treating a human patient comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of HRK in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of HRK is detected.
  • a method of treating a human patient comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of Nix in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of Nix is detected.
  • a method of treating a human patient comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of SPIKE in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of SPIKE is detected.
  • treatment is defined as the application or administration of a therapeutic agent to a patient, or application or administration of a therapeutic agent to an isolated tissue or cell line from a patient, who has a disease, a symptom of disease or a predisposition toward a disease, with the purpose to cure, heal, alleviate, relieve, alter, remedy, ameliorate, improve or affect the disease, the symptoms of disease or the predisposition toward disease.
  • the peptidomimetics macrocycles of the invention is used to treat, prevent, and/or diagnose cancers and neoplastic conditions.
  • cancer hyperproliferative and neoplastic refer to cells having the capacity for autonomous growth, i.e., an abnormal state or condition characterized by rapidly proliferating cell growth.
  • hyperproliferative and neoplastic disease states may be categorized as pathologic, i.e., characterizing or constituting a disease state, or may be categorized as non-pathologic, i.e., a deviation from normal but not associated with a disease state.
  • metastatic tumor can arise from a multitude of primary tumor types, including but not limited to those of breast, lung, liver, colon and ovarian origin.
  • Primary tumor types including but not limited to those of breast, lung, liver, colon and ovarian origin.
  • “Pathologic hyperproliferative” cells occur in disease states characterized by malignant tumor growth. Examples of non-pathologic hyperproliferative cells include proliferation of cells associated with wound repair. Examples of cellular proliferative and/or differentiative disorders include cancer, e.g., carcinoma, sarcoma, or metastatic disorders.
  • the peptidomimetics macrocycles are novel therapeutic agents for controlling breast cancer, ovarian cancer, colon cancer, lung cancer, metastasis of such cancers and the like.
  • cancers or neoplastic conditions include, but are not limited to, a fibrosarcoma, myosarcoma, liposarcoma, chondrosarcoma, osteogenic sarcoma, chordoma, angiosarcoma, endotheliosarcoma, lymphangiosarcoma, lymphangioendotheliosarcoma, synovioma, mesothelioma, Ewing's tumor, leiomyosarcoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, gastric cancer, esophageal cancer, rectal cancer, pancreatic cancer, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, uterine cancer, cancer of the head and neck, skin cancer, brain cancer, squamous cell carcinoma, sebaceous gland carcinoma, papillary carcinoma, papillary adenocarcinoma, cystadenocarcinoma, medullary carcinoma, bronchogenic carcinoma, renal cell carcinoma, hepatoma, bile
  • proliferative disorders examples include hematopoietic neoplastic disorders.
  • hematopoietic neoplastic disorders includes diseases involving hyperplastic/neoplastic cells of hematopoietic origin, e.g., arising from myeloid, lymphoid or erythroid lineages, or precursor cells thereof.
  • the diseases arise from poorly differentiated acute leukemias, e.g., erythroblastic leukemia and acute megakaryoblastic leukemia.
  • myeloid disorders include, but are not limited to, acute promyeloid leukemia (APML), acute myelogenous leukemia (AML) and chronic myelogenous leukemia (CML) (reviewed in Vaickus (1991), Crit Rev. Oncol./Hemotol. 11:267-97); lymphoid malignancies include, but are not limited to acute lymphoblastic leukemia (ALL) which includes B-lineage ALL and T-lineage ALL, chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL), prolymphocytic leukemia (PLL), hairy cell leukemia (HLL) and Waldenstrom's macroglobulinemia (WM).
  • ALL acute lymphoblastic leukemia
  • ALL chronic lymphocytic leukemia
  • PLL prolymphocytic leukemia
  • HLL hairy cell leukemia
  • WM Waldenstrom's macroglobulinemia
  • malignant lymphomas include, but are not limited to non-Hodgkin lymphoma and variants thereof, peripheral T cell lymphomas, adult T cell leukemia/lymphoma (ATL), cutaneous T-cell lymphoma (CTCL), large granular lymphocytic leukemia (LGF), Hodgkin's disease and Reed-Stemberg disease.
  • proliferative breast disease including, e.g., epithelial hyperplasia, sclerosing adenosis, and small duct papillomas
  • tumors e.g., stromal tumors such as fibroadenoma, phyllodes tumor, and sarcomas, and epithelial tumors such as large duct papilloma
  • carcinoma of the breast including in situ (noninvasive) carcinoma that includes ductal carcinoma in situ (including Paget's disease) and lobular carcinoma in situ, and invasive (infiltrating) carcinoma including, but not limited to, invasive ductal carcinoma, invasive lobular carcinoma, medullary carcinoma, colloid (mucinous) carcinoma, tubular carcinoma, and invasive papillary carcinoma, and miscellaneous malignant neoplasms.
  • Disorders in the male breast include, but are not limited to, gyn
  • Examples of cellular proliferative and/or differentiative disorders of the lung include, but are not limited to, bronchogenic carcinoma, including paraneoplastic syndromes, bronchioloalveolar carcinoma, neuroendocrine tumors, such as bronchial carcinoid, miscellaneous tumors, and metastatic tumors; pathologies of the pleura, including inflammatory pleural effusions, noninflammatory pleural effusions, pneumothorax, and pleural tumors, including solitary fibrous tumors (pleural fibroma) and malignant mesothelioma.
  • bronchogenic carcinoma including paraneoplastic syndromes, bronchioloalveolar carcinoma, neuroendocrine tumors, such as bronchial carcinoid, miscellaneous tumors, and metastatic tumors
  • pathologies of the pleura including inflammatory pleural effusions, noninflammatory pleural effusions, pneumothorax, and pleural tumors, including solitary fibrous tumors (pleural fibro
  • Examples of cellular proliferative and/or differentiative disorders of the colon include, but are not limited to, non-neoplastic polyps, adenomas, familial syndromes, colorectal carcinogenesis, colorectal carcinoma, and carcinoid tumors.
  • Examples of cellular proliferative and/or differentiative disorders of the liver include, but are not limited to, nodular hyperplasias, adenomas, and malignant tumors, including primary carcinoma of the liver and metastatic tumors.
  • ovarian tumors such as, tumors of coelomic epithelium, serous tumors, mucinous tumors, endometrioid tumors, clear cell adenocarcinoma, cystadenofibroma, Brenner tumor, surface epithelial tumors; germ cell tumors such as mature (benign) teratomas, monodermal teratomas, immature malignant teratomas, dysgerminoma, endodermal sinus tumor, choriocarcinoma; sex cord-stomal tumors such as, granulosa-theca cell tumors, the comafibromas, and roblastomas, hill cell tumors, and gonadoblastoma; and metastatic tumors such as Krukenberg tumors.
  • ovarian tumors such as, tumors of coelomic epithelium, serous tumors, mucinous tumors, endometrioid tumors, clear cell adenocarcinoma, cysta
  • the invention provides methods of treating breast cancer by administering the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention.
  • Breast cancer includes invasive breast carcinomas, such as invasive ductal carcinoma, invasive lobular carcinoma, tubular carcinoma, invasive cribriform carcinoma, medullary carcinoma, mucinous carcinoma and other tumours with abundant mucin, cystadenocarcinoma, columnar cell mucinous carcinoma, signet ring cell carcinoma, neuroendocrine tumours (including solid neuroendocrine carcinoma, atypical carcinoid tumour, small cell/oat cell carcinoma, or large cell neuroendocrine carcioma), invasive papillary carcinoma, invasive micropapillary carcinoma, apocrine carcinoma, metaplastic carcinomas, pure epithelial metaplastic carciomas, mixed epithelial/mesenchymal metaplastic carcinomas, lipid-rich carcinoma, secretory carcinoma, oncocytic carcinoma, adenoid cystic carcinoma, acinic cell carcinoma, glycogen-rich clear cell carcinoma,
  • Treatment of breast cancer may be effected in conjunction with any additional therapy, such as a therapy that is part of the standard of care.
  • a surgical technique such as lumpectomy or mastectomy may be performed prior to, during, or following treatment with the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention.
  • radiation therapy may be used for the treatment of breast cancer in conjunction with the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention are administered in combination with a second therapeutic agent.
  • a second therapeutic agent may be a chemotherapeutic agent such as an individual drug or combination of drugs and therapies.
  • the chemotherapeutic agent can be an adjuvant chemotherapeutic treatment such as CMF (cyclophosphamide, methotrexate, and 5-fluorouracil); FAC or CAF (5-fluorouracil, doxorubicin, cyclophosphamide); AC or CA (doxorubicin and cyclophosphamide); AC-Taxol (AC followed by paclitaxel); TAC (docetaxel, doxorubicin, and cyclophosphamide); FEC (5-fluorouracil, epirubicin and cyclophosphamide); FECD (FEC followed by docetaxel); TC (docetaxel and cyclophosphamide).
  • CMF cyclophosphamide, methotrexate, and 5-fluorouracil
  • FAC or CAF 5-fluorouracil, doxorubicin, cyclophosphamide
  • AC or CA
  • trastuzumab may also be added to the regimen depending on the tumor characteristics (i.e. HER2/neu status) and risk of relapse.
  • Hormonal therapy may also be appropriate before, during or following chemotherapeutic treatment.
  • tamoxifen may be administered or a compound in the category of aromatase inhibitors including, but not limited to aminogluthetimide, anastrozole, exemestane, formestane, letrozole, or vorozole.
  • an antiangiogenic agent may be used in combination therapy for the treatment of breast cancer.
  • the antiangiogenic agent may be an anti-VEGF agent including, but not limited to bevacizumab.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention may be used to treat ovarian cancer.
  • Ovarian cancers include ovarian tumors such as, tumors of coelomic epithelium, serous tumors, mucinous tumors, endometrioid tumors, clear cell adenocarcinoma, cystadenofibroma, Brenner tumor, surface epithelial tumors; germ cell tumors such as mature (benign) teratomas, monodermal teratomas, immature malignant teratomas, dysgerminoma, endodermal sinus tumor, choriocarcinoma; sex cord-stomal tumors such as, granulosa-theca cell tumors, the comafibromas, and roblastomas, hill cell tumors, and gonadoblastoma; and metastatic tumors such as Krukenberg tumors.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention may be administered in conjunction with a second therapy such as a therapy that is part of the standard of care.
  • a second therapy such as a therapy that is part of the standard of care.
  • Surgery, immunotherapy, chemotherapy, hormone therapy, radiation therapy, or a combination thereof are some possible treatments available for ovarian cancer.
  • Some possible surgical procedures include debulking, and a unilateral or bilateral oophorectomy and/or a unilateral or bilateral salpigectomy.
  • Anti-cancer drugs that may be used include cyclophosphamide, etoposide, altretamine, and ifosfamide. Hormone therapy with the drug tamoxifen may be used to shrink ovarian tumors. Radiation therapy may be external beam radiation therapy and/or brachytherapy.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention may be used to treat prostate cancer.
  • Prostate cancers include adenocarcinomas and metastasized adenocarcinomas.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention may be administered in conjunction with a second therapy such as a therapy that is part of the standard of care.
  • Treatment for prostate cancer may involve surgery, radiation therapy, High Intensity Focused Ultrasound (HIFU), chemotherapy, cryosurgery, hormonal therapy, or any combination thereof.
  • Surgery may involve prostatectomy, radical perineal prostatectomy, laparoscopic radical prostatectomy, transurethral resection of the prostate or orchiectomy.
  • Radiation therapy may include external beam radiation therapy and/or brachytherapy.
  • Hormonal therapy may include orchiectomy; administration of antiandrogens such as flutamide, bicalutamide, nilutamide, or cyproterone acetate; medications which inhibit the production of adrenal androgens such as DHEA, such as ketoconazole and aminoglutethimide; and GnRH antagonists or agonists such as Abarelix (Plenaxis®), Cetrorelix (Cetrotide®), Ganirelix (Antagon®), leuprolide, goserelin, triptorelin, or buserelin. Treatment with an anti-androgen agent, which blocks androgen activity in the body, is another available therapy.
  • antiandrogens such as flutamide, bicalutamide, nilutamide, or cyproterone acetate
  • medications which inhibit the production of adrenal androgens such as DHEA, such as ketoconazole and aminoglutethimide
  • GnRH antagonists or agonists such as
  • Such agents include flutamide, bicalutamide, and nilutamide.
  • This therapy is typically combined with LHRH analog administration or an orchiectomy, which is termed a combined androgen blockade (CAB).
  • Chemotherapy includes, but is not limited to, administration of docetaxel, for example with a corticosteroid such as prednisone.
  • Anti-cancer drugs such as doxorubicin, estramustine, etoposide, mitoxantrone, vinblastine, paclitaxel, carboplatin may also be administered to slow the growth of prostate cancer, reduce symptoms and improve the quality of life. Additional compounds such as bisphosphonate drugs may also be administered.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention may be used to treat renal cancer.
  • Renal cancers include, but are not limited to, renal cell carcinomas, metastases from extra-renal primary neoplasms, renal lymphomas, squamous cell carcinomas, juxtaglomerular tumors (reninomas), transitional cell carcinomas, angiomyolipomas, oncocytomas and Wilm's tumors.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention may be administered in conjunction with a second therapy such as a therapy that is part of the standard of care.
  • Treatment for renal cancer may involve surgery, percutaneous therapies, radiation therapies, chemotherapy, vaccines, or other medication.
  • Surgical techniques useful for treatment of renal cancer in combination with the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention include nephrectomy, which may include removal of the adrenal gland, retroperitoneal lymph nodes, and any other surrounding tissues affected by the invasion of the tumor.
  • Percutaneous therapies include, for example, image-guided therapies which may involve imaging of a tumor followed by its targeted destruction by radiofrequency ablation or cryotherapy.
  • other chemotherapeutic or other medications useful in treating renal cancer may be alpha-interferon, interleukin-2, bevacizumab, sorafenib, sunitib, temsirolimus or other kinase inhibitors.
  • the invention provides methods of treating pancreatic cancer by administering peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention, such as a pancreatic cancer selected from the following: an epitheliod carcinoma in the pancreatic duct tissue and an adenocarcinoma in a pancreatic duct.
  • a pancreatic cancer selected from the following: an epitheliod carcinoma in the pancreatic duct tissue and an adenocarcinoma in a pancreatic duct.
  • pancreatic cancer selected from the following: an epitheliod carcinoma in the pancreatic duct tissue and an adenocarcinoma in a pancreatic duct.
  • pancreatic cancer selected from the following: an epitheliod carcinoma in the pancreatic duct tissue and an adenocarcinoma in a pancreatic duct.
  • the most common type of pancreatic cancer is an adenocarcinoma, which occurs in the lining of the pancreatic duct.
  • Radiotherapy may be an option for pancreatic cancer patients, specifically external beam radiation where radiation is focused on the tumor by a machine outside the body. Another option is intraoperative electron beam radiation administered during an operation.
  • Chemotherapy may also be used to treat pancreatic cancer patients.
  • Suitable anti-cancer drugs include, but are not limited to, 5-fluorouracil (5-FU), mitomycin, ifosfamide, doxorubicin, streptozocin, chlorozotocin, and combinations thereof.
  • the methods provided by the invention can provide a beneficial effect for pancreatic cancer patients, by administration of a polypeptide of the invention or a combination of administration of a peptidomimetic macrocycle and surgery, radiation therapy, or chemotherapy.
  • peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention may be used for the treatment of colon cancer, including but not limited to non-neoplastic polyps, adenomas, familial syndromes, colorectal carcinogenesis, colorectal carcinoma, and carcinoid tumors.
  • Possible treatments available for colon cancer that may be used in conjunction with the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention include surgery, chemotherapy, radiation therapy or targeted drug therapy.
  • Radiation therapy may include external beam radiation therapy and/or brachytherapy.
  • Chemotherapy may be used to reduce the likelihood of metastasis developing, shrink tumor size, or slow tumor growth.
  • Chemotherapy is often applied after surgery (adjuvant), before surgery (neo-adjuvant), or as the primary therapy if surgery is not indicated (palliative).
  • exemplary regimens for adjuvant chemotherapy involve the combination of infusional 5-fluorouracil, leucovorin, and oxaliplatin (FOLFOX).
  • First line chemotherapy regimens may involve the combination of infusional 5-fluorouracil, leucovorin, and oxaliplatin (FOLFOX) with a targeted drug such as bevacizumab, cetuximab or panitumumab or infusional 5-fluorouracil, leucovorin, and irinotecan (FOLFIRI) with targeted drug such as bevacizumab, cetuximab or panitumumab.
  • FOLFOX infusional 5-fluorouracil, leucovorin, and oxaliplatin
  • FOLFIRI infusional 5-fluorouracil, leucovorin
  • targeted drug such as bevacizumab, cetuximab or panitumumab.
  • Some embodiments provide methods for the treatment of lung cancer using the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention.
  • cellular proliferative and/or differentiative disorders of the lung include, but are not limited to, bronchogenic carcinoma, including paraneoplastic syndromes, bronchioloalveolar carcinoma, neuroendocrine tumors, such as bronchial carcinoid, miscellaneous tumors, and metastatic tumors; pathologies of the pleura, including inflammatory pleural effusions, noninflammatory pleural effusions, pneumothorax, and pleural tumors, including solitary fibrous tumors (pleural fibroma) and malignant mesothelioma.
  • non-small cell lung cancer (NSCLC), which accounts for approximately 80-85% of lung cancers and is divided into squamous cell carcinomas, adenocarcinomas, and large cell undifferentiated carcinomas.
  • Small cell lung cancer e.g. small cell lung carcinomas, accounts for 15-20% of lung cancers.
  • Treatment options for lung cancer include surgery, immunotherapy, radiation therapy, chemotherapy, photodynamic therapy, or a combination thereof.
  • Some possible surgical options for treatment of lung cancer are a segmental or wedge resection, a lobectomy, or a pneumonectomy.
  • Radiation therapy may be external beam radiation therapy or brachytherapy.
  • Some anti-cancer drugs that may be used in chemotherapy to treat lung cancer in combination with the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention include cisplatin, carboplatin, paclitaxel, docetaxel, gemcitabine, vinorelbine, irinotecan, etoposide, vinblastine, gefitinib, ifosfamide, methotrexate, or a combination thereof.
  • Photodynamic therapy (PDT) may be used to treat lung cancer patients.
  • the methods described herein can provide a beneficial effect for lung cancer patients, by administration of a peptidomimetic macrocycle or a combination of administration of a peptidomimetic macrocycle and surgery, radiation therapy, chemotherapy, photodynamic therapy, or a combination thereof.
  • Examples of cellular proliferative and/or differentiative disorders of the liver include, but are not limited to, nodular hyperplasias, adenomas, and malignant tumors, including primary carcinoma of the liver and metastatic tumors.
  • Immunoproliferative disorders are disorders of the immune system that are characterized by the abnormal proliferation of the primary cells of the immune system, which includes B cells, T cells and Natural Killer (NK) cells, or by the excessive production of immunoglobulins (also known as antibodies).
  • Such disorders include the general categories of lymphoproliferative disorders, hypergammaglobulinemias, and paraproteinemias. Examples of such disorders include, but are not limited to, X-linked lymphoproliferative disorder, autosomal lymphoproliferative disorder, Hyper-IgM syndrome, heavy chain disease, and cryoglobulinemia.
  • immunoproliferative disorders can be graft versus host disease (GVHD); psoriasis; immune disorders associated with graft transplantation rejection; T cell lymphoma; T cell acute lymphoblastic leukemia; testicular angiocentric T cell lymphoma; benign lymphocytic angiitis; and autoimmune diseases such as lupus erythematosus, Hashimoto's thyroiditis, primary myxedema, Graves' disease, pernicious anemia, autoimmune atrophic gastritis, Addison's disease, insulin dependent diabetes mellitis, good pasture's syndrome, myasthenia gravis, pemphigus, Crohn's disease, sympathetic ophthalmia, autoimmune uveitis, multiple sclerosis, autoimmune hemolytic anemia, idiopathic thrombocytopenia, primary biliary cirrhosis, chronic action hepatitis, ulceratis colitis, Sjogren's syndrome, rheum
  • peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention may be used for the treatment of cancer in conjunction with alkylating and alkylating-like agents.
  • agents include, for example, nitrogen mustards such as chlorambucil, chlormethine, cyclophosphamide, ifosfamide, and melphalan; nitrosoureas such as carmustine, fotemustine, lomustine, and streptozocin; platinum therapeutic agents such as carboplatin, cisplatin, oxaliplatin, BBR3464, and satraplatin; or other agents, including but not limited to busulfan, dacarbazine, procarbazine, temozolomide, thiotepa, treosulfan, or uramustine.
  • peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention may be used in conjunction with an antineoplastic agent which is an antimetabolite.
  • an antineoplastic agent may be a folic acid such as aminopterin, methotrexate, pemetrexed, or raltitrexed.
  • the antineoplastic agent may be a purine, including but not limited to cladribine, clofarabine, fludarabine, mercaptopurine, pentostatin, thioguanine.
  • the antineoplastic agent may be a pyrimidine such as capecitabine, cytarabine, fluorouracil, floxuridine, and gemcitabine.
  • peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention may be used in conjunction with an antineoplastic agent which is an spindle poison/mitotic inhibitor.
  • Agents in this category include taxanes, for example docetaxel and paclitaxel; and vinca alkaloids such as vinblastine, vincristine, vindesine, and vinorelbine.
  • peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention may be used in combination with an antineoplastic agent which is a cytotoxic/antitumor antibiotic from the anthracycline family such as daunorubicin, doxorubicin, epirubicin, idarubicin, mitoxantrone, pixantrone, or valrubicin; an antibiotic from the streptomyces family such as actinomycin, bleomycin, mitomycin, or plicamycin; or hydroxyurea.
  • agents used for combination therapy may be topoisomerase inhibitors including, but not limited to camptothecin, topotecan, irinotecan, etoposide, or teniposide.
  • the antineoplastic agent may be an antibody or antibody-derived agent.
  • a receptor tyrosine kinase-targeted antibody such as cetuximab, panitumumab, or trastuzumab may be used
  • the antibody may be an anti-CD20 antibody such as rituximab or tositumomab, or any other suitable antibody including but not limited to alemtuzumab, bevacizumab, and gemtuzumab.
  • the antineoplastic agent is a photosensitizer such as aminolevulinic acid, methyl aminolevulinate, porfimer sodium, or verteporfin.
  • the antineoplastic agent is a tyrosine kinase inhibitor such as dediranib, dasatinib, erlotinib, gefitinib, imatinib, lapatinib, nilotinib, sorafenib, sunitinib, or vandetanib.
  • neoplastic agents suitable in the use of the invention include, for example, alitretinoin, tretinoin, altretamine, amsacrine, anagrelide, arsenic trioxide, asparaginase (pegaspargase), bexarotene, bortezomib, denileukin diftitox, estramustine, ixabepilone, masoprocol, or mitotane.
  • the peptidomimetics macrocycles described herein are used to treat, prevent or diagnose conditions characterized by overactive cell death or cellular death due to physiologic insult, etc.
  • conditions characterized by premature or unwanted cell death are or alternatively unwanted or excessive cellular proliferation include, but are not limited to hypocellular/hypoplastic, acellular/aplastic, or hypercellular/hyperplastic conditions.
  • Some examples include hematologic disorders including but not limited to fanconi anemia, aplastic anemia, thalaessemia, congenital neutropenia, myelodysplasia
  • the peptidomimetics macrocycles of the invention that act to decrease apoptosis are used to treat disorders associated with an undesirable level of cell death.
  • the anti-apoptotic peptidomimetics macrocycles of the invention are used to treat disorders such as those that lead to cell death associated with viral infection, e.g., infection associated with infection with human immunodeficiency virus (HIV).
  • HIV human immunodeficiency virus
  • a wide variety of neurological diseases are characterized by the gradual loss of specific sets of neurons, and the anti-apoptotic peptidomimetics macrocycles of the invention are used, in some embodiments, in the treatment of these disorders.
  • Such disorders include Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS) retinitis pigmentosa, spinal muscular atrophy, and various forms of cerebellar degeneration.
  • the cell loss in these diseases does not induce an inflammatory response, and apoptosis appears to be the mechanism of cell death.
  • a number of hematologic diseases are associated with a decreased production of blood cells.
  • These disorders include anemia associated with chronic disease, aplastic anemia, chronic neutropenia, and the myelodysplastic syndromes.
  • disorders of blood cell production such as myelodysplastic syndrome and some forms of aplastic anemia, are associated with increased apoptotic cell death within the bone marrow.
  • disorders could result from the activation of genes that promote apoptosis, acquired deficiencies in stromal cells or hematopoietic survival factors, or the direct effects of toxins and mediators of immune responses.
  • Two common disorders associated with cell death are myocardial infarctions and stroke. In both disorders, cells within the central area of ischemia, which is produced in the event of acute loss of blood flow, appear to die rapidly as a result of necrosis. However, outside the central ischemic zone, cells die over a more protracted time period and morphologically appear to die by apoptosis.
  • the anti-apoptotic peptidomimetics macrocycles of the invention are used to treat all such disorders associated with undesirable cell death.
  • immunologic disorders that are treated with the peptidomimetics macrocycles described herein include but are not limited to organ transplant rejection, arthritis, lupus, IBD, Crohn's disease, asthma, multiple sclerosis, diabetes, etc.
  • neurologic disorders that are treated with the peptidomimetics macrocycles described herein include but are not limited to Alzheimer's Disease, Down's Syndrome, Dutch Type Hereditary Cerebral Hemorrhage Amyloidosis, Reactive Amyloidosis, Familial Amyloid Nephropathy with Urticaria and Deafness, Muckle-Wells Syndrome, Idiopathic Myeloma; Macroglobulinemia-Associated Myeloma, Familial Amyloid Polyneuropathy, Familial Amyloid Cardiomyopathy, Isolated Cardiac Amyloid, Systemic Senile Amyloidosis, Adult Onset Diabetes, Insulinoma, Isolated Atrial Amyloid, Medullary Carcinoma of the Thyroid, Familial Amyloidosis, Hereditary Cerebral Hemorrhage With Amyloidosis, Familial Amyloidotic Polyneuropathy, Scrapie, Creutzfeldt-Jacob Disease, Gerstmann Straussler-Scheinker Syndrome
  • endocrinologic disorders that are treated with the peptidomimetics macrocycles described herein include but are not limited to diabetes, hypothyroidism, hypopituitarism, hypoparathyroidism, hypogonadism, etc.
  • cardiovascular disorders e.g., inflammatory disorders
  • cardiovascular disorders include, but are not limited to, atherosclerosis, myocardial infarction, stroke, thrombosis, aneurism, heart failure, ischemic heart disease, angina pectoris, sudden cardiac death, hypertensive heart disease; non-coronary vessel disease, such as arteriolosclerosis, small vessel disease, nephropathy, hypertriglyceridemia, hypercholesterolemia, hyperlipidemia, xanthomatosis, asthma, hypertension, emphysema and chronic pulmonary disease; or a cardiovascular condition associated with interventional procedures (“procedural vascular trauma”), such as restenosis following angioplasty, placement of a shunt, stent, synthetic or natural excision grafts, indwelling catheter, valve or other implantable devices.
  • Preferred cardiovascular disorders include atherosclerosis, myocardial infarction, aneurism, and stroke.
  • ⁇ -helical BID and BIM peptidomimetic macrocycles were synthesized, purified and analyzed as previously described (Walensky et al (2004) Science 305:1466-70; Walensky et al (2006) Mol Cell 24:199-210) and as indicated below.
  • the macrocycles used in this study are shown below.
  • the corresponding uncrosslinked polypeptides are indicated as “WT Sequence” and represent the natural counterparts of the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention.
  • BID-BH3 and BIM-BH3 peptidomimetic macrocycles were designed by replacing two naturally occurring amino acids with the corresponding synthetic amino acids. Substitutions were made at the i and i+4 positions.
  • BID BH3 and BIM-BH3 macrocycles were generated by solid phase peptide synthesis followed by olefin metathesis-based crosslinking of the synthetic amino acids via their olefin-containing side chains. The control sequences for BID and BIM peptidomimetic macrocycles, as well as specific sequence mutations generated are shown above.
  • Nle represents norleucine
  • Aib represents 2-aminoisobutyric acid
  • Chg represents cyclohexylglycine
  • Ac represents acetyl
  • Pr represents propionyl.
  • Amino acids represented as $ connect an all-carbon crosslinker comprising one double bond and wherein each ⁇ -carbon atom to which the crosslinker is attached is additionally substituted with a methyl group.
  • the crosslinker is a linear all-carbon crosslinker comprising eight carbon atoms between the alpha carbons of each amino acid. If a double bond is present, it is positioned between the fourth and fifth carbon atom.
  • the non-natural amino acids were characterized by nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR) spectroscopy (Varian Mercury 400) and mass spectrometry (Micromass LCT). Peptide synthesis was performed either manually or on an automated peptide synthesizer (Applied Biosystems, model 433A), using solid phase conditions, rink amide AM resin (Novabiochem), and Fmoc main-chain protecting group chemistry.
  • FIGS. 1-32 Cell viability assays shown in FIGS. 1-32 were performed according to the following protocol. Tumor cell lines were grown in specific serum-supplemented media (growth media) as necessary. A day prior to the initiation of the study, cells were plated at optimal cell density (15,000 to 25,000 cells/well) in 200 ⁇ l growth media in microtiter plates. The next day, cells were washed twice in serum-free/phenol red-free RPMI complete media (assay buffer) and a final volume of 100 ⁇ l assay buffer was added to each well. Human peripheral blood lymphocytes (hPBLs) were isolated from Buffy coats (San Diego Blood Bank) using Ficoll-Paque gradient separation and plated on the day of the experiment at 25,000 cells/well.
  • growth media growth media
  • Peptidomimetic macrocycles were diluted from 1 mM stocks (100% DMSO) in sterile water to prepare 400 ⁇ M working solutions.
  • the peptidomimetic macrocycles and controls were then diluted 10 or 40 fold or alternatively serially two-fold diluted in assay buffer in dosing plates to provide concentrations of either 40 and 20 ⁇ M or between 1.2 and 40 ⁇ M, respectively.
  • 100 ⁇ L of each dilution was then added to the appropriate wells of the test plate to achieve final concentrations of the peptidomimetic macrocycles equal to 20 or 5 ⁇ M, or between 0.6 to 20 ⁇ M, respectively.
  • Controls included wells without peptidomimetic macrocycles containing the same concentration of DMSO as the wells containing the peptidomimetic macrocycles, wells containing 0.1% Triton X-100, wells containing a chemo cocktail comprised of 1 ⁇ M Velcade, 100 ⁇ M Etoposide and 20 ⁇ M Taxol and wells containing no cells. Plates were incubated for 4 hours at 37° C. in humidified 5% CO 2 atmosphere.
  • FIGS. 1-3 the values were plotted as percent cytotoxicity, i.e as a percentage of the positive control corresponding to 100% cell death.
  • FIGS. 4-15 25 and 26 , values were plotted as percent viable, i.e as percent of negative control corresponding to 100% viable cells. All assays were performed in quadruplicates.
  • FIG. 1 shows human tumor cell lines treated with SP-1 (20 ⁇ M) and assessed for cell viability by an MTT assay 48 hrs post test article addition. All leukemia/lymphoma lines tested were sensitive to SP-1. In addition, SP-1 also induced apoptosis of several solid tumor lines including three small cell lung carcinoma (SCLC) lines, NCI-H220, NCI-H128 and NCI-H146. Conversely, there were several solid tumor lines resistant to SP-1 including non-small cell lung carcinoma (NSCLC) lines A-549 and H-460, MCF7 (breast cancer) and U251 (glioma).
  • FIG. 2 shows seven leukemia/lymphoma human cell lines were treated with 5 ⁇ M of either SP-1 or SP-4 for 48 hrs and assessed for cell viability. As shown, all cell lines exhibited similar sensitivity to both macrocycles at this concentration.
  • FIG. 3 shows twelve human solid tumor lines tested for sensitivity to either SP-1 or SP-4 (20 ⁇ M). As shown, there seems to be a cell-specific difference of sensitivity for each macrocycle tested. EC 50 curves for SP-1, SP-2, SP-3, SP-4, SP-5 and SP-6 for individual cell lines are shown in FIGS. 4-15 .
  • Cell viability assays shown in FIGS. 34-52 were performed according to a similar protocol. Cells were split at optimal cell density a day prior to the initiation of the study. The next day, cells were washed twice in serum-free Opti-MEM media and 4000 cells/well were added to each well in a final volume of 100 ⁇ l Opti-MEM.
  • macrocycles were diluted from 2 mM stocks (100% DMSO) in sterile water to prepare 400 ⁇ M working solutions. A 40 ⁇ M solution was then generated by ten-fold dilution in assay buffer. The macrocycle and controls were then serially diluted two-fold in assay buffer in dosing plates to provide concentrations between 1.2 and 40 ⁇ M, respectively.
  • macrocycles were diluted from 10 mM stocks (100% DMSO) in sterile water to prepare 1 mM working solutions. A 100 ⁇ M solution was generated by ten-fold dilution in assay buffer. The macrocycles and controls were then serially diluted two-fold in assay buffer in dosing plates to provide concentrations between 3 and 100 ⁇ M, respectively. 50 ⁇ l of each dilution was then added to the appropriate wells of the test plate to achieve final concentrations of the macrocycle between 0.6 to 20 ⁇ M (for serum free experiment) or 1.5 to 50 ⁇ M (for 2% serum experiment), respectively.
  • Controls included wells without macrocycles containing the same concentration of DMSO as the macrocycle-containing wells, wells containing 0.1% Triton X-100, and wells containing no cells. Plates were incubated for 24 hours at 37° C. in a humidified 5% CO 2 atmosphere. At the end of a 24 hr incubation period, a CellTiter-Glo Luminescent Cell Viability Assay was performed according to manufacturer's instructions (Promega, catalog #G7571) and the luminescence was measured using a BIO-TEK synergy HT Plate reader. Values were plotted as percent viable, i.e. as a percentage of the negative control value (derived from cells exposed to DMSO only). All assays were performed in duplicate.
  • SEMK2-LN cells stably expressing luciferase were generated as previously described (Armstrong et al (2003) Cancer Cell 3:173-83). 6-8 week old female NOD-SCID mice (Jackson Laboratory) were injected with 5 ⁇ 10 6 SEMK2-LN cells by tail vein. The animals were imaged as described (Walensky et al., Science 305:1466-1470 (2004)) using Xenogen's In Vivo Imaging System (Caliper Life Sciences) and total body bioluminescence quantified by integration of photonic flux (photons/sec) (Living Imaging Software for Xenogen In Vivo Imaging System, Caliper Life Sciences).
  • mice were imaged on days 8 and 12, post-injection of leukemic cells, to identify animals with established leukemia. On day 12, prior to the initiation of treatment (treatment day 1), animals were divided into cohorts with statistically equivalent bioluminescence. Leukemic mice received a daily tail vein injection of peptidomimetic macrocycle at 3 or 10 mg/Kg/day for 21 days or 30 mg/Kg/day for 12 days. Animals were imaged at days 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 13 and 17 during treatment, and the resulting tumor reduction is shown in FIG. 18 .
  • mice 6-8 week old Balb/c or KM female mice were immunized with unconjugated SP-1 or SP-4.
  • Sera were collected pre-immunization and 25 ⁇ g of each peptide in D5W were injected by tail vein using the following immunization schedule: sera were collected seven days following the first two immunizations at days 1 and 14 and 14 days following the third and fourth immunizations.
  • Antibody titers were determined by indirect ELISA. In brief, microtiter plates were coated with either SP-1 or SP-3 (5 ⁇ g/ml) overnight at 4° C.
  • the plates were washed 5 times with PBS/0.05% Tween20 (PBST) and blocked with 5% non-fat milk/PBST for one hour at 37° C., followed by additional washing with PBST.
  • the anti-sera was serially diluted and added to the coated plates for 1 hr at 37° C.
  • the plates were then washed extensively with PBST and further incubated with either HRP-conjugated anti-mouse IgG or IgM for 1 hr at 37° C. and washed 5 times with PBST prior to the addition of HRP substrate. Plates were incubated at room temperature for 10 minutes and the reaction stopped with 0.5 M oxalic acid solution.
  • Lyophilized SP-1 was dissolved in ddH 2 O to a final concentration of 50 ⁇ M. Tm was determined by measuring the circular dichroism (CD) spectra in a Jasco-810 spectropolarimeter at a fixed wavelength of 222 nm between the temperatures of 5-95° C. The following parameters were used for the measurement: data pitch, 0.1° C.; bandwidth, 1 nm and path length, 0.1 cm averaging the signal for 16 seconds. The results are shown in FIG. 21 .
  • CD circular dichroism
  • the IV dose formulation was prepared by dissolving SP-1 or SP-4 in 5% DMSO/D5W to achieve a 10 mg/Kg/dose.
  • Canulated Crl:CD®(SD) male rats (7-8 weeks old, Charles River Laboratories) were used in these studies.
  • Intravenous doses were administered via the femoral cannula and the animals were dosed at 10 mL/kg per single injection.
  • Blood for pharmacokinetic analysis was collected at 10 time points (0.0833, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 12 and 24 hrs post-dose). Animals were terminated (without necropsy) following their final sample collection.
  • Plasma samples were centrifuged ( ⁇ 1500 ⁇ g) for 10 min at ⁇ 4° C. Plasma was prepared and transferred within 30 min of blood collection/centrifugation to fresh tubes that were frozen and stored in the dark at ⁇ 70° C. until they were prepared for LC-MS/MS analysis.
  • Sample extraction was achieved by adding 10 ⁇ l of 50% formic acid to 100 ⁇ L plasma (samples or standards), following by vortexing for 10 seconds. 500 ⁇ l acetonitrile was added to the followed by vortexing for 2 minutes and centrifuged at 14,000 rpm for 10 minutes at ⁇ 4° C. Supernatants were transferred to clean tubes and evaporated on trubovap ⁇ 10 psi at 37° C. Prior to LC-MS/MS analysis samples were reconstituted with 100 ⁇ L of 50:50 acetonitrile:water.
  • LC-MS/MS The following LC-MS/MS method was used.
  • the LC-MS/MS instruments used was an API 365 (Applied Biosystems).
  • the analytical column was a Phenomenex Synergi (4 ⁇ , Polar-RP, 50 mm ⁇ 2 mm) and mobile phases A (0.1% formic acid in water) and B (0.1% formic acid in methanol) were pumped at a flow rate of 0.4 ml/min to achieve the following gradient:
  • Cells e.g. Jurkat cells
  • RPMI1640 medium with 2 mM L-Glutamine (Invitrogen) and supplemented with 10% FBS and 1% penicillin-Streptomycin.
  • Cells were subcultured a day prior to the day of experiment to keep them in an exponential growing phase.
  • FACS Fluorescence-Activated Cell Sorting
  • Test compounds were diluted to 2 mM stock in DMSO, followed by dilution to 400 ⁇ M in sterile water; further dilution to 100 ⁇ M was done using OptiMEM. Thus 100 ⁇ l of 100 uM FITC-labeled peptidomimetic macrocycle was then added to appropriate wells to achieve a final concentration of 10 ⁇ M in 1 ml volume. Plates were returned to 37° C., 5% CO 2 incubators for designated time points. At the end of each time point, the cell suspension was diluted with media, washed twice and subjected to trypsin (0.25%) for 15 min at 37° C.
  • Protein-ligand binding experiments were conducted according to the following representative procedure outlined for a system-wide control experiment using 1 ⁇ M SP-4 plus 5 ⁇ M Bcl-x L .
  • a 1 ⁇ l DMSO aliquot of a 40 ⁇ M stock solution of peptidomimetic macrocycle was dissolved in 19 ⁇ l of PBS (Phosphate-buffered saline: 50 mM, pH 7.5 Phosphate buffer containing 150 mM NaCl).
  • PBS Phosphate-buffered saline: 50 mM, pH 7.5 Phosphate buffer containing 150 mM NaCl.
  • the resulting solution was mixed by repeated pipetting and clarified by centrifugation at 10 000 g for 10 min.
  • To a 4 ⁇ l aliquot of the resulting supernatant was added 4 ⁇ l of 10 ⁇ M BCL-x L in PBS.
  • Each 8.0 ⁇ l experimental sample thus contained 40 pmol (1.5 ⁇ g) of protein at 5.0 ⁇ M concentration in PBS plus 1 ⁇ M peptidomimetic macrocycle and 2.5% DMSO.
  • Duplicate samples thus prepared for each concentration point were incubated for 60 min at room temperature, and then chilled to 4° C. prior to size-exclusion chromatography-LC-MS analysis of 5.0 ⁇ L injections.
  • Samples containing a target protein, protein-ligand complexes, and unbound compounds were injected onto an SEC column, where the complexes were separated from non-binding component by a rapid SEC step.
  • the SEC column eluate was monitored using UV detectors to confirm that the early-eluting protein fraction, which elutes in the void volume of the SEC column, was well resolved from unbound components that are retained on the column.
  • the peak containing the protein and protein-ligand complexes elutes from the primary UV detector, it entered a sample loop where it was excised from the flow stream of the SEC stage and transferred directly to the LC-MS via a valving mechanism.
  • the (M+3H) 3 ′ ion of ALRN-0034 is observed by ESI-MS at m/z 883.8, confirming the detection of the protein-ligand complex.
  • a mixture of ligands at 40 ⁇ M per component was prepared by combining 2 ⁇ L aliquots of 400 ⁇ M stocks of each of the three compounds with 14 ⁇ L of DMSO. Then, 1 ⁇ L aliquots of this 40 ⁇ M per component mixture were combined with 1 ⁇ l DMSO aliquots of a serially diluted stock solution of titrant peptidomimetic macrocycle (10, 5, 2.5, . . . , 0.078 mM). These 2 ⁇ L samples were dissolved in 38 ⁇ L of PBS. The resulting solutions were mixed by repeated pipetting and clarified by centrifugation at 10 000 g for 10 min.
  • each 8.0 ⁇ L experimental sample thus contained 40 pmol (1.5 ⁇ g) of protein at 5.0 ⁇ M concentration in PBS plus 0.5 ⁇ M ligand, 2.5% DMSO, and varying concentrations (125, 62.5, . . . , 0.98 ⁇ M) of the titrant peptidomimetic macrocycle.
  • Duplicate samples thus prepared for each concentration point were incubated at room temperature for 60 min, then chilled to 4° C. prior to SEC-LC-MS analysis of 2.0 ⁇ l injections.
  • Cells e.g. INA-6 or Jurkat cells
  • INA-6 cells were cultured in suspension in RPMI1640 medium with 2 mM L-Glutamine and (Invitrogen) supplemented with 10% FBS and 1% penicillin-Streptomycin as well as 1 ng/ml of recombinant human IL-6 supplements in the case of INA-6 cells.
  • Cells were subcultured a day prior to the day of experiment to keep them in an exponential growing phase.
  • exponentially growing cells were seeded in 0.9 ml of serum-free medium at density of 0.5 ⁇ 10 6 cells. Cells were allowed to settle down until compounds were diluted.
  • Test compounds were diluted to 2 mM stock in DMSO, followed by dilution to 400 ⁇ M in sterile water; further dilution to 100 ⁇ M was done using OptiMEM. Thus 100 ⁇ l of 100 uM FITC-labeled peptidomimetic macrocycle was then added to appropriate wells to achieve a final concentration of 10 ⁇ M in 1 ml volume. Plates were returned to 37′C, 5% CO 2 incubators for designated time points. If needed, further dilutions of test compounds were also prepared in OptiMEM. At the end of each time point, cells were harvested, washed twice with RPMI supplemented with FBS, and washed once with PBS+0.5% BSA.
  • Pelleted cells were resuspended and incubated with 0.25% Trypsin-EDTA for 15 min at 37° C., 5% CO 2 . Post-incubation, cells were washed with media containing serum once and twice with PBS with 0.5% BSA. At the end of washes, cells were lysed with Triton X-100-containing cell lysis buffer from Cell Signaling Technologies. Fluorescence intensity was measured on a BioTek Synergy 4 instrument. Dilutions of FITC-labeled peptidomimetic macrocycles for the standard curves made in cell lysis buffer and were used for quantitation of the amount of peptidomimetic macrocycles in cells. Analysis was done using Gen 5 software provided by Biotek Inc.
  • mice were used 7-10 weeks old. Male nu/nu mice were anesthetized and incisions along the posterior midline of their abdomens, right above the prostate, were created. The bladder was refracted and pressed lightly to expose the prostate. PC-3M-luc-C6 cells (5 ⁇ 10 5 ) were slowly injected into either dorsal prostatic lobe. The peritoneal incision was sutured and the skin was closed. The mice were given buprenorphine (0.1 mg/kg in 50 ⁇ l) subcutaneously after the surgical procedure.
  • PC-3M-luc-C6 5 ⁇ 10 5
  • mice were first imaged on day 7 after wound healing. The final 50 mice were grouped into 5 groups (10 mice per group) based on BLI before the start of the treatment. The experimental mice were imaged twice weekly starting from day 14 for 2.5 weeks. At the end of the experiment, the tumors were dissected and weighed. The tumors were then cut into two pieces for snap freeze and fixed in 10% formalin. Test compound treatment was initiated after two stable or increasing bioluminescent signals were registered from the tumor cell inoculation site. Several test groups were used: Group 1 (Vehicle, IV daily dosing), Group 2 (test compound, IV daily dosing at 10 mg/kg), Group 3 (Vehicle, i.p. daily dosing), Group 4 (test compound, i.p.
  • test peptidomimetic macrocycles were formulated as follows. Only low retention/siliconized plastic tubes and tips were used. A 60 mg/mL stock solution of each peptidomimetic macrocycle was prepared by dissolving 140 mg of each macrocycle into 2.3 mL of 100% DMSO. The stock solution was divided into 10 aliquots of 0.23 mL for daily dosing (14 mg per vial) and kept frozen at ⁇ 20 C. One vial was thawed on each day of dosing.
  • FIG. 45 shows a time treatment for the prostate cancer orthotopic xenograft model.
  • the bioluminescence of the prostate region of each experimental animal was measured and expressed as photons/second.
  • the in vivo tumor growth kinetics were graphed and two-way ANOVA for repeated measure (using time and treatment as two main factors) were used.
  • the kinetic mouse images from representative mice from each group were obtained and are shown in FIG. 43 .
  • SKOV3-Luc cells stably expressing firefly luciferase are injected into the ovarian bursa of anesthetized SCID-beige mice (9 weeks old, female).
  • the animals are monitored weekly by bioluminescent imaging (BLI).
  • Test compound treatment is initiated after two stable or increasing bioluminescent signals are registered from the tumor cell inoculation site (up to 9 weeks in this model). Prior to the initiation of the treatment animals are randomized into control and treatment groups (10 mice/group). Animals are treated by daily injection (IP, IV or SC) of test compound (low, med, high doses) and vehicle control for 10, 14 and/or 21 days, as needed.
  • Efficacy is determined by comparison of the tumor burden between peptidomimetic macrocycle and vehicle control treated animals.
  • Tumor growth/volume is monitored by BLI after IP injection of 150 mg/kg D-luciferin and imaged by IVIS Imaging System both dorsally and ventrally. Metastatic lesions can be imaged by shielding the primary tumor bioluminescence.
  • the animals are humanely euthanized and the ovarian tumor is excised, weighed and prepared for subsequent analysis.
  • MDA-MB-231-Luc cells stably expressing firefly luciferase are injected into the breast tissue of anesthetized SCID-beige mice (9 weeks old, female). The animals are monitored weekly by bioluminescent imaging. Test compound treatment is initiated after two stable or increasing bioluminescent signals are registered from the tumor cell inoculation site. Prior to the initiation of the treatment animals are randomized into control and treatment groups (10 mice/group). Animals are treated by daily injection (IP, IV or SC) of test compound (low, med, high doses) and vehicle control for 10, 14 and/or 21 days, as needed. Efficacy is determined by comparison of the tumor burden between test compound and vehicle control treated animals.
  • An optimized amount of tumor cells is injected into the flank of anesthetized NOD/SCID or nu/nu mice, as required, by subcutaneous injection.
  • the animals are sorted into control and treatment groups (10 mice/group). Animals are treated by daily injection (IP, IV or SC) of test compound (low, medium, and high doses) and vehicle control for 10, 14 and/or 21 days, as needed. Efficacy is determined by comparison of the tumor volume between test compound and vehicle control treated animals. Tumor growth/volume is monitored by external caliper measurement (L ⁇ W ⁇ D). At the conclusion of the experiment, the animals are humanely euthanized and the tumor is excised, weighed and prepared for subsequent analysis.
  • Anesthetized NOD/SCID mice (9 weeks old, female) are injected with the optimized amount of MDA-MB-213-MET-Luc cells stably expressing firefly luciferase into the left ventricle of the heart (hence directly into arterial system).
  • a successful intracardiac injection is indicated by day zero images showing a systemic bioluminescence distributed throughout the animals and only mice with evidence of a satisfactory injection will remain in the experiment.
  • the animals are sorted into control and treatment groups (10 mice/group). Animals are treated by daily injection (IP, IV or SC) of test compound (low, medium, and high doses) and vehicle control for 10, 14 and/or 21 days, as needed.

Abstract

The present invention provides biologically active peptidomimetic macrocycles for the treatment of cell proliferative disorders such as cancer and immunoproliferative disease.

Description

    CROSS-REFERENCE
  • This application is a continuation application of U.S. application Ser. No. 13/352,223, filed Jan. 17, 2012, which is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 12/378,047, filed Feb. 9, 2009, which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/027,326 filed Feb. 8, 2008 and U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/120,380 filed Dec. 5, 2008, each of which applications is incorporated herein in its entirety by reference.
  • SEQUENCE LISTING
  • The instant application contains a Sequence Listing which has been submitted in ASCII format via EFS-Web and is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. Said ASCII copy, created on Feb. 16, 2012, is named 35224301.txt and is 65,421 bytes in size.
  • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • Uncontrolled cell proliferation is implicated in a wide number of disorders ranging from cancer to immunoproliferative diseases. For example, in the U.S. alone, cancer surpasses heart disease as the leading cause of death for the largest fraction of the population (Journal of the National Cancer Institute, Vol. 97, No. 5, Mar. 2, 2005, p. 330) and contributes to more than 500,000 deaths annually. Despite decades of intense research efforts in this area, the treatment of cell proliferative disorders remains a challenge.
  • Therapeutic methods for cancer such as surgery or chemotherapy are still limited in terms of efficacy, side effect profile and cost. In particular, the efficacy and applicability of the available therapeutic options varies greatly by the specific type of tumor and disease. Thus, there remains a need for compositions and methods of treating cell proliferative disorders and other diseases.
  • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • The present invention addresses this and other needs. The invention provides compositions and methods of treatment based on the surprising finding that certain peptidomimetic macrocycles exhibit unexpected specificity, efficacy and potency when used for treatment of cell proliferative disorders.
  • In one aspect, the present invention provides a method of treating cancer in a human patient in need thereof comprising administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle, wherein the cancer is selected from the group consisting of small cell lung carcinoma, melanoma, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, renal cancer, breast cancer, pancreatic cancer, and Ph+ acute lymphocytic leukemia (Ph+ ALL). In one embodiment, the peptidomimetic macrocycle comprises an α-helix. In another embodiment, the peptidomimetic macrocycle comprises a BH3 domain. The peptidomimetic macrocycle can be, for example, a BIM polypeptide. In some cases, an amino acid sequence of the BIM polypeptide is more than about 60% identical to an amino acid sequence IWIAQELR*IGD*FNAYYARR (SEQ ID NO: 1) wherein * is a tethered amino acid. Alternatively, the amino acid sequence of the BIM polypeptide is more than about 80% identical to an amino acid sequence IWIAQELR*IGD*FNAYYARR (SEQ ID NO: 1) wherein * is a tethered amino acid. Furthermore, an amino acid sequence of said BIM polypeptide may be more than about 95% identical to an amino acid sequence IWIAQELR*IGD*FNAYYARR (SEQ ID NO: 1) wherein * is a tethered amino acid. In some embodiments, the cancer is at least 2-fold less sensitive to treatment using a corresponding cross-linked BID polypeptide as measured in an in vitro cell viability assay. In other embodiments, the cancer is at least 5-fold less sensitive to treatment using a corresponding cross-linked BID polypeptide as measured in an in vitro cell viability assay. In yet other embodiments, the cancer is at least 8-fold less sensitive to treatment using a corresponding cross-linked BID polypeptide as measured in an in vitro cell viability assay.
  • In selected embodiments, the cancer is breast cancer, for example an invasive breast carcinoma such as an invasive ductal carcinoma. Alternatively, the cancer is prostate cancer. In other embodiments, the cancer is ovarian cancer. In still other embodiments, the cancer is pancreatic cancer. In further embodiments, the cancer is renal cancer. Alternatively, the cancer is Ph+ acute lymphocytic leukemia (Ph+ ALL).
  • The invention also provides a method of treating cancer in a human patient in need thereof comprising administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle, wherein the cancer is colon cancer. In one embodiment, the peptidomimetic macrocycle comprises an α-helix. In another embodiment, the peptidomimetic macrocycle comprises a BH3 domain. The peptidomimetic macrocycle can be, for example, a BID polypeptide. In some cases, an amino acid sequence of the BID polypeptide is more than about 60% identical to a sequence DIIRNIARHLA*VGD*NleDRSI (SEQ ID NO: 2) and wherein * is a tethered amino acid and Nle is norleucine. Alternatively, an amino acid sequence of the BID polypeptide is more than about 80% identical to a sequence DIIRNIARHLA*VGD*NleDRSI (SEQ ID NO: 2) wherein * is a tethered amino acid and Nle is norleucine. Furthermore, an amino acid sequence of said BID polypeptide may be more than about 95% identical to a sequence DIIRNIARHLA*VGD*NleDRSI (SEQ ID NO: 2) wherein * is a tethered amino acid and Nle is norleucine. In some embodiments, the cancer is at least 2-fold less sensitive to treatment using a corresponding cross-linked BIM polypeptide as measured in an in vitro cell viability assay. In other embodiments, the cancer is at least 5-fold less sensitive to treatment using a corresponding cross-linked BIM polypeptide as measured in an in vitro cell viability assay. In yet other embodiments, the cancer is at least 8-fold less sensitive to treatment using a corresponding cross-linked BIM polypeptide as measured in an in vitro cell viability assay.
  • Also provided is a method of treating cancer in a human patient in need thereof comprising administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle wherein said peptidomimetic macrocycle shows an EC50 lower than about 5 μM when tested in an in vitro cell viability assay against a cell line derived from said cancer. In some embodiments, the EC50 may be lower than about 4 μM. In other embodiments, the EC50 may be lower than about 3 μM. In yet other embodiments, the EC50 may be lower than about 2 μM. In yet other embodiments, the EC50 may be lower than about 1 μM. In some embodiments, the in vitro assay is performed in the presence of serum. For example, the assay may be performed in 10% human serum. In some aspects, the cancer is selected from the group consisting of ovarian cancer, skin cancer, prostate cancer, renal cancer, breast cancer, pancreatic cancer, small-cell lung cancer, colon cancer, multiple myeloma, Burkitt's lymphoma, acute lymphocytic leukemia (ALL) of T cell lineage or B cell lineage or mixed lineage, chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL), cutaneous T cell lymphoma (CTCL), acute myelocytic leukemia (AML), chronic myelocytic leukemia, and follicular lymphoma.
  • In one aspect, the present invention provides a method of treating cancer in a human patient in need thereof comprising administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle, wherein the cancer is selected from the group consisting of ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, renal cancer, breast cancer, pancreatic cancer, and Ph+ acute lymphocytic leukemia. In one embodiment, the peptidomimetic macrocycle comprises an α-helix. In another embodiment, the peptidomimetic macrocycle comprises a BH3 domain. The peptidomimetic macrocycle can be, for example, a BIM polypeptide. In some cases, an amino acid sequence of the BIM polypeptide is more than about 60% identical to an amino acid sequence IWIAQELR*IGD*FNAYYARR (SEQ ID NO: 1) wherein * is a tethered amino acid. Alternatively, the amino acid sequence of the BIM polypeptide is more than about 80% identical to an amino acid sequence IWIAQELR*IGD*FNAYYARR (SEQ ID NO: 1) wherein * is a tethered amino acid. Furthermore, an amino acid sequence of said BIM polypeptide may be more than about 95% identical to an amino acid sequence IWIAQELR*IGD*FNAYYARR (SEQ ID NO: 1) wherein * is a tethered amino acid.
  • In some embodiments, the cancer is selected from the group consisting of colon cancer, small-cell lung cancer, liver cancer, ovarian cancer, skin cancer, prostate cancer, renal cancer, breast cancer, pancreatic cancer, glioma, multiple myeloma, Burkitt's lymphoma, acute lymphocytic leukemia (ALL) of T cell lineage or B cell lineage or mixed lineage, chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL), cutaneous T cell lymphoma (CTCL), acute myelocytic leukemia (AML), chronic myelocytic leukemia and follicular lymphoma. In one embodiment, the peptidomimetic macrocycle comprises an α-helix. In another embodiment, the peptidomimetic macrocycle comprises a BH3 domain. The peptidomimetic macrocycle can be, for example, a BID polypeptide. In some cases, an amino acid sequence of the BID polypeptide is more than about 60% identical to a sequence DIIRNIARHLA*VGD*NleDRSI (SEQ ID NO: 2) and wherein * is a tethered amino acid and Nle is norleucine. Alternatively, an amino acid sequence of the BID polypeptide is more than about 80% identical to a sequence DIIRNIARHLA*VGD*NleDRSI (SEQ ID NO: 2) wherein * is a tethered amino acid and Nle is norleucine. Furthermore, an amino acid sequence of said BID polypeptide may be more than about 95% identical to a sequence DIIRNIARHLA*VGD*NleDRSI (SEQ ID NO: 2) wherein * is a tethered amino acid and Nle is norleucine.
  • The present invention additionally provides a method of treating a disorder in a human patient in need thereof comprising administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle, comprising a) preparing a peptidomimetic macrocycle by introducing a cross-link between two amino acid residues of a polypeptide; b) testing the peptidomimetic macrocycle for the presence or absence of an immunogenic response; and c) administering the peptidomimetic macrocycle to a patient if said immunogenic response does not cause a substantial side-effect. The non-immunogenicity may be evidenced as minimal antibody response in an in vivo assay in rodents such as mice, in non-human primates, or in humans. When administered to a human patient, a compound which is nonimmunogenic may induce no substantial or minimal side-effects related to its immunogenicity in the patient. The disorder may be, for example, cancer, a metabolic disease, cardiovascular disease, inflammatory disease or a degenerative disease. In one embodiment, the peptidomimetic macrocycle comprises an α-helix. In another embodiment, the peptidomimetic macrocycle comprises a BH3 domain. The peptidomimetic macrocycle can be, for example, a BID polypeptide. In some cases, an amino acid sequence of the BID polypeptide is more than about 60% identical to a sequence DIIRNIARHLA*VGD*NleDRSI (SEQ ID NO: 2) and wherein * is a tethered amino acid and Nle is norleucine. Alternatively, an amino acid sequence of the BID polypeptide is more than about 80% identical to a sequence DIIRNIARHLA*VGD*NleDRSI (SEQ ID NO: 2) wherein * is a tethered amino acid and Nle is norleucine. Furthermore, an amino acid sequence of said BID polypeptide may be more than about 95% identical to a sequence DIIRNIARHLA*VGD*NleDRSI (SEQ ID NO: 2) wherein * is a tethered amino acid and Nle is norleucine. The peptidomimetic macrocycle may also be, for example, a BIM polypeptide. In some cases, an amino acid sequence of the BIM polypeptide is more than about 60% identical to an amino acid sequence IWIAQELR*IGD*FNAYYARR (SEQ ID NO: 1) wherein * is a tethered amino acid. Alternatively, the amino acid sequence of the BIM polypeptide is more than about 80% identical to an amino acid sequence IWIAQELR*IGD*FNAYYARR (SEQ ID NO: 1) wherein * is a tethered amino acid. Furthermore, an amino acid sequence of said BIM polypeptide may be more than about 95% identical to an amino acid sequence IWIAQELR*IGD*FNAYYARR (SEQ ID NO: 1) wherein * is a tethered amino acid.
  • In another aspect, the invention provides a method of treating an immunoproliferative disorder in a human patient in need thereof comprising administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle. The peptidomimetic macrocycle may reduce activated hPBL proliferation by more than about 5%, 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, or 50% in an in vitro BrdU incorporation assay. The immunoproliferative disease may be, for example, a lymphoproliferative disorder, or an autoimmune disease, for example, systemic lupus erythematosus. The peptidomimetic macrocycle can be, for example, a BID polypeptide. In some cases, an amino acid sequence of the BID polypeptide is more than about 60% identical to a sequence DIIRNIARHLA*VGD*NleDRSI (SEQ ID NO: 2) and wherein * is a tethered amino acid and Nle is norleucine. Alternatively, an amino acid sequence of the BID polypeptide is more than about 80% identical to a sequence DIIRNIARHLA*VGD*NleDRSI (SEQ ID NO: 2) wherein * is a tethered amino acid and Nle is norleucine. Furthermore, an amino acid sequence of said BID polypeptide may be more than about 95% identical to a sequence DIIRNIARHLA*VGD*NleDRSI (SEQ ID NO: 2) wherein * is a tethered amino acid and Nle is norleucine. The peptidomimetic macrocycle may also be, for example, a BIM polypeptide. In some cases, an amino acid sequence of the BIM polypeptide is more than about 60% identical to an amino acid sequence IWIAQELR*IGD*FNAYYARR (SEQ ID NO: 1) wherein * is a tethered amino acid. Alternatively, the amino acid sequence of the BIM polypeptide is more than about 80% identical to an amino acid sequence IWIAQELR*IGD*FNAYYARR (SEQ ID NO: 1) wherein * is a tethered amino acid. Furthermore, an amino acid sequence of said BIM polypeptide may be more than about 95% identical to an amino acid sequence IWIAQELR*IGD*FNAYYARR (SEQ ID NO: 1) wherein * is a tethered amino acid.
  • For any of the peptidomimetic macrocyles disclosed above, an α-carbon atom in said peptidomimetic macrocycle may be additionally substituted with independent substituents of formula R—, wherein R— is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroalkyl, or heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-. In some embodiments, an α-carbon atom to which the crosslinker is attached is additionally substituted with a substituent of formula R—. In other embodiments, an α-carbon atom to which the crosslinker is not attached is additionally substituted with a substituent of formula R—. Alternatively, two α-carbon atoms in a peptidomimetic macrocycle are additionally substituted with independent substituents of formula R—. In some embodiments, two α-carbon atoms to which the crosslinker is attached are additionally substituted with independent substituents of formula R—. In other embodiments, two α-carbon atoms to which the crosslinker is not attached are additionally substituted with independent substituents of formula R—. R— may be, for example, alkyl such as methyl, ethyl, propyl or isopropyl. The crosslinker may connect two α-carbon atoms. In some embodiments, R— and any portion of the crosslinker taken together form a cyclic structure. In other embodiments, the crosslinker is formed of consecutive carbon-carbon bonds. In still other embodiments, the crosslinker contains about 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 or 13 consecutive bonds. In yet other embodiments, the crosslinker comprises at least about 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9 carbon atoms.
  • Also provided is a method of treating cancer in a human patient in need thereof comprising administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle wherein said peptidomimetic macrocycle interacts with Mcl-1. In some embodiments, the peptidomimetic macrocycle antagonizes the interaction between Mcl-1 and pro-apoptotic proteins such as Bid, Bim, Bax or Bak. In other embodiments, the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention are used to treat cancer in a human patient wherein the cancer is resistant to ABT-737 or an analog thereof, or is resistant to a compound that possesses an affinity greater than 1, 2, 5 or 10 μM for Mcl-1.
  • The invention further provides a method of treating ABT-737 resistant small cell lung cancer in a human patient in need thereof comprising administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle, wherein the peptidomimetic macrocycle comprises a BH3 domain. The invention also provides a method of treating prostate cancer in a human patient in need thereof comprising administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle, wherein the peptidomimetic macrocycle comprises a BH3 domain.
  • In any of the methods of treatment indicated herein, the peptidomimetic macrocycle is administered in conjunction with a standard method of care. The standard method of care may, for example, be chemotherapy. Alternatively, the standard method of care may be radiation therapy. In a further embodiment, the standard method of care is surgery.
  • INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE
  • All publications, patents, and patent applications mentioned in this specification are herein incorporated by reference to the same extent as if each individual publication, patent, or patent application was specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference.
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • The novel features of the invention are set forth with particularity in the appended claims. A better understanding of the features and advantages of the present invention will be obtained by reference to the following detailed description that sets forth illustrative embodiments, in which the principles of the invention are utilized, and the accompanying drawings of which:
  • FIG. 1 shows the sensitivity of 24 different tumor cell lines to treatment with 20 μM SP-1.
  • FIG. 2 shows the sensitivity of 7 human leukemia/lymphoma cell lines to treatment with 5 μM of either SP-1 or SP-4.
  • FIG. 3 shows the sensitivity of twelve human solid tumor lines to treatment with 20 μM of either SP-1 or SP-4.
  • FIG. 4 shows EC50 curves for SP-1 or SP-4 tested against a variety of cell lines.
  • FIGS. 5-15 describe EC50 curves for SP-1, SP-2, SP-3, SP-4, SP-5 and SP-6 tested against several individual cell lines.
  • FIG. 16 indicates that SP-1 does not induce programmed cell death of resting human peripheral lymphocytes (hPBLs).
  • FIG. 17 exemplifies that SP-1 is as effective as rapamycin in blocking the proliferation of hPBLs activated by PMA+ionomycin+LPS treatment.
  • FIGS. 18 and 19 show that SP-1 decreases tumor burden in a SEMK2 human leukemia xenograft model.
  • FIG. 20 shows that SP-1 does not elicit an antibody response in rodents.
  • FIG. 21 illustrates that SP-1 is highly stable, and maintains its helical conformation as temperature increases up to 64° C.
  • FIG. 22 describes the human plasma stability of a series of peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention.
  • FIG. 23 describes the mouse plasma stability of a series of peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention.
  • FIG. 24 shows the pharmacokinetic properties of SP-1 and SP-4 exhibit in rats.
  • FIG. 25 describes the induction of programmed cell death in Jurkat tumor cells by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in the absence of human serum and compares the potency of BH3 peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention to BCL-2/BCL-XL-specific antagonists such as ABT-737.
  • FIG. 26 describes the induction of programmed cell death in Jurkat tumor cell line by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in the presence of 10% human serum and compares the potency of BH3 peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention to BCL-2/BCL-XL-specific antagonists such as ABT-737.
  • FIG. 27 compares the binding affinity of several BH3 peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention and ABT-737 to Bcl-XL, Bcl-2, and Mcl-1.
  • FIG. 28 shows efficacy of peptidomimetic macrocycles to a number of hematological malignancies.
  • FIG. 29 illustrates the varied Bcl-2 family protein expression profile of cell lines sensitive to treatment by compositions of the invention.
  • FIG. 30 compares efficacy of peptidomimetic macrocycles with ABT-737 in Raji, an ABT-737 resistant Burkitt's lymphoma cell line.
  • FIG. 31 illustrates efficacy of BH3 peptidomimetic macrocycles against a variety of solid tumor cell lines.
  • FIG. 32 depicts induction of programmed cell death by a peptidomimetic macrocycle of the invention in an ABT-737 resistant small cell lung cancer line (NCI-H82).
  • FIG. 33 shows suppression of SEMK-2 tumor progression in NOD-SCID mice by compounds of the invention.
  • FIG. 34 describes induction of programmed cell death by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in an ovarian tumor cell line (OVCAR8), treated in the absence of serum.
  • FIG. 35 depicts induction of programmed cell death by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in an ovarian tumor cell line (OVCAR8), treated in the presence of 2% human serum.
  • FIG. 36 depicts induction of programmed cell death by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in a melanoma cell line (A375), treated in the absence of serum.
  • FIG. 37 depicts induction of programmed cell death by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in a melanoma cell line (A375), treated in the presence of 2% human serum.
  • FIG. 38 depicts induction of programmed cell death by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in a breast tumor cell line (MDA-MD-231-Met), treated in the absence of serum.
  • FIG. 39 depicts induction of programmed cell death by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in a breast tumor cell line (MDA-MD-231-Met), treated in 2% human serum.
  • FIG. 40 depicts induction of programmed cell death by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in a prostate tumor cell line (PC3), treated in the absence of serum.
  • FIG. 41 depicts induction of programmed cell death by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in a prostate tumor cell line (PC3), treated in 2% human serum.
  • FIG. 42 depicts induction of programmed cell death by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in a small cell lung cancer cell line (NCI-H-82), treated in the absence of serum.
  • FIG. 43 depicts a Western Blot showing variable expression of various BCL-family proteins in cancers that are sensitive to peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention.
  • FIG. 44 depicts a timeline for mouse treatment in a prostate cancer orthotopic xenograft model.
  • FIG. 45 depicts efficacy of a peptidomimetic macrocycle of the invention in a prostate cancer orthotopic xenograft model.
  • FIG. 46 describes induction of programmed cell death by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in a T-cell leukemia cell line (Jurkat), treated in the absence of serum.
  • FIG. 47 describes induction of programmed cell death by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in a mixed-lineage T/B-cell leukemia cell line (SEMK2), treated in the absence of serum.
  • FIG. 48 describes induction of programmed cell death by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in a T-cell leukemia cell line (MOLT-4), treated in the absence of serum.
  • FIG. 49 describes induction of programmed cell death by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in a diffuse large B-cell lymphoma cell line (DHL-6), treated in the absence of serum.
  • FIG. 50 describes induction of programmed cell death by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in a mixed-lineage T/B-cell leukemia cell line (RS4;11), treated in the absence of serum.
  • FIG. 51 describes induction of programmed cell death by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in a Burkitt's lymphoma cell line (Raji), treated in the absence of serum.
  • FIG. 52 describes induction of programmed cell death by peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in a multiple myeloma cell line (MM1S), treated in the absence of serum.
  • FIG. 53 depicts efficacy of a peptidomimetic macrocycle of the invention in a SEMK2 leukemia orthotopic xenograft model, as measured by reduced tumor burden in treated animals.
  • FIG. 54 depicts efficacy of a peptidomimetic macrocycle of the invention in a SEMK2 leukemia orthotopic xenograft model, as measured by reduced tumor burden in treated animals.
  • FIG. 55 depicts efficacy of a peptidomimetic macrocycle of the invention in a SEMK2 leukemia orthotopic xenograft model, as measured by increased survival of treated animals.
  • FIG. 56 shows sequence-specific and structure-specific binding of peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention to the pro-apoptotic target protein BAX in multiple myeloma (MM1S) cell lysates, as demonstrated by immunoprecipitation with the stapled SP-4 peptide.
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
  • As used herein, the terms “treating” and “to treat”, mean to alleviate symptoms, eliminate the causation either on a temporary or permanent basis, or to prevent or slow the appearance of symptoms. The term “treatment” includes alleviation, elimination of causation (temporary or permanent) of, or prevention of symptoms and disorders associated with any condition. The treatment may be a pre-treatment as well as a treatment at the onset of symptoms.
  • The term “standard method of care” refers to any therapeutic or diagnostic method, compound, or practice which is part of the standard of care for a particular indication. The “standard of care” may be established by any authority such as a health care provider or a national or regional institute for any diagnostic or treatment process that a clinician should follow for a certain type of patient, illness, or clinical circumstance. Exemplary standard of care methods for various type of cancers are provided for instance by the the National Cancer Institute.
  • As used herein, the term “cell proliferative disorder” encompasses cancer, hyperproliferative disorders, neoplastic disorders, immunoproliferative disorders and other disorders. A “cell proliferative disorder” relates to cells having the capacity for autonomous growth, i.e., an abnormal state or condition characterized by rapidly proliferating cell growth. Hyperproliferative and neoplastic disease states may be categorized as pathologic, i.e., characterizing or constituting a disease state, or may be categorized as non-pathologic, i.e., a deviation from normal but not associated with a disease state. The term is meant to include all types of cancerous growths or oncogenic processes, metastatic tissues or malignantly transformed cells, tissues, or organs, irrespective of histopathologic type or stage of invasiveness. A metastatic tumor can arise from a multitude of primary tumor types, including but not limited to those of breast, lung, liver, colon and ovarian origin. “Pathologic hyperproliferative” cells occur in disease states characterized by malignant tumor growth and immunoproliferative diseases. Examples of non-pathologic hyperproliferative cells include proliferation of cells associated with wound repair. Examples of cellular proliferative and/or differentiative disorders include cancer, e.g., carcinoma, sarcoma, or metastatic disorders.
  • The term “derived from” in the context of the relationship between a cell line and a related cancer signifies that the cell line may be established from any cancer in a specific broad category of cancers.
  • As used herein, the term “macrocycle” refers to a molecule having a chemical structure including a ring or cycle formed by at least 9 covalently bonded atoms.
  • As used herein, the term “peptidomimetic macrocycle”, “crosslinked polypeptide” or “stapled peptide” refers to a compound comprising a plurality of amino acid residues joined by a plurality of peptide bonds and at least one macrocycle-forming linker which forms a macrocycle between a first naturally-occurring or non-naturally-occurring amino acid residue (or analog) and a second naturally-occurring or non-naturally-occurring amino acid residue (or analog) within the same molecule. Peptidomimetic macrocycles include embodiments where the macrocycle-forming linker connects the α carbon of the first amino acid residue (or analog) to the α carbon of the second amino acid residue (or analog). The peptidomimetic macrocycles optionally include one or more non-peptide bonds between one or more amino acid residues and/or amino acid analog residues, and optionally include one or more non-naturally-occurring amino acid residues or amino acid analog residues in addition to any which form the macrocycle.
  • As used herein, the term “stability” refers to the maintenance of a defined secondary structure in solution by a peptidomimetic macrocycle of the invention as measured by circular dichroism, NMR or another biophysical measure, or resistance to proteolytic degradation in vitro or in vivo. Non-limiting examples of secondary structures contemplated in this invention are α-helices, β-turns, and β-pleated sheets.
  • As used herein, the term “helical stability” refers to the maintenance of a helical structure by a peptidomimetic macrocycle of the invention as measured by circular dichroism or NMR. For example, in some embodiments, the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention exhibit at least a 1.25, 1.5, 1.75 or 2-fold increase in α-helicity as determined by circular dichroism compared to a corresponding uncrosslinked polypeptide.
  • The term “α-amino acid” or simply “amino acid” refers to a molecule containing both an amino group and a carboxyl group bound to a carbon which is designated the α-carbon. Suitable amino acids include, without limitation, both the D- and L-isomers of the naturally-occurring amino acids, as well as non-naturally occurring amino acids prepared by organic synthesis or other metabolic routes. Unless the context specifically indicates otherwise, the term amino acid, as used herein, is intended to include amino acid analogs.
  • The term “naturally occurring amino acid” refers to any one of the twenty amino acids commonly found in peptides synthesized in nature, and known by the one letter abbreviations A, R, N, C, D, Q, E, G, H, I, L, K, M, F, P, S, T, W, Y and V.
  • The term “amino acid analog” or “non-natural amino acid” refers to a molecule which is structurally similar to an amino acid and which can be substituted for an amino acid in the formation of a peptidomimetic macrocycle. Amino acid analogs include, without limitation, compounds which are structurally identical to an amino acid, as defined herein, except for the inclusion of one or more additional methylene groups between the amino and carboxyl group (e.g., α-amino β-carboxy acids), or for the substitution of the amino or carboxy group by a similarly reactive group (e.g., substitution of the primary amine with a secondary or tertiary amine, or substitution or the carboxy group with an ester).
  • A “non-essential” amino acid residue is a residue that can be altered from the wild-type sequence of a polypeptide (e.g., a BH3 domain or the p53 MDM2 binding domain) without abolishing or substantially altering its essential biological or biochemical activity (e.g., receptor binding or activation). An “essential” amino acid residue is a residue that, when altered from the wild-type sequence of the polypeptide, results in abolishing or substantially abolishing the polypeptide's essential biological or biochemical activity.
  • A “conservative amino acid substitution” is one in which the amino acid residue is replaced with an amino acid residue having a similar side chain. Families of amino acid residues having similar side chains have been defined in the art. These families include amino acids with basic side chains (e.g., K, R, H), acidic side chains (e.g., D, E), uncharged polar side chains (e.g., G, N, Q, S, T, Y, C), nonpolar side chains (e.g., A, V, L, I, P, F, M, W), beta-branched side chains (e.g., T, V, I) and aromatic side chains (e.g., Y, F, W, H). Thus, a predicted nonessential amino acid residue in a BH3 polypeptide, for example, is preferably replaced with another amino acid residue from the same side chain family. Other examples of acceptable substitutions are substitutions based on isosteric considerations (e.g. norleucine for methionine) or other properties (e.g. 2-thienylalanine for phenylalanine).
  • The term “member” as used herein in conjunction with macrocycles or macrocycle-forming linkers refers to the atoms that form or can form the macrocycle, and excludes substituent or side chain atoms. By analogy, cyclodecane, 1,2-difluoro-decane and 1,3-dimethyl cyclodecane are all considered ten-membered macrocycles as the hydrogen or fluoro substituents or methyl side chains do not participate in forming the macrocycle.
  • The symbol “
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-P00001
    ” when used as part of a molecular structure refers to a single bond or a trans or cis double bond.
  • The term “amino acid side chain” refers to a moiety attached to the α-carbon in an amino acid. For example, the amino acid side chain for alanine is methyl, the amino acid side chain for phenylalanine is phenylmethyl, the amino acid side chain for cysteine is thiomethyl, the amino acid side chain for aspartate is carboxymethyl, the amino acid side chain for tyrosine is 4-hydroxyphenylmethyl, etc. Other non-naturally occurring amino acid side chains are also included, for example, those that occur in nature (e.g., an amino acid metabolite) or those that are made synthetically (e.g., an α,□α di-substituted amino acid).
  • The term “α,□α di-substituted amino” acid refers to a molecule or moiety containing both an amino group and a carboxyl group bound to a carbon (the α-carbon) that is attached to two natural or non-natural amino acid side chains.
  • The term “polypeptide” encompasses two or more naturally or non-naturally-occurring amino acids joined by a covalent bond (e.g., an amide bond). Polypeptides as described herein include full length proteins (e.g., fully processed proteins) as well as shorter amino acid sequences (e.g., fragments of naturally-occurring proteins or synthetic polypeptide fragments).
  • The term “macrocyclization reagent” or “macrocycle-forming reagent” as used herein refers to any reagent which may be used to prepare a peptidomimetic macrocycle of the invention by mediating the reaction between two reactive groups. Reactive groups may be, for example, an azide and alkyne, in which case macrocyclization reagents include, without limitation, Cu reagents such as reagents which provide a reactive Cu(I) species, such as CuBr, CuI or CuOTf, as well as Cu(II) salts such as Cu(CO2CH3)2, CuSO4, and CuCl2 that can be converted in situ to an active Cu(I) reagent by the addition of a reducing agent such as ascorbic acid or sodium ascorbate. Macrocyclization reagents may additionally include, for example, Ru reagents known in the art such as Cp*RuCl(PPh3)2, [Cp*RuCl]4 or other Ru reagents which may provide a reactive Ru(II) species. In other cases, the reactive groups are terminal olefins. In such embodiments, the macrocyclization reagents or macrocycle-forming reagents are metathesis catalysts including, but not limited to, stabilized, late transition metal carbene complex catalysts such as Group VIII transition metal carbene catalysts. For example, such catalysts are Ru and Os metal centers having a +2 oxidation state, an electron count of 16 and pentacoordinated. Additional catalysts are disclosed in Grubbs et al., “Ring Closing Metathesis and Related Processes in Organic Synthesis” Acc. Chem. Res. 1995, 28, 446-452, and U.S. Pat. No. 5,811,515. In yet other cases, the reactive groups are thiol groups. In such embodiments, the macrocyclization reagent is, for example, a linker functionalized with two thiol-reactive groups such as halogen groups.
  • The term “halo” or “halogen” refers to fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine or a radical thereof.
  • The term “alkyl” refers to a hydrocarbon chain that is a straight chain or branched chain, containing the indicated number of carbon atoms. For example, C1-C10 indicates that the group has from 1 to 10 (inclusive) carbon atoms in it. In the absence of any numerical designation, “alkyl” is a chain (straight or branched) having 1 to 20 (inclusive) carbon atoms in it.
  • The term “alkylene” refers to a divalent alkyl (i.e., —R—).
  • The term “alkenyl” refers to a hydrocarbon chain that is a straight chain or branched chain having one or more carbon-carbon double bonds. The alkenyl moiety contains the indicated number of carbon atoms. For example, C2-C10 indicates that the group has from 2 to 10 (inclusive) carbon atoms in it. The term “lower alkenyl” refers to a C2-C6 alkenyl chain. In the absence of any numerical designation, “alkenyl” is a chain (straight or branched) having 2 to 20 (inclusive) carbon atoms in it.
  • The term “alkynyl” refers to a hydrocarbon chain that is a straight chain or branched chain having one or more carbon-carbon triple bonds. The alkynyl moiety contains the indicated number of carbon atoms. For example, C2-C10 indicates that the group has from 2 to 10 (inclusive) carbon atoms in it. The term “lower alkynyl” refers to a C2-C6 alkynyl chain. In the absence of any numerical designation, “alkynyl” is a chain (straight or branched) having 2 to 20 (inclusive) carbon atoms in it.
  • The term “aryl” refers to a 6-carbon monocyclic or 10-carbon bicyclic aromatic ring system wherein 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4 atoms of each ring are substituted by a substituent. Examples of aryl groups include phenyl, naphthyl and the like. The term “arylalkyl” or the term “aralkyl” refers to alkyl substituted with an aryl. The term “arylalkoxy” refers to an alkoxy substituted with aryl.
  • “Arylalkyl” refers to an aryl group, as defined above, wherein one of the aryl group's hydrogen atoms has been replaced with a C1-C5 alkyl group, as defined above. Representative examples of an arylalkyl group include, but are not limited to, 2-methylphenyl, 3-methylphenyl, 4-methylphenyl, 2-ethylphenyl, 3-ethylphenyl, 4-ethylphenyl, 2-propylphenyl, 3-propylphenyl, 4-propylphenyl, 2-butylphenyl, 3-butylphenyl, 4-butylphenyl, 2-pentylphenyl, 3-pentylphenyl, 4-pentylphenyl, 2-isopropylphenyl, 3-isopropylphenyl, 4-isopropylphenyl, 2-isobutylphenyl, 3-isobutylphenyl, 4-isobutylphenyl, 2-sec-butylphenyl, 3-sec-butylphenyl, 4-sec-butylphenyl, 2-t-butylphenyl, 3-t-butylphenyl and 4-t-butylphenyl.
  • “Arylamido” refers to an aryl group, as defined above, wherein one of the aryl group's hydrogen atoms has been replaced with one or more —C(O)NH2 groups. Representative examples of an arylamido group include 2-C(O)NH2-phenyl, 3-C(O)NH2-phenyl, 4-C(O)NH2-phenyl, 2-C(O)NH2-pyridyl, 3-C(O)NH2-pyridyl, and 4-C(O)NH2-pyridyl,
  • “Alkylheterocycle” refers to a C1-C5 alkyl group, as defined above, wherein one of the C1-C5 alkyl group's hydrogen atoms has been replaced with a heterocycle. Representative examples of an alkylheterocycle group include, but are not limited to, —CH2CH2-morpholine, —CH2CH2-piperidine, —CH2CH2CH2-morpholine, and —CH2CH2CH2-imidazole.
  • “Alkylamido” refers to a C1-C5 alkyl group, as defined above, wherein one of the C1-C5 alkyl group's hydrogen atoms has been replaced with a —C(O)NH2 group. Representative examples of an alkylamido group include, but are not limited to, —CH2—C(O)NH2, —CH2CH2—C(O)NH2, —CH2CH2CH2C(O)NH2, —CH2CH2CH2CH2C(O)NH2, —CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2C(O)NH2, —CH2CH(C(O)NH2)CH3, —CH2CH(C(O)NH2)CH2CH3, —CH(C(O)NH2)CH2CH3, —C(CH3)2CH2C(O)NH2, —CH2—CH2—NH—C(O)—CH3, —CH2—CH2—NH—C(O)—CH3—CH3, and —CH2—CH2—NH—C(O)—CH═CH2.
  • “Alkanol” refers to a C1-C5 alkyl group, as defined above, wherein one of the C1-C5 alkyl group's hydrogen atoms has been replaced with a hydroxyl group. Representative examples of an alkanol group include, but are not limited to, —CH2OH, —CH2CH2OH, —CH2CH2CH2OH, —CH2CH2CH2CH2OH, —CH2CH2CH2 CH2CH2OH, —CH2CH(OH)CH3, —CH2CH(OH)CH2CH3, —CH(OH)CH3 and —C(CH3)2CH2OH.
  • “Alkylcarboxy” refers to a C1-C5 alkyl group, as defined above, wherein one of the C1-C5 alkyl group's hydrogen atoms has been replaced with a —COOH group. Representative examples of an alkylcarboxy group include, but are not limited to, —CH2COOH, —CH2CH2COOH, —CH2CH2CH2COOH, —CH2CH2CH2CH2COOH, —CH2CH(COOH)CH3, —CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2COOH, —CH2CH(COOH)CH2CH3, —CH(COOH)CH2CH3 and —C(CH3)2CH2COOH.
  • The term “cycloalkyl” as employed herein includes saturated and partially unsaturated cyclic hydrocarbon groups having 3 to 12 carbons, preferably 3 to 8 carbons, and more preferably 3 to 6 carbons, wherein the cycloalkyl group additionally is optionally substituted. Some cycloalkyl groups include, without limitation, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclohexyl, cyclohexenyl, cycloheptyl, and cyclooctyl.
  • The term “heteroaryl” refers to an aromatic 5-8 membered monocyclic, 8-12 membered bicyclic, or 11-14 membered tricyclic ring system having 1-3 heteroatoms if monocyclic, 1-6 heteroatoms if bicyclic, or 1-9 heteroatoms if tricyclic, said heteroatoms selected from O, N, or S (e.g., carbon atoms and 1-3, 1-6, or 1-9 heteroatoms of O, N, or S if monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic, respectively), wherein 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4 atoms of each ring are substituted by a substituent. Examples of heteroaryl groups include pyridyl, furyl or furanyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, pyrimidinyl, thiophenyl or thienyl, quinolinyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, and the like.
  • The term “heteroarylalkyl” or the term “heteroaralkyl” refers to an alkyl substituted with a heteroaryl. The term “heteroarylalkoxy” refers to an alkoxy substituted with heteroaryl.
  • The term “heteroarylalkyl” or the term “heteroaralkyl” refers to an alkyl substituted with a heteroaryl. The term “heteroarylalkoxy” refers to an alkoxy substituted with heteroaryl.
  • The term “heterocyclyl” refers to a nonaromatic 5-8 membered monocyclic, 8-12 membered bicyclic, or 11-14 membered tricyclic ring system having 1-3 heteroatoms if monocyclic, 1-6 heteroatoms if bicyclic, or 1-9 heteroatoms if tricyclic, said heteroatoms selected from O, N, or S (e.g., carbon atoms and 1-3, 1-6, or 1-9 heteroatoms of O, N, or S if monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic, respectively), wherein 0, 1, 2 or 3 atoms of each ring are substituted by a substituent. Examples of heterocyclyl groups include piperazinyl, pyrrolidinyl, dioxanyl, morpholinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, and the like.
  • The term “substituent” refers to a group replacing a second atom or group such as a hydrogen atom on any molecule, compound or moiety. Suitable substituents include, without limitation, halo, hydroxy, mercapto, oxo, nitro, haloalkyl, alkyl, alkaryl, aryl, aralkyl, alkoxy, thioalkoxy, aryloxy, amino, alkoxycarbonyl, amido, carboxy, alkanesulfonyl, alkylcarbonyl, and cyano groups.
  • In some embodiments, the compounds of this invention contain one or more asymmetric centers and thus occur as racemates and racemic mixtures, single enantiomers, individual diastereomers and diastereomeric mixtures. All such isomeric forms of these compounds are included in the present invention unless expressly provided otherwise. In some embodiments, the compounds of this invention are also represented in multiple tautomeric forms, in such instances, the invention includes all tautomeric forms of the compounds described herein (e.g., if alkylation of a ring system results in alkylation at multiple sites, the invention includes all such reaction products). All such isomeric forms of such compounds are included in the present invention unless expressly provided otherwise. All crystal forms of the compounds described herein are included in the present invention unless expressly provided otherwise.
  • As used herein, the terms “increase” and “decrease” mean, respectively, to cause a statistically significantly (i.e., p<0.1) increase or decrease of at least 5%.
  • As used herein, the recitation of a numerical range for a variable is intended to convey that the invention may be practiced with the variable equal to any of the values within that range. Thus, for a variable which is inherently discrete, the variable is equal to any integer value within the numerical range, including the end-points of the range. Similarly, for a variable which is inherently continuous, the variable is equal to any real value within the numerical range, including the end-points of the range. As an example, and without limitation, a variable which is described as having values between 0 and 2 takes the values 0, 1 or 2 if the variable is inherently discrete, and takes the values 0.0, 0.1, 0.01, 0.001, or any other real values ≧0 and ≦2 if the variable is inherently continuous.
  • As used herein, unless specifically indicated otherwise, the word “or” is used in the inclusive sense of “and/or” and not the exclusive sense of “either/or.”
  • The term “on average” represents the mean value derived from performing at least three independent replicates for each data point.
  • The term “biological activity” encompasses structural and functional properties of a macrocycle of the invention. Biological activity is, for example, structural stability, alpha-helicity, affinity for a target, resistance to proteolytic degradation, cell penetrability, intracellular stability, in vivo stability, or any combination thereof.
  • The details of one or more particular embodiments of the invention are set forth in the accompanying drawings and the description below. Other features, objects, and advantages of the invention will be apparent from the description and drawings, and from the claims.
  • Design of the Peptidomimetic Macrocycles of the Invention
  • Any protein or polypeptide with a known primary amino acid sequence which contains a helical structure believed to impart biological activity is the subject of the present invention. For example, the sequence of the polypeptide can be analyzed and amino acid analogs containing groups reactive with macrocyclization reagents can be substituted at the appropriate positions. The appropriate positions are determined by ascertaining which molecular surface(s) of the secondary structure is (are) required for biological activity and, therefore, across which other surface(s) the macrocycle forming linkers of the invention can form a macrocycle without sterically blocking the surface(s) required for biological activity. Such determinations are made using methods such as X-ray crystallography of complexes between the secondary structure and a natural binding partner to visualize residues (and surfaces) critical for activity; by sequential mutagenesis of residues in the secondary structure to functionally identify residues (and surfaces) critical for activity; or by other methods. By such determinations, the appropriate amino acids are substituted with the amino acids analogs and macrocycle-forming linkers of the invention. For example, for an α-helical secondary structure, one surface of the helix (e.g., a molecular surface extending longitudinally along the axis of the helix and radially 45-135° about the axis of the helix) may be required to make contact with another biomolecule in vivo or in vitro for biological activity. In such a case, a macrocycle-forming linker is designed to link two α-carbons of the helix while extending longitudinally along the surface of the helix in the portion of that surface not directly required for activity.
  • In some embodiments of the invention, the peptide sequence is derived from the BCL-2 family of proteins. The BCL-2 family is defined by the presence of up to four conserved BCL-2 homology (BH) domains designated BH1, BH2, BH3, and BH4, all of which include α-helical segments (Chittenden et al. (1995), EMBO 14:5589; Wang et al. (1996), Genes Dev. 10:2859). Anti-apoptotic proteins, such as BCL-2 and BCL-XL, display sequence conservation in all BH domains. Pro-apoptotic proteins are divided into “multidomain” family members (e.g., BAK, BAX), which possess homology in the BH1, BH2, and BH3 domains, and “BH3-domain only” family members (e.g., BID, BAD, BIM, BIK, NOXA, PUMA), that contain sequence homology exclusively in the BH3 amphipathic α-helical segment. BCL-2 family members have the capacity to form homo- and heterodimers, suggesting that competitive binding and the ratio between pro- and anti-apoptotic protein levels dictates susceptibility to death stimuli. Anti-apoptotic proteins function to protect cells from pro-apoptotic excess, i.e., excessive programmed cell death. Additional “security” measures include regulating transcription of pro-apoptotic proteins and maintaining them as inactive conformers, requiring either proteolytic activation, dephosphorylation, or ligand-induced conformational change to activate pro-death functions. In certain cell types, death signals received at the plasma membrane trigger apoptosis via a mitochondrial pathway. The mitochondria can serve as a gatekeeper of cell death by sequestering cytochrome c, a critical component of a cytosolic complex which activates caspase 9, leading to fatal downstream proteolytic events. Multidomain proteins such as BCL-2/BCL-XL and BAK/BAX play dueling roles of guardian and executioner at the mitochondrial membrane, with their activities further regulated by upstream BH3-only members of the BCL-2 family. For example, BID is a member of the BH3-domain only family of pro-apoptotic proteins, and transmits death signals received at the plasma membrane to effector pro-apoptotic proteins at the mitochondrial membrane. BID has the capability of interacting with both pro- and anti-apoptotic proteins, and upon activation by caspase 8, triggers cytochrome c release and mitochondrial apoptosis. Deletion and mutagenesis studies determined that the amphipathic α-helical BH3 segment of pro-apoptotic family members may function as a death domain and thus may represent a critical structural motif for interacting with multidomain apoptotic proteins. Structural studies have shown that the BH3 helix can interact with anti-apoptotic proteins by inserting into a hydrophobic groove formed by the interface of BH1, 2 and 3 domains. Activated BID can be bound and sequestered by anti-apoptotic proteins (e.g., BCL-2 and BCL-XL) and can trigger activation of the pro-apoptotic proteins BAX and BAK, leading to cytochrome c release and a mitochondrial apoptosis program. BAD is also a BH3-domain only pro-apoptotic family member whose expression triggers the activation of BAX/BAK. In contrast to BID, however, BAD displays preferential binding to anti-apoptotic family members, BCL-2 and BCL-XL. Whereas the BAD BH3 domain exhibits high affinity binding to BCL-2, BAD BH3 peptide is unable to activate cytochrome c release from mitochondria in vitro, suggesting that BAD is not a direct activator of BAX/BAK. Mitochondria that over-express BCL-2 are resistant to BID-induced cytochrome c release, but co-treatment with BAD can restore BID sensitivity. Induction of mitochondrial apoptosis by BAD appears to result from either: (1) displacement of BAX/BAK activators, such as BID and BID-like proteins, from the BCL-2/BCL-XL binding pocket, or (2) selective occupation of the BCL-2/BCL-XL binding pocket by BAD to prevent sequestration of BID-like proteins by anti-apoptotic proteins. Thus, two classes of BH3-domain only proteins have emerged, BID-like proteins that directly activate mitochondrial apoptosis, and BAD-like proteins, that have the capacity to sensitize mitochondria to BID-like pro-apoptotics by occupying the binding pockets of multidomain anti-apoptotic proteins. Various α-helical domains of BCL-2 family member proteins amenable to the methodology disclosed herein have been disclosed (Walensky et al. (2004), Science 305:1466; and Walensky et al., U.S. Patent Publication No. 2005/0250680, the entire disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference).
  • A non-limiting exemplary list of suitable peptide sequences for use in the present invention is given below:
  • TABLE 1
    SEQ SEQ
    ID Cross-linked Sequence (X = x-link ID
    Name Sequence (bold = critical residues) NO: residue) NO:
    BH3 peptides
    BID-BH3 QEDIIRNIARHLAQVGDSMDRSIPP 3 QEDIIRNIARHLA X VGD X MDRSIPP 26
    BIM-BH3 DNRPEIWIAQELRRIGDEFNAYYAR 4 DNRPEIWIAQELR X IGD X FNAYYAR 27
    BAD-BH3 NLWAAQRYGRELRRMSDEFVDSFKK 5 NLWAAQRYGRELR X MSD X FVDSFKK 28
    PUMA-BH3 EEQWAREIGAQLRRMADDLNAQYER 6 EEQWAREIGAQLR X MAD X LNAQYER 29
    Hrk-BH3 RSSAAQLTAARLKALGDELHQRTM 7 RSSAAQLTAARLK X LGD X LHQRTM 30
    NOXAA-BH3 AELPPEFAAQLRKIGDKVYCTW 8 AELPPEFAAQLR X IGD X VYCTW 31
    NOXAB-BH3 VPADLKDECAQLRRIGDKVNLRQKL 9 VPADLKDECAQLR X IGD X VNLRQKL 32
    BMF-BH3 QHRAEVQIARKLQCIADQFHRLHT 10 QHRAEVQIARKLQ X IAD X FHRLHT 33
    BLK-BH3 SSAAQLTAARLKALGDELHQRT 11 SSAAQLTAARLK X LGD X LHQRT 34
    BIK-BH3 CMEGSDALALRLACIGDEMDVSLRA 12 CMEGSDALALRLA X IGD X MDVSLRA 35
    Bnip3 DIERRKEVESILKKNSDWIWDWSS 13 DIERRKEVESILK X NSD X IWDWSS 36
    BOK-BH3 GRLAEVCAVLLRLGDELEMIRP 14 GRLAEVCAVLL X LGD X LEMIRP 37
    BAX-BH3 PQDASTKKSECLKRIGDELDSNMEL 15 PQDASTKKSECLK X IGD X LDSNMEL 38
    BAK-BH3 PSSTMGQVGRQLAIIGDDINRR 16 PSSTMGQVGRQLA X IGD X INRR 39
    BCL2L1-BH3 KQALREAGDEFELR 17 KQALR X AGD X FELR 40
    BCL2-BH3 LSPPVVHLALALRQAGDDFSRR 18 LSPPVVHLALALR X AGD X FSRR 41
    BCL-XL-BH3 EVIPMAAVKQALREAGDEFELRY 19 EVIPMAAVKQALR X AGD X FELRY 42
    BCL-W-BH3 PADPLHQAMRAAGDEFETRF 20 PADPLHQAMR X AGD X FETRF 43
    MCL1-BH3 ATSRKLETLRRVGDGVQRNHETA 21 ATSRKLETLR X VGD X VQRNHETA 44
    MTD-BH3 LAEVCTVLLRLGDELEQIR 22 LAEVCTVLL X LGD X LEQIR 45
    MAP-1-BH3 MTVGELSRALGHENGSLDP 23 MTVGELSRALG X ENG X LDP 46
    NIX-BH3 VVEGEKEVEALKKSADWVSDWS 24 VVEGEKEVEALK X SAD X VSDWS 47
    4ICD(ERBB4)- SMARDPQRYLVIQGDDRMKL 25 SMARDPQRYLV X QGD X RMKL 48
    BH3

    Table 1 lists human sequences which target the BH3 binding site and are implicated in cancers, autoimmune disorders, metabolic diseases and other human disease conditions.
  • TABLE 2
    SEQ SEQ
    Sequence ID Cross-linked Sequence ID
    Name (bold = critical residues) NO: (X = x-link residue) NO:
    BH3 peptides
    BID-BH3 QEDIIRNIARHLAQVGDSMDRSIPP 3 QEDIIRNI X RHL X QVGDSMDRSIPP 49
    BIM-BH3 DNRPEIWIAQELRRIGDEFNAYYAR 4 DNRPEIWI X QEL X RIGDEFNAYYAR 50
    BAD-BH3 NLWAAQRYGRELRRMSDEFVDSFKK 5 NLWAAQRY X REL X RMSDEFVDSFKK 51
    PUMA-BH3 EEQWAREIGAQLRRMADDLNAQYER 6 EEQWAREI X AQL X RMADDLNAQYER 52
    Hrk-BH3 RSSAAQLTAARLKALGDELHQRTM 7 RSSAAQLT X ARL X ALGDELHQRTM 53
    NOXAA-BH3 AELPPEFAAQLRKIGDKVYCTW 8 AELPPEF X AQL X KIGDKVYCTW 54
    NOXAB-BH3 VPADLKDECAQLRRIGDKVNLRQKL 9 VPADLKDE X AQL X RIGDKVNLRQKL 55
    BMF-BH3 QHRAEVQIARKLQCIADQFHRLHT 10 QHRAEVQI X RKL X CIADQFHRLHT 56
    BLK-BH3 SSAAQLTAARLKALGDELHQRT 11 SSAAQLT X ARL X ALGDELHQRT 57
    BIK-BH3 CMEGSDALALRLACIGDEMDVSLRA 12 CMEGSDAL X LRL X CIGDEMDVSLRA 58
    Bnip3 DIERRKEVESILKKNSDWIWDWSS 13 DIERRKEV X SIL X KNSDWIWDWSS 59
    BOK-BH3 GRLAEVCAVLLRLGDELEMIRP 14 GRLAEV X AVL X RLGDELEMIRP 60
    BAX-BH3 PQDASTKKSECLKRIGDELDSNMEL 15 PQDASTKK X ECL X RIGDELDSNMEL 61
    BAK-BH3 PSSTMGQVGRQLAIIGDDINRR 16 PSSTMGQV X RQL X IIGDDINRR 62
    BCL2L1-BH3 KQALREAGDEFELR 17 X QAL X EAGDEFELR 63
    BCL2-BH3 LSPPVVHLALALRQAGDDFSRR 18 LSPPVVHL X LAL X QAGDDFSRR 64
    BCL-XL-BH3 EVIPMAAVKQALREAGDEFELRY 19 EVIPMAAV X QAL X EAGDEFELRY 65
    BCL-W-BH3 PADPLHQAMRAAGDEFETRF 20 PADPL X QAM X AAGDEFETRF 66
    MCL1-BH3 ATSRKLETLRRVGDGVQRNHETA 21 ATSRK X ETL X RVGDGVQRNHETA 67
    MTD-BH3 LAEVCTVLLRLGDELEQIR 22 LAEV X TVL X RLGDELEQIR 68
    MAP-1-BH3 MTVGELSRALGHENGSLDP 23 MTVGEL X RAL X HENGSLDP 69
    NIX-BH3 VVEGEKEVEALKKSADWVSDWS 24 VVEGEKE X EAL X KSADWVSDWS 70
    4ICD(ERBB4)- SMARDPQRYLVIQGDDRMKL 25 SMARDP X RYL X IQGDDRMKL 71
    BH3

    Table 2 lists human sequences which target the BH3 binding site and are implicated in cancers, autoimmune disorders, metabolic diseases and other human disease conditions.
  • Peptidomimetic Macrocycles of the Invention
  • In some embodiments of the method, a polypeptide of the invention contains one crosslink. In other embodiments of the method, said polypeptide contains two cross-links. In some embodiments of the method, one crosslink connects two α-carbon atoms. In other embodiments of the method, one α-carbon atom to which one crosslink is attached is substituted with a substituent of formula R—. In another embodiment of the method, two α-carbon atoms to which one crosslink is attached are substituted with independent substituents of formula R—. In one embodiment of the methods of the invention, R— is alkyl. For example, R— is methyl. Alternatively, R— and any portion of one crosslink taken together can form a cyclic structure. In another embodiment of the method, one crosslink is formed of consecutive carbon-carbon bonds. For example, one crosslink may comprise at least 8, 9, 10, 11, or 12 consecutive bonds. In other embodiments, one crosslink may comprise at least 7, 8, 9, 10, or 11 carbon atoms.
  • In another embodiment of the method, the crosslinked polypeptide comprises an α-helical domain of a BCL-2 family member. For example, the crosslinked polypeptide comprises a BH3 domain. In other embodiments, the crosslinked polypeptide comprises at least 60%, 70%, 80%, 85%, 90% or 95% of any of the sequences in Tables 1, 2, 3 and 4. In some embodiments of the method, the crosslinked polypeptide penetrates cell membranes by an energy-dependent process and binds to an intracellular target.
  • In some embodiments, said helical polypeptide contains one crosslink. In other embodiments, said helical polypeptide contains two cross-links.
  • In some embodiments, one crosslink connects two α-carbon atoms. In other embodiments, one α-carbon atom to which one crosslink is attached is substituted with a substituent of formula R—. In another embodiment, two α-carbon atoms to which one crosslink is attached are substituted with independent substituents of formula R—. In one embodiment of the invention, R— is alkyl. For example, R— is methyl. Alternatively, R— and any portion of one crosslink taken together can form a cyclic structure. In another embodiment, one crosslink is formed of consecutive carbon-carbon bonds. For example, one crosslink may comprise at least 8, 9, 10, 11, or 12 consecutive bonds. In other embodiments, one crosslink may comprise at least 7, 8, 9, 10, or 11 carbon atoms.
  • In another embodiment, the crosslinked polypeptide comprises an α-helical domain of a BCL-2 family member. For example, the crosslinked polypeptide comprises a BH3 domain. In other embodiments, the crosslinked polypeptide comprises at least 60%, 70%, 80%, 85%, 90% or 95% of any of the sequences in Tables 1, 2, 3 and 4. In some embodiments, the crosslinked polypeptide penetrates cell membranes by an energy-dependent process and binds to an intracellular target.
  • In some embodiments, the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention have the Formula (I):
  • Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00001
  • wherein:
  • each A, C, D, and E is independently a natural or non-natural amino acid;
  • B is a natural or non-natural amino acid, amino acid analog,
  • Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00002
  • [—NH-L3-CO-], [—NH-L3-SO2-], or [—NH-L3-];
  • R1 and R2 are independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroalkyl, or heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-;
  • R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloaryl, or heterocycloaryl, optionally substituted with R5;
  • L is a macrocycle-forming linker of the formula -L1-L2-; L1 and L2 are independently alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, heteroalkylene, cycloalkylene, heterocycloalkylene, cycloarylene, heterocycloarylene, or [—R4—K—R4-]n, each being optionally substituted with R5;
  • each R4 is alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, heteroalkylene, cycloalkylene, heterocycloalkylene, arylene, or heteroarylene;
  • each K is O, S, SO, SO2, CO, CO2, or CONR3;
  • each R5 is independently halogen, alkyl, —OR6, —N(R6)2, —SR6, —SORE, —SO2R6, —CO2R6, a fluorescent moiety, a radioisotope or a therapeutic agent;
  • each R6 is independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, a fluorescent moiety, a radioisotope or a therapeutic agent;
  • R7 is —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, cycloaryl, or heterocycloaryl, optionally substituted with R5, or part of a cyclic structure with a D residue;
  • R8 is —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, cycloaryl, or heterocycloaryl, optionally substituted with R5, or part of a cyclic structure with an E residue;
  • each of v and w is independently an integer from 1-1000;
  • each of x, y, and z is independently an integer from 0-10; u is an integer from 1-10; and n is an integer from 1-5.
  • In one example, at least one of R1 and R2 is alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-. In another example, both R1 and R2 are independently alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-. In some embodiments, at least one of R1 and R2 is methyl. In other embodiments, R1 and R2 are methyl.
  • In some embodiments of the invention, x+y+z is at least 3. In other embodiments of the invention, x+y+z is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10. Each occurrence of A, B, C, D or E in a macrocycle or macrocycle precursor of the invention is independently selected. For example, a sequence represented by the formula [A]x, when x is 3, encompasses embodiments where the amino acids are not identical, e.g. Gln-Asp-Ala as well as embodiments where the amino acids are identical, e.g. Gln-Gln-Gln. This applies for any value of x, y, or z in the indicated ranges.
  • In some embodiments, the peptidomimetic macrocycle of the invention comprises a secondary structure which is an α-helix and R8 is —H, allowing intrahelical hydrogen bonding. In some embodiments, at least one of A, B, C, D or E is an α,α-disubstituted amino acid. In one example, B is an α,α-disubstituted amino acid. For instance, at least one of A, B, C, D or E is 2-aminoisobutyric acid. In other embodiments, at least one of A, B, C, D or E is
  • Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00003
  • In other embodiments, the length of the macrocycle-forming linker L as measured from a first Cα to a second Cα is selected to stabilize a desired secondary peptide structure, such as an α-helix formed by residues of the peptidomimetic macrocycle including, but not necessarily limited to, those between the first Cα to a second Cα.
  • In one embodiment, the peptidomimetic macrocycle of Formula (I) is:
  • Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00004
  • wherein each R1 and R2 is independently independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroalkyl, or heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-.
  • In related embodiments, the peptidomimetic macrocycle of Formula (I) is:
  • Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00005
  • In other embodiments, the peptidomimetic macrocycle of Formula (I) is a compound of any of the formulas shown below:
  • Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00006
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00007
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00008
  • wherein “AA” represents any natural or non-natural amino acid side chain and “
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-P00001
    ” is [D]v, [E]w as defined above, and n is an integer between 0 and 20, 50, 100, 200, 300, 400 or 500. In some embodiments, n is 0. In other embodiments, n is less than 50.
  • Exemplary embodiments of the macrocycle-forming linker L are shown below.
  • Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00009
  • In some embodiments, the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention have the Formula (II):
  • Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00010
  • wherein:
  • each A, C, D, and E is independently a natural or non-natural amino acid;
  • B is a natural or non-natural amino acid, amino acid analog,
  • Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00011
  • [—NH-L3-CO-], [—NH-L3-SO2-], or [—NH-L3-];
  • R1 and R2 are independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroalkyl, or heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-;
  • R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloaryl, or heterocycloaryl, optionally substituted with R5;
  • L is a macrocycle-forming linker of the formula
  • Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00012
  • L1, L2 and L3 are independently alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, heteroalkylene, cycloalkylene, heterocycloalkylene, cycloarylene, heterocycloarylene, or [—R4—K—R4-]n, each being optionally substituted with R5;
  • each R4 is alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, heteroalkylene, cycloalkylene, heterocycloalkylene, arylene, or heteroarylene;
  • each K is O, S, SO, SO2, CO, CO2, or CONR3;
  • each R5 is independently halogen, alkyl, —OR6, —N(R6)2, —SR6, —SORE, —SO2R6, —CO2R6, a fluorescent moiety, a radioisotope or a therapeutic agent;
  • each R6 is independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, a fluorescent moiety, a radioisotope or a therapeutic agent;
  • R7 is —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, cycloaryl, or heterocycloaryl, optionally substituted with R5, or part of a cyclic structure with a D residue;
  • R8 is —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, cycloaryl, or heterocycloaryl, optionally substituted with R5, or part of a cyclic structure with an E residue;
  • each of v and w is independently an integer from 1-1000;
  • each of x, y, and z is independently an integer from 0-10; u is an integer from 1-10; and
  • n is an integer from 1-5.
  • In one example, at least one of R1 and R2 is alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-. In another example, both R1 and R2 are independently alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-. In some embodiments, at least one of R1 and R2 is methyl. In other embodiments, R1 and R2 are methyl.
  • In some embodiments of the invention, x+y+z is at least 3. In other embodiments of the invention, x+y+z is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10. Each occurrence of A, B, C, D or E in a macrocycle or macrocycle precursor of the invention is independently selected. For example, a sequence represented by the formula [A]x, when x is 3, encompasses embodiments where the amino acids are not identical, e.g. Gln-Asp-Ala as well as embodiments where the amino acids are identical, e.g. Gln-Gln-Gln. This applies for any value of x, y, or z in the indicated ranges.
  • In some embodiments, the peptidomimetic macrocycle of the invention comprises a secondary structure which is an α-helix and R8 is —H, allowing intrahelical hydrogen bonding. In some embodiments, at least one of A, B, C, D or E is an α,α-disubstituted amino acid. In one example, B is an α,α-disubstituted amino acid. For instance, at least one of A, B, C, D or E is 2-aminoisobutyric acid. In other embodiments, at least one of A, B, C, D or E is
  • Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00013
  • In other embodiments, the length of the macrocycle-forming linker L as measured from a first Cα to a second Cα is selected to stabilize a desired secondary peptide structure, such as an α-helix formed by residues of the peptidomimetic macrocycle including, but not necessarily limited to, those between the first Cα to a second Cα.
  • Exemplary embodiments of the macrocycle-forming linker L are shown below.
  • Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00014
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00015
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00016
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00017
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00018
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00019
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00020
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00021
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00022
  • In other embodiments, the invention provides peptidomimetic macrocycles of Formula (III):
  • Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00023
  • wherein:
    each A, C, D, and E is independently a natural or non-natural amino acid;
    B is a natural or non-natural amino acid, amino acid analog,
  • Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00024
  • [—NH-L4-CO-], [—NH-L4-SO2-], or [—NH-L4-];
  • R1 and R2 are independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroalkyl, or heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-;
    R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloaryl, or heterocycloaryl, unsubstituted or substituted with R5;
    L1, L2, L3 and L4 are independently alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, heteroalkylene, cycloalkylene, heterocycloalkylene, cycloarylene, heterocycloarylene or [—R4—K—R4-]n, each being unsubstituted or substituted with R5;
  • K is O, S, SO, SO2, CO, CO2, or CONR3;
  • each R4 is alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, heteroalkylene, cycloalkylene, heterocycloalkylene, arylene, or heteroarylene;
    each R5 is independently halogen, alkyl, —OR6, —N(R6)2, —SR6, —SORE, —SO2R6, —CO2R6, a fluorescent moiety, a radioisotope or a therapeutic agent;
    each R6 is independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, a fluorescent moiety, a radioisotope or a therapeutic agent;
    R7 is —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, cycloaryl, or heterocycloaryl, unsubstituted or substituted with R5, or part of a cyclic structure with a D residue;
    R8 is —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, cycloaryl, or heterocycloaryl, unsubstituted or substituted with R5, or part of a cyclic structure with an E residue;
    each of v and w is independently an integer from 1-1000;
    each of x, y, and z is independently an integer from 0-10; u is an integer from 1-10; and
    n is an integer from 1-5.
  • In one example, at least one of R1 and R2 is alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-. In another example, both R1 and R2 are independently alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-. In some embodiments, at least one of R1 and R2 is methyl. In other embodiments, R1 and R2 are methyl.
  • In some embodiments of the invention, x+y+z is at least 3. In other embodiments of the invention, x+y+z is 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10. Each occurrence of A, B, C, D or E in a macrocycle or macrocycle precursor of the invention is independently selected. For example, a sequence represented by the formula [A]x, when x is 3, encompasses embodiments where the amino acids are not identical, e.g. Gln-Asp-Ala as well as embodiments where the amino acids are identical, e.g. Gln-Gln-Gln. This applies for any value of x, y, or z in the indicated ranges.
  • In some embodiments, the peptidomimetic macrocycle of the invention comprises a secondary structure which is an α-helix and R8 is —H, allowing intrahelical hydrogen bonding. In some embodiments, at least one of A, B, C, D or E is an α,α-disubstituted amino acid. In one example, B is an α,α-disubstituted amino acid. For instance, at least one of A, B, C, D or E is 2-aminoisobutyric acid. In other embodiments, at least one of A, B, C, D or E is
  • Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00025
  • In other embodiments, the length of the macrocycle-forming linker [-L1-S-L2-S-L3-] as measured from a first Cα to a second Cα is selected to stabilize a desired secondary peptide structure, such as an α-helix formed by residues of the peptidomimetic macrocycle including, but not necessarily limited to, those between the first Cα to a second Cα.
  • Macrocycles or macrocycle precursors are synthesized, for example, by solution phase or solid-phase methods, and can contain both naturally-occurring and non-naturally-occurring amino acids. See, for example, Hunt, “The Non-Protein Amino Acids” in Chemistry and Biochemistry of the Amino Acids, edited by G. C. Barrett, Chapman and Hall, 1985. In some embodiments, the thiol moieties are the side chains of the amino acid residues L-cysteine, D-cysteine, α-methyl-L cysteine, α-methyl-D-cysteine, L-homocysteine, D-homocysteine, α-methyl-L-homocysteine or α-methyl-D-homocysteine. A bis-alkylating reagent is of the general formula X-L2-Y wherein L2 is a linker moiety and X and Y are leaving groups that are displaced by —SH moieties to form bonds with L2. In some embodiments, X and Y are halogens such as I, Br, or Cl.
  • In other embodiments, D and/or E in the compound of Formula I, II or III are further modified in order to facilitate cellular uptake. In some embodiments, lipidating or PEGylating a peptidomimetic macrocycle facilitates cellular uptake, increases bioavailability, increases blood circulation, alters pharmacokinetics, decreases immunogenicity and/or decreases the needed frequency of administration.
  • In other embodiments, at least one of [D] and [E] in the compound of Formula I, II or III represents a moiety comprising an additional macrocycle-forming linker such that the peptidomimetic macrocycle comprises at least two macrocycle-forming linkers. In a specific embodiment, a peptidomimetic macrocycle comprises two macrocycle-forming linkers.
  • In the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention, any of the macrocycle-forming linkers described herein may be used in any combination with any of the sequences shown in Tables 1-4 and also with any of the R— substituents indicated herein.
  • In some embodiments, the peptidomimetic macrocycle comprises at least one α-helix motif. For example, A, B and/or C in the compound of Formula I, II or III include one or more α-helices. As a general matter, α-helices include between 3 and 4 amino acid residues per turn. In some embodiments, the α-helix of the peptidomimetic macrocycle includes 1 to 5 turns and, therefore, 3 to 20 amino acid residues. In specific embodiments, the α-helix includes 1 turn, 2 turns, 3 turns, 4 turns, or 5 turns. In some embodiments, the macrocycle-forming linker stabilizes an α-helix motif included within the peptidomimetic macrocycle. Thus, in some embodiments, the length of the macrocycle-forming linker L from a first Cα to a second Cα is selected to increase the stability of an α-helix. In some embodiments, the macrocycle-forming linker spans from 1 turn to 5 turns of the α-helix. In some embodiments, the macrocycle-forming linker spans approximately 1 turn, 2 turns, 3 turns, 4 turns, or 5 turns of the α-helix. In some embodiments, the length of the macrocycle-forming linker is approximately 5 Å to 9 Å per turn of the α-helix, or approximately 6 Å to 8 Å per turn of the α-helix. Where the macrocycle-forming linker spans approximately 1 turn of an α-helix, the length is equal to approximately 5 carbon-carbon bonds to 13 carbon-carbon bonds, approximately 7 carbon-carbon bonds to 11 carbon-carbon bonds, or approximately 9 carbon-carbon bonds. Where the macrocycle-forming linker spans approximately 2 turns of an α-helix, the length is equal to approximately 8 carbon-carbon bonds to 16 carbon-carbon bonds, approximately 10 carbon-carbon bonds to 14 carbon-carbon bonds, or approximately 12 carbon-carbon bonds. Where the macrocycle-forming linker spans approximately 3 turns of an α-helix, the length is equal to approximately 14 carbon-carbon bonds to 22 carbon-carbon bonds, approximately 16 carbon-carbon bonds to 20 carbon-carbon bonds, or approximately 18 carbon-carbon bonds. Where the macrocycle-forming linker spans approximately 4 turns of an α-helix, the length is equal to approximately 20 carbon-carbon bonds to 28 carbon-carbon bonds, approximately 22 carbon-carbon bonds to 26 carbon-carbon bonds, or approximately 24 carbon-carbon bonds. Where the macrocycle-forming linker spans approximately 5 turns of an α-helix, the length is equal to approximately 26 carbon-carbon bonds to 34 carbon-carbon bonds, approximately 28 carbon-carbon bonds to 32 carbon-carbon bonds, or approximately 30 carbon-carbon bonds. Where the macrocycle-forming linker spans approximately 1 turn of an α-helix, the linkage contains approximately 4 atoms to 12 atoms, approximately 6 atoms to 10 atoms, or approximately 8 atoms. Where the macrocycle-forming linker spans approximately 2 turns of the α-helix, the linkage contains approximately 7 atoms to 15 atoms, approximately 9 atoms to 13 atoms, or approximately 11 atoms. Where the macrocycle-forming linker spans approximately 3 turns of the α-helix, the linkage contains approximately 13 atoms to 21 atoms, approximately 15 atoms to 19 atoms, or approximately 17 atoms. Where the macrocycle-forming linker spans approximately 4 turns of the α-helix, the linkage contains approximately 19 atoms to 27 atoms, approximately 21 atoms to 25 atoms, or approximately 23 atoms. Where the macrocycle-forming linker spans approximately 5 turns of the α-helix, the linkage contains approximately 25 atoms to 33 atoms, approximately 27 atoms to 31 atoms, or approximately 29 atoms. Where the macrocycle-forming linker spans approximately 1 turn of the α-helix, the resulting macrocycle forms a ring containing approximately 17 members to 25 members, approximately 19 members to 23 members, or approximately 21 members. Where the macrocycle-forming linker spans approximately 2 turns of the α-helix, the resulting macrocycle forms a ring containing approximately 29 members to 37 members, approximately 31 members to 35 members, or approximately 33 members. Where the macrocycle-forming linker spans approximately 3 turns of the α-helix, the resulting macrocycle forms a ring containing approximately 44 members to 52 members, approximately 46 members to 50 members, or approximately 48 members. Where the macrocycle-forming linker spans approximately 4 turns of the α-helix, the resulting macrocycle forms a ring containing approximately 59 members to 67 members, approximately 61 members to 65 members, or approximately 63 members. Where the macrocycle-forming linker spans approximately 5 turns of the α-helix, the resulting macrocycle forms a ring containing approximately 74 members to 82 members, approximately 76 members to 80 members, or approximately 78 members.
  • In other embodiments, the invention provides peptidomimetic macrocycles of Formula (IV) or (IVa):
  • Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00026
  • wherein:
  • each A, C, D, and E is independently a natural or non-natural amino acid;
  • B is a natural or non-natural amino acid, amino acid analog,
  • Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00027
  • [—NH-L3-CO-], [—NH-L3-SO2-], or [—NH-L3-];
  • R1 and R2 are independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroalkyl, or heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-, or part of a cyclic structure with an E residue;
  • R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloaryl, or heterocycloaryl, optionally substituted with R5;
  • L is a macrocycle-forming linker of the formula -L1-L2-;
  • L1 and L2 are independently alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, heteroalkylene, cycloalkylene, heterocycloalkylene, cycloarylene, heterocycloarylene, or [—R4—K—R4-]n, each being optionally substituted with R5;
  • each R4 is alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, heteroalkylene, cycloalkylene, heterocycloalkylene, arylene, or heteroarylene;
  • each K is O, S, SO, SO2, CO, CO2, or CONR3;
  • each R5 is independently halogen, alkyl, —OR6, —N(R6)2, —SR6, —SORE, —SO2R6, —CO2R6, a fluorescent moiety, a radioisotope or a therapeutic agent;
  • each R6 is independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, a fluorescent moiety, a radioisotope or a therapeutic agent;
  • R7 is —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, cycloaryl, or heterocycloaryl, optionally substituted with R5;
  • V is an integer from 1-1000;
  • w is an integer from 1-1000;
  • x is an integer from 0-10;
  • y is an integer from 0-10;
  • z is an integer from 0-10; and
  • n is an integer from 1-5.
  • In one example, at least one of R1 and R2 is alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-. In another example, both R1 and R2 are independently alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-. In some embodiments, at least one of R1 and R2 is methyl. In other embodiments, R1 and R2 are methyl.
  • In some embodiments of the invention, x+y+z is at least 3. In other embodiments of the invention, x+y+z is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10. Each occurrence of A, B, C, D or E in a macrocycle or macrocycle precursor of the invention is independently selected. For example, a sequence represented by the formula [A]x, when x is 3, encompasses embodiments where the amino acids are not identical, e.g. Gln-Asp-Ala as well as embodiments where the amino acids are identical, e.g. Gln-Gln-Gln. This applies for any value of x, y, or z in the indicated ranges.
  • In some embodiments, the peptidomimetic macrocycle of the invention comprises a secondary structure which is an α-helix and R8 is —H, allowing intrahelical hydrogen bonding. In some embodiments, at least one of A, B, C, D or E is an α,α-disubstituted amino acid. In one example, B is an α,α-disubstituted amino acid. For instance, at least one of A, B, C, D or E is 2-aminoisobutyric acid. In other embodiments, at least one of A, B, C, D or E is
  • Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00028
  • In other embodiments, the length of the macrocycle-forming linker L as measured from a first Cα to a second Cα is selected to stabilize a desired secondary peptide structure, such as an α-helix formed by residues of the peptidomimetic macrocycle including, but not necessarily limited to, those between the first Cα to a second Cα.
  • Exemplary embodiments of the macrocycle-forming linker L are shown below.
  • Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00029
  • Preparation of Peptidomimetic Macrocycles
  • Peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention may be prepared by any of a variety of methods known in the art. For example, any of the residues indicated by “X” in Tables 1, 2, 3 or 4 may be substituted with a residue capable of forming a crosslinker with a second residue in the same molecule or a precursor of such a residue.
  • Various methods to effect formation of peptidomimetic macrocycles are known in the art. For example, the preparation of peptidomimetic macrocycles of Formula I is described in Schafmeister et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc. 122:5891-5892 (2000); Schafmeister & Verdine, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 122:5891 (2005); Walensky et al., Science 305:1466-1470 (2004); and U.S. Pat. No. 7,192,713. The α,α-disubstituted amino acids and amino acid precursors disclosed in the cited references may be employed in synthesis of the peptidomimetic macrocycle precursor polypeptides. Following incorporation of such amino acids into precursor polypeptides, the terminal olefins are reacted with a metathesis catalyst, leading to the formation of the peptidomimetic macrocycle.
  • In other embodiments, the peptidomimetic macrocyles of the invention are of Formula IV or IVa. Methods for the preparation of such macrocycles are described, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 7,202,332.
  • In some embodiments, the synthesis of these peptidomimetic macrocycles involves a multi-step process that features the synthesis of a peptidomimetic precursor containing an azide moiety and an alkyne moiety; followed by contacting the peptidomimetic precursor with a macrocyclization reagent to generate a triazole-linked peptidomimetic macrocycle. Macrocycles or macrocycle precursors are synthesized, for example, by solution phase or solid-phase methods, and can contain both naturally-occurring and non-naturally-occurring amino acids. See, for example, Hunt, “The Non-Protein Amino Acids” in Chemistry and Biochemistry of the Amino Acids, edited by G. C. Barrett, Chapman and Hall, 1985.
  • In some embodiments, an azide is linked to the α-carbon of a residue and an alkyne is attached to the α-carbon of another residue. In some embodiments, the azide moieties are azido-analogs of amino acids L-lysine, D-lysine, alpha-methyl-L-lysine, alpha-methyl-D-lysine, L-ornithine, D-ornithine, alpha-methyl-L-ornithine or alpha-methyl-D-ornithine. In another embodiment, the alkyne moiety is L-propargylglycine. In yet other embodiments, the alkyne moiety is an amino acid selected from the group consisting of L-propargylglycine, D-propargylglycine, (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-4-pentynoic acid, (R)-2-amino-2-methyl-4-pentynoic acid, (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-5-hexynoic acid, (R)-2-amino-2-methyl-5-hexynoic acid, (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-6-heptynoic acid, (R)-2-amino-2-methyl-6-heptynoic acid, (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-7-octynoic acid, (R)-2-amino-2-methyl-7-octynoic acid, (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-8-nonynoic acid and (R)-2-amino-2-methyl-8-nonynoic acid.
  • In some embodiments, the invention provides a method for synthesizing a peptidomimetic macrocycle, the method comprising the steps of contacting a peptidomimetic precursor of Formula V or Formula VI:
  • Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00030
  • with a macrocyclization reagent;
    wherein v, w, x, y, z, A, B, C, D, E, R1, R2, R7, R8, L1 and L2 are as defined for Formula (II); R12 is —H when the macrocyclization reagent is a Cu reagent and R12 is —H or alkyl when the macrocyclization reagent is a Ru reagent; and further wherein said contacting step results in a covalent linkage being formed between the alkyne and azide moiety in Formula III or Formula IV. For example, R12 may be methyl when the macrocyclization reagent is a Ru reagent.
  • In the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention, at least one of R1 and R2 is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroalkyl, or heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-. In some embodiments, both R1 and R2 are independently alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroalkyl, or heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-. In some embodiments, at least one of A, B, C, D or E is an α,α-disubstituted amino acid. In one example, B is an α,α-disubstituted amino acid. For instance, at least one of A, B, C, D or E is 2-aminoisobutyric acid.
  • For example, at least one of R1 and R2 is alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-. In another example, both R1 and R2 are independently alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-. In some embodiments, at least one of R1 and R2 is methyl. In other embodiments, R1 and R2 are methyl. The macrocyclization reagent may be a Cu reagent or a Ru reagent.
  • In some embodiments, the peptidomimetic precursor is purified prior to the contacting step. In other embodiments, the peptidomimetic macrocycle is purified after the contacting step. In still other embodiments, the peptidomimetic macrocycle is refolded after the contacting step. The method may be performed in solution, or, alternatively, the method may be performed on a solid support.
  • Also envisioned herein is performing the method of the invention in the presence of a target macromolecule that binds to the peptidomimetic precursor or peptidomimetic macrocycle under conditions that favor said binding. In some embodiments, the method is performed in the presence of a target macromolecule that binds preferentially to the peptidomimetic precursor or peptidomimetic macrocycle under conditions that favor said binding. The method may also be applied to synthesize a library of peptidomimetic macrocycles.
  • In some embodiments, the alkyne moiety of the peptidomimetic precursor of Formula V or Formula VI is a sidechain of an amino acid selected from the group consisting of L-propargylglycine, D-propargylglycine, (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-4-pentynoic acid, (R)-2-amino-2-methyl-4-pentynoic acid, (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-5-hexynoic acid, (R)-2-amino-2-methyl-5-hexynoic acid, (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-6-heptynoic acid, (R)-2-amino-2-methyl-6-heptynoic acid, (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-7-octynoic acid, (R)-2-amino-2-methyl-7-octynoic acid, (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-8-nonynoic acid, and (R)-2-amino-2-methyl-8-nonynoic acid. In other embodiments, the azide moiety of the peptidomimetic precursor of Formula V or Formula VI is a sidechain of an amino acid selected from the group consisting of ε-azido-L-lysine, ε-azido-D-lysine, □ε-azido-α-methyl-L-lysine, ε-azido-α-methyl-D-lysine, δ-azido-α-methyl-L-ornithine, and δ-azido-α-methyl-D-ornithine.
  • In some embodiments, x+y+z is 3, and and A, B and C are independently natural or non-natural amino acids. In other embodiments, x+y+z is 6, and and A, B and C are independently natural or non-natural amino acids.
  • In some embodiments of peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention, [D]v and/or [E]w comprise additional peptidomimetic macrocycles or macrocyclic structures. For example, [D]v may have the formula:
  • Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00031
  • wherein each A, C, D′, and E′ is independently a natural or non-natural amino acid;
  • B is a natural or non-natural amino acid, amino acid analog,
  • Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00032
  • [—NH-L3-CO-], [—NH-L3-SO2-], or [—NH-L3-];
  • R1 and R2 are independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroalkyl, or heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-, or part of a cyclic structure with an E residue;
  • R3 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloaryl, or heterocycloaryl, optionally substituted with R5;
  • L1 and L2 are independently alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, heteroalkylene, cycloalkylene, heterocycloalkylene, cycloarylene, heterocycloarylene, or [—R4—K—R4-]n, each being optionally substituted with R5;
  • each R4 is alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, heteroalkylene, cycloalkylene, heterocycloalkylene, arylene, or heteroarylene;
  • each K is O, S, SO, SO2, CO, CO2, or CONR3;
  • each R5 is independently halogen, alkyl, —OR6, —N(R6)2, —SR6, —SORE, —SO2R6, —CO2R6, a fluorescent moiety, a radioisotope or a therapeutic agent;
  • each R6 is independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, a fluorescent moiety, a radioisotope or a therapeutic agent;
  • R7 is —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, cycloaryl, or heterocycloaryl, optionally substituted with R5;
  • v is an integer from 1-1000;
  • w is an integer from 1-1000; and
  • x is an integer from 0-10.
  • In another embodiment, [E]w has the formula:
  • Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00033
  • wherein the substituents are as defined in the preceding paragraph.
  • In some embodiments, the contacting step is performed in a solvent selected from the group consisting of protic solvent, aqueous solvent, organic solvent, and mixtures thereof. For example, the solvent may be chosen from the group consisting of H2O, THF, THF/H2O, tBuOH/H2O, DMF, DIPEA, CH3CN or CH2Cl2, ClCH2CH2Cl or a mixture thereof. The solvent may be a solvent which favors helix formation.
  • Alternative but equivalent protecting groups, leaving groups or reagents are substituted, and certain of the synthetic steps are performed in alternative sequences or orders to produce the desired compounds. Synthetic chemistry transformations and protecting group methodologies (protection and deprotection) useful in synthesizing the compounds described herein include, for example, those such as described in Larock, Comprehensive Organic Transformations, VCH Publishers (1989); Greene and Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 2d. Ed., John Wiley and Sons (1991); Fieser and Fieser, Fieser and Fieser's Reagents for Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons (1994); and Paquette, ed., Encyclopedia of Reagents for Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons (1995), and subsequent editions thereof.
  • The peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention are made, for example, by chemical synthesis methods, such as described in Fields et al., Chapter 3 in Synthetic Peptides: A User's Guide, ed. Grant, W. H. Freeman & Co., New York, N. Y., 1992, p. 77. Hence, for example, peptides are synthesized using the automated Merrifield techniques of solid phase synthesis with the amine protected by either tBoc or Fmoc chemistry using side chain protected amino acids on, for example, an automated peptide synthesizer (e.g., Applied Biosystems (Foster City, Calif.), Model 430A, 431, or 433).
  • One manner of producing the peptidomimetic precursors and peptidomimetic macrocycles described herein uses solid phase peptide synthesis (SPPS). The C-terminal amino acid is attached to a cross-linked polystyrene resin via an acid labile bond with a linker molecule. This resin is insoluble in the solvents used for synthesis, making it relatively simple and fast to wash away excess reagents and by-products. The N-terminus is protected with the Fmoc group, which is stable in acid, but removable by base. Side chain functional groups are protected as necessary with base stable, acid labile groups.
  • Longer peptidomimetic precursors are produced, for example, by conjoining individual synthetic peptides using native chemical ligation. Alternatively, the longer synthetic peptides are biosynthesized by well known recombinant DNA and protein expression techniques. Such techniques are provided in well-known standard manuals with detailed protocols. To construct a gene encoding a peptidomimetic precursor of this invention, the amino acid sequence is reverse translated to obtain a nucleic acid sequence encoding the amino acid sequence, preferably with codons that are optimum for the organism in which the gene is to be expressed. Next, a synthetic gene is made, typically by synthesizing oligonucleotides which encode the peptide and any regulatory elements, if necessary. The synthetic gene is inserted in a suitable cloning vector and transfected into a host cell. The peptide is then expressed under suitable conditions appropriate for the selected expression system and host. The peptide is purified and characterized by standard methods.
  • The peptidomimetic precursors are made, for example, in a high-throughput, combinatorial fashion using, for example, a high-throughput polychannel combinatorial synthesizer (e.g., Thuramed TETRAS multichannel peptide synthesizer from CreoSalus, Louisville, Ky. or Model Apex 396 multichannel peptide synthesizer from AAPPTEC, Inc., Louisville, Ky.).
  • The following synthetic schemes are provided solely to illustrate the present invention and are not intended to limit the scope of the invention, as described herein. To simplify the drawings, the illustrative schemes depict azido amino acid analogs ε-azido-α-methyl-L-lysine and ε-azido-α-methyl-D-lysine, and alkyne amino acid analogs L-propargylglycine, (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-4-pentynoic acid, and (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-6-heptynoic acid. Thus, in the following synthetic schemes, each R1, R2, R7 and R8 is —H; each L1 is —(CH2)4—; and each L2 is —(CH2)—. However, as noted throughout the detailed description above, many other amino acid analogs can be employed in which R1, R2, R7, R8, L1 and L2 can be independently selected from the various structures disclosed herein.
  • Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00034
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00035
  • Synthetic Scheme 1 describes the preparation of several compounds of the invention.
  • Ni(II) complexes of Schiff bases derived from the chiral auxiliary (S)-2-[N—(N′-benzylprolyl)amino]benzophenone (BPB) and amino acids such as glycine or alanine are prepared as described in Belokon et al. (1998), Tetrahedron Asymm. 9:4249-4252. The resulting complexes are subsequently reacted with alkylating reagents comprising an azido or alkynyl moiety to yield enantiomerically enriched compounds of the invention. If desired, the resulting compounds can be protected for use in peptide synthesis.
  • Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00036
  • In the general method for the synthesis of peptidomimetic macrocycles shown in Synthetic Scheme 2, the peptidomimetic precursor contains an azide moiety and an alkyne moiety and is synthesized by solution-phase or solid-phase peptide synthesis (SPPS) using the commercially available amino acid N-α-Fmoc-L-propargylglycine and the N-α-Fmoc-protected forms of the amino acids (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-4-pentynoic acid, (S)-2-amino-6-heptynoic acid, (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-6-heptynoic acid, N-methyl-ε-azido-L-lysine, and N-methyl-ε-azido-D-lysine. The peptidomimetic precursor is then deprotected and cleaved from the solid-phase resin by standard conditions (e.g., strong acid such as 95% TFA). The peptidomimetic precursor is reacted as a crude mixture or is purified prior to reaction with a macrocyclization reagent such as a Cu(I) in organic or aqueous solutions (Rostovtsev et al. (2002), Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. 41:2596-2599; Tornoe et al. (2002), J. Org. Chem. 67:3057-3064; Deiters et al. (2003), J. Am. Chem. Soc. 125:11782-11783; Punna et al. (2005), Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. 44:2215-2220). In one embodiment, the triazole forming reaction is performed under conditions that favor α-helix formation. In one embodiment, the macrocyclization step is performed in a solvent chosen from the group consisting of H2O, THF, CH3CN, DMF, DIPEA, tBuOH or a mixture thereof. In another embodiment, the macrocyclization step is performed in DMF. In some embodiments, the macrocyclization step is performed in a buffered aqueous or partially aqueous solvent.
  • Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00037
  • In the general method for the synthesis of peptidomimetic macrocycles shown in Synthetic Scheme 3, the peptidomimetic precursor contains an azide moiety and an alkyne moiety and is synthesized by solid-phase peptide synthesis (SPPS) using the commercially available amino acid N-α-Fmoc-L-propargylglycine and the N-α-Fmoc-protected forms of the amino acids (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-4-pentynoic acid, (S)-2-amino-6-heptynoic acid, (5)-2-amino-2-methyl-6-heptynoic acid, N-methyl-ε-azido-L-lysine, and N-methyl-ε-azido-D-lysine. The peptidomimetic precursor is reacted with a macrocyclization reagent such as a Cu(I) reagent on the resin as a crude mixture (Rostovtsev et al. (2002), Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. 41:2596-2599; Tornoe et al. (2002), J. Org. Chem. 67:3057-3064; Deiters et al. (2003), J. Am. Chem. Soc. 125:11782-11783; Punna et al. (2005), Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. 44:2215-2220). The resultant triazole-containing peptidomimetic macrocycle is then deprotected and cleaved from the solid-phase resin by standard conditions (e.g., strong acid such as 95% TFA). In some embodiments, the macrocyclization step is performed in a solvent chosen from the group consisting of CH2Cl2, ClCH2CH2Cl, DMF, THF, NMP, DIPEA, 2,6-lutidine, pyridine, DMSO, H2O or a mixture thereof. In some embodiments, the macrocyclization step is performed in a buffered aqueous or partially aqueous solvent.
  • Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00038
  • In the general method for the synthesis of peptidomimetic macrocycles shown in Synthetic Scheme 4, the peptidomimetic precursor contains an azide moiety and an alkyne moiety and is synthesized by solution-phase or solid-phase peptide synthesis (SPPS) using the commercially available amino acid N-α-Fmoc-L-propargylglycine and the N-α-Fmoc-protected forms of the amino acids (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-4-pentynoic acid, (S)-2-amino-6-heptynoic acid, (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-6-heptynoic acid, N-methyl-ε-azido-L-lysine, and N-methyl-ε-azido-D-lysine. The peptidomimetic precursor is then deprotected and cleaved from the solid-phase resin by standard conditions (e.g., strong acid such as 95% TFA). The peptidomimetic precursor is reacted as a crude mixture or is purified prior to reaction with a macrocyclization reagent such as a Ru(II) reagents, for example Cp*RuCl(PPh3)2 or [Cp*RuCl]4 (Rasmussen et al. (2007), Org. Lett. 9:5337-5339; Zhang et al. (2005), J. Am. Chem. Soc. 127:15998-15999). In some embodiments, the macrocyclization step is performed in a solvent chosen from the group consisting of DMF, CH3CN and THF.
  • Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00039
  • In the general method for the synthesis of peptidomimetic macrocycles shown in Synthetic Scheme 5, the peptidomimetic precursor contains an azide moiety and an alkyne moiety and is synthesized by solid-phase peptide synthesis (SPPS) using the commercially available amino acidN-α-Fmoc-L-propargylglycine and the N-α-Fmoc-protected forms of the amino acids (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-4-pentynoic acid, (S)-2-amino-6-heptynoic acid, (S)-2-amino-2-methyl-6-heptynoic acid, N-methyl-ε-azido-L-lysine, and N-methyl-ε-azido-D-lysine. The peptidomimetic precursor is reacted with a macrocyclization reagent such as a Ru(II) reagent on the resin as a crude mixture. For example, the reagent can be Cp*RuCl(PPh3)2 or [Cp*RuCl]4 (Rasmussen et al. (2007), Org. Lett. 9:5337-5339; Zhang et al. (2005), J. Am. Chem. Soc. 127:15998-15999). In some embodiments, the macrocyclization step is performed in a solvent chosen from the group consisting of CH2Cl2, ClCH2CH2Cl, CH3CN, DMF, and THF.
  • Several exemplary peptidomimetic macrocycles are shown in Table 5 (SEQ ID NOS 77-88, respectively, in order of appearance). “Nle” represents norleucine and replaces a methionine residue. It is envisioned that similar linkers are used to synthesize peptidomimetic macrocycles based on the polypeptide sequences disclosed in Table 1 through Table 4.
  • TABLE 5
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00040
    MW = 2464
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00041
    MW = 2464
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00042
    MW = 2464
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00043
    MW = 2464
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00044
    MW = 2478
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00045
    MW = 2478
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00046
    MW = 2478
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00047
    MW = 2478
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00048
    MW = 2492
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00049
    MW = 2492
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00050
    MW = 2492
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00051
    MW = 2492

    Table 5 shows exemplary peptidommimetic macrocycles of the invention. “Nle” represents norleucine.
  • The present invention contemplates the use of non-naturally-occurring amino acids and amino acid analogs in the synthesis of the peptidomimetic macrocycles described herein. Any amino acid or amino acid analog amenable to the synthetic methods employed for the synthesis of stable triazole containing peptidomimetic macrocycles can be used in the present invention. For example, L-propargylglycine is contemplated as a useful amino acid in the present invention. However, other alkyne-containing amino acids that contain a different amino acid side chain are also useful in the invention. For example, L-propargylglycine contains one methylene unit between the α-carbon of the amino acid and the alkyne of the amino acid side chain. The invention also contemplates the use of amino acids with multiple methylene units between the α-carbon and the alkyne. Also, the azido-analogs of amino acids L-lysine, D-lysine, alpha-methyl-L-lysine, and alpha-methyl-D-lysine are contemplated as useful amino acids in the present invention. However, other terminal azide amino acids that contain a different amino acid side chain are also useful in the invention. For example, the azido-analog of L-lysine contains four methylene units between the α-carbon of the amino acid and the terminal azide of the amino acid side chain. The invention also contemplates the use of amino acids with fewer than or greater than four methylene units between the α-carbon and the terminal azide. Table 6 shows some amino acids useful in the preparation of peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention.
  • TABLE 6
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00052
      N-α-Fmoc-L-propargyl glycine
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00053
      N-α-Fmoc-D-propargyl glycine
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00054
      N-α-Fmoc-(S)-2-amino- 2-methyl-4-pentynoic acid
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00055
      N-α-Fmoc-(R)-2-amino- 2-methyl-4-pentynoic acid
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00056
      N-α-Fmoc-(S)-2-amino- 2-methyl-5-hexynoic acid
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00057
      N-α-Fmoc-(R)-2-amino- 2-methyl-5-hexynoic acid
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00058
      N-α-Fmoc-(S)-2-amino- 2-methyl-6-heptynoic acid
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00059
      N-α-Fmoc-(R)-2-amino- 2-methyl-6-heptynoic acid
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00060
      N-α-Fmoc-(S)-2-amino- 2-methyl-7-octynoic acid
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00061
      N-α-Fmoc-(S)-2-amino- 2-methyl-7-octynoic acid
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00062
      N-α-Fmoc-(S)-2-amino- 2-methyl-8-nonynoic acid
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00063
      N-α-Fmoc-(R)-2-amino- 2-methyl-8-nonynoic acid
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00064
      N-α-Fmoc-ε-azido- L-lysine
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00065
      N-α-Fmoc-ε-azido- D-lysine
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00066
      N-α-Fmoc-ε-azido- α-methyl-L-lysine
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00067
      N-α-Fmoc-ε-azido- α-methyl-D-lysine
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00068
      N-α-Fmoc-δ-azido- L-ornithine
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00069
      N-α-Fmoc-δ-azido- D-ornithine
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00070
      N-α-Fmoc-ε-azido- α-methyl-L-ornithine
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00071
      N-α-Fmoc-ε-azido- α-methyl-D-ornithine

    Table 6 shows exemplary amino acids useful in the preparation of peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention.
  • In some embodiments the amino acids and amino acid analogs are of the D-configuration. In other embodiments they are of the L-configuration. In some embodiments, some of the amino acids and amino acid analogs contained in the peptidomimetic are of the D-configuration while some of the amino acids and amino acid analogs are of the L-configuration. In some embodiments the amino acid analogs are α,α-disubstituted, such as α-methyl-L-propargylglycine, α-methyl-D-propargylglycine, ε-azido-alpha-methyl-L-lysine, and ε-azido-alpha-methyl-D-lysine. In some embodiments the amino acid analogs are N-alkylated, e.g., N-methyl-L-propargylglycine, N-methyl-D-propargylglycine, N-methyl-ε-azido-L-lysine, and N-methyl-ε-azido-D-lysine.
  • In some embodiments, the —NH moiety of the amino acid is protected using a protecting group, including without limitation -Fmoc and -Boc. In other embodiments, the amino acid is not protected prior to synthesis of the peptidomimetic macrocycle.
  • In other embodiments, peptidomimetic macrocycles of Formula III are synthesized. The following synthetic schemes describe the preparation of such compounds. To simplify the drawings, the illustrative schemes depict amino acid analogs derived from L- or D-cysteine, in which L1 and L3 are both —(CH2)—. However, as noted throughout the detailed description above, many other amino acid analogs can be employed in which L1 and L3 can be independently selected from the various structures disclosed herein. The symbols “[AA]m”, “[AA]m”, “[AA]o” represent a sequence of amide bond-linked moieties such as natural or unnatural amino acids. As described previously, each occurrence of “AA” is independent of any other occurrence of “AA”, and a formula such as “[AA]m” encompasses, for example, sequences of non-identical amino acids as well as sequences of identical amino acids.
  • Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00072
  • In Scheme 6, the peptidomimetic precursor contains two —SH moieties and is synthesized by solid-phase peptide synthesis (SPPS) using commercially available N-α-Fmoc amino acids such as N-α-Fmoc-S-trityl-L-cysteine or N-α-Fmoc-S-trityl-D-cysteine. Alpha-methylated versions of D-cysteine or L-cysteine are generated by known methods (Seebach et al. (1996), Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl. 35:2708-2748, and references therein) and then converted to the appropriately protected N-α-Fmoc-S-trityl monomers by known methods (“Bioorganic Chemistry: Peptides and Proteins”, Oxford University Press, New York: 1998, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference). The precursor peptidomimetic is then deprotected and cleaved from the solid-phase resin by standard conditions (e.g., strong acid such as 95% TFA). The precursor peptidomimetic is reacted as a crude mixture or is purified prior to reaction with X-L2-Y in organic or aqueous solutions. In some embodiments the alkylation reaction is performed under dilute conditions (i.e. 0.15 mmol/L) to favor macrocyclization and to avoid polymerization. In some embodiments, the alkylation reaction is performed in organic solutions such as liquid NH3 (Mosberg et al. (1985), J. Am. Chem. Soc. 107:2986-2987; Szewczuk et al. (1992), Int. J. Peptide Protein Res. 40:233-242), NH3/MeOH, or NH3/DMF (Or et al. (1991), J. Org. Chem. 56:3146-3149). In other embodiments, the alkylation is performed in an aqueous solution such as 6M guanidinium HCL, pH 8 (Brunel et al. (2005), Chem. Commun. (20):2552-2554). In other embodiments, the solvent used for the alkylation reaction is DMF or dichloroethane.
  • Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00073
  • In Scheme 7, the precursor peptidomimetic contains two or more —SH moieties, of which two are specially protected to allow their selective deprotection and subsequent alkylation for macrocycle formation. The precursor peptidomimetic is synthesized by solid-phase peptide synthesis (SPPS) using commercially available N-α-Fmoc amino acids such as N-α-Fmoc-S-p-methoxytrityl-L-cysteine or N-α-Fmoc-S-p-methoxytrityl-D-cysteine. Alpha-methylated versions of D-cysteine or L-cysteine are generated by known methods (Seebach et al. (1996), Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl. 35:2708-2748, and references therein) and then converted to the appropriately protected N-α-Fmoc-S-p-methoxytrityl monomers by known methods (Bioorganic Chemistry: Peptides and Proteins, Oxford University Press, New York: 1998, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference). The Mmt protecting groups of the peptidomimetic precursor are then selectively cleaved by standard conditions (e.g., mild acid such as 1% TFA in DCM). The precursor peptidomimetic is then reacted on the resin with X-L2-Y in an organic solution. For example, the reaction takes place in the presence of a hindered base such as diisopropylethylamine. In some embodiments, the alkylation reaction is performed in organic solutions such as liquid NH3 (Mosberg et al. (1985), J. Am. Chem. Soc. 107:2986-2987; Szewczuk et al. (1992), Int. J. Peptide Protein Res. 40:233-242), NH3/MeOH or NH3/DMF (Or et al. (1991), J. Org. Chem. 56:3146-3149). In other embodiments, the alkylation reaction is performed in DMF or dichloroethane. The peptidomimetic macrocycle is then deprotected and cleaved from the solid-phase resin by standard conditions (e.g., strong acid such as 95% TFA).
  • Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00074
  • In Scheme 8, the peptidomimetic precursor contains two or more —SH moieties, of which two are specially protected to allow their selective deprotection and subsequent alkylation for macrocycle formation. The peptidomimetic precursor is synthesized by solid-phase peptide synthesis (SPPS) using commercially available N-α-Fmoc amino acids such as N-α-Fmoc-S-p-methoxytrityl-L-cysteine, N-α-Fmoc-S-p-methoxytrityl-D-cysteine, N-α-Fmoc-S—S-t-butyl-L-cysteine, and N-α-Fmoc-S—S-t-butyl-D-cysteine. Alpha-methylated versions of D-cysteine or L-cysteine are generated by known methods (Seebach et al. (1996), Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl. 35:2708-2748, and references therein) and then converted to the appropriately protected N-α-Fmoc-S-p-methoxytrityl or N-α-Fmoc-S—S-t-butyl monomers by known methods (Bioorganic Chemistry: Peptides and Proteins, Oxford University Press, New York: 1998, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference). The S—S-tButyl protecting group of the peptidomimetic precursor is selectively cleaved by known conditions (e.g., 20% 2-mercaptoethanol in DMF, reference: Galande et al. (2005), J. Comb. Chem. 7:174-177). The precursor peptidomimetic is then reacted on the resin with a molar excess of X-L2-Y in an organic solution. For example, the reaction takes place in the presence of a hindered base such as diisopropylethylamine. The Mmt protecting group of the peptidomimetic precursor is then selectively cleaved by standard conditions (e.g., mild acid such as 1% TFA in DCM). The peptidomimetic precursor is then cyclized on the resin by treatment with a hindered base in organic solutions. In some embodiments, the alkylation reaction is performed in organic solutions such as NH3/MeOH or NH3/DMF (Or et al. (1991), J. Org. Chem. 56:3146-3149). The peptidomimetic macrocycle is then deprotected and cleaved from the solid-phase resin by standard conditions (e.g., strong acid such as 95% TFA).
  • Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00075
  • In Scheme 9, the peptidomimetic precursor contains two L-cysteine moieties. The peptidomimetic precursor is synthesized by known biological expression systems in living cells or by known in vitro, cell-free, expression methods. The precursor peptidomimetic is reacted as a crude mixture or is purified prior to reaction with X-L2-Y in organic or aqueous solutions. In some embodiments the alkylation reaction is performed under dilute conditions (i.e. 0.15 mmol/L) to favor macrocyclization and to avoid polymerization. In some embodiments, the alkylation reaction is performed in organic solutions such as liquid NH3 (Mosberg et al. (1985), J. Am. Chem. Soc. 107:2986-2987; Szewczuk et al. (1992), Int. J. Peptide Protein Res. 40:233-242), NH3/MeOH, or NH3/DMF (Or et al. (1991), J. Org. Chem. 56:3146-3149). In other embodiments, the alkylation is performed in an aqueous solution such as 6M guanidinium HCL, pH 8 (Brunel et al. (2005), Chem. Commun. (20):2552-2554). In other embodiments, the alkylation is performed in DMF or dichloroethane. In another embodiment, the alkylation is performed in non-denaturing aqueous solutions, and in yet another embodiment the alkylation is performed under conditions that favor α-helical structure formation. In yet another embodiment, the alkylation is performed under conditions that favor the binding of the precursor peptidomimetic to another protein, so as to induce the formation of the bound α-helical conformation during the alkylation.
  • Various embodiments for X and Y are envisioned which are suitable for reacting with thiol groups. In general, each X or Y is independently be selected from the general category shown in Table 5. For example, X and Y are halides such as —Cl, —Br or —I. Any of the macrocycle-forming linkers described herein may be used in any combination with any of the sequences shown in Tables 1-4 and also with any of the R— substituents indicated herein.
  • TABLE 7
    Examples of Reactive Groups Capable
    of Reacting with Thiol Groups and Resulting
    Linkages
    (1) X or Y (2) Resulting
    Covalent Linkage
    (3) acrylamide (4) Thioether
    (5) halide (e.g. (6)Thioether
    alkyl or aryl halide)
    (7) sulfonate (8) Thioether
    (9) aziridine (10) Thioether
    (11) epoxide (12) Thioether
    (13) haloacetamide (14) Thioether
    (15) maleimide (16) Thioether
    (17) sulfonateester (18) Thioether
  • Table 8 shows exemplary macrocycles of the invention (SEQ ID NOS 89-94, respectively, in order of appearance). “NL” represents norleucine and replaces a methionine residue. It is envisioned that similar linkers are used to synthesize peptidomimetic macrocycles based on the polypeptide sequences disclosed in Table 1 through Table 4.
  • TABLE 8
    Examples of Peptidomimetic Macrocycles of the Invention
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00076
    MW = 2477
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00077
    MW = 2463
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00078
    MW = 2525
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00079
    MW = 2531
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00080
    MW = 2475
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00081
    MW = 2475

    For the examples shown in this table, “NL” represents norleucine.
  • The present invention contemplates the use of both naturally-occurring and non-naturally-occurring amino acids and amino acid analogs in the synthesis of the peptidomimetic macrocycles of Formula (III). Any amino acid or amino acid analog amenable to the synthetic methods employed for the synthesis of stable bis-sulfhydryl containing peptidomimetic macrocycles can be used in the present invention. For example, cysteine is contemplated as a useful amino acid in the present invention. However, sulfur containing amino acids other than cysteine that contain a different amino acid side chain are also useful. For example, cysteine contains one methylene unit between the α-carbon of the amino acid and the terminal —SH of the amino acid side chain. The invention also contemplates the use of amino acids with multiple methylene units between the α-carbon and the terminal —SH. Non-limiting examples include α-methyl-L-homocysteine and α-methyl-D-homocysteine. In some embodiments the amino acids and amino acid analogs are of the D-configuration. In other embodiments they are of the L-configuration. In some embodiments, some of the amino acids and amino acid analogs contained in the peptidomimetic are of the D-configuration while some of the amino acids and amino acid analogs are of the L-configuration. In some embodiments the amino acid analogs are α,α-disubstituted, such as α-methyl-L-cysteine and α-methyl-D-cysteine.
  • The invention includes macrocycles in which macrocycle-forming linkers are used to link two or more —SH moieties in the peptidomimetic precursors to form the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention. As described above, the macrocycle-forming linkers impart conformational rigidity, increased metabolic stability and/or increased cell penetrability. Furthermore, in some embodiments, the macrocycle-forming linkages stabilize the α-helical secondary structure of the peptidomimetic macrocyles. The macrocycle-forming linkers are of the formula X-L2-Y, wherein both X and Y are the same or different moieties, as defined above. Both X and Y have the chemical characteristics that allow one macrocycle-forming linker -L2- to bis alkylate the bis-sulfhydryl containing peptidomimetic precursor. As defined above, the linker -L2- includes alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, heteroalkylene, cycloalkylene, heterocycloalkylene, cycloarylene, or heterocycloarylene, or —R4—K—R4—, all of which can be optionally substituted with an R5 group, as defined above. Furthermore, one to three carbon atoms within the macrocycle-forming linkers -L2-, other than the carbons attached to the —SH of the sulfhydryl containing amino acid, are optionally substituted with a heteroatom such as N, S or O.
  • The L2 component of the macrocycle-forming linker X-L2-Y may be varied in length depending on, among other things, the distance between the positions of the two amino acid analogs used to form the peptidomimetic macrocycle. Furthermore, as the lengths of L1 and/or L3 components of the macrocycle-forming linker are varied, the length of L2 can also be varied in order to create a linker of appropriate overall length for forming a stable peptidomimetic macrocycle. For example, if the amino acid analogs used are varied by adding an additional methylene unit to each of L1 and L3, the length of L2 are decreased in length by the equivalent of approximately two methylene units to compensate for the increased lengths of L1 and L3.
  • In some embodiments, L2 is an alkylene group of the formula —(CH2)—n, where n is an integer between about 1 and about 15. For example, n is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10. In other embodiments, L2 is an alkenylene group. In still other embodiments, L2 is an aryl group.
  • Table 9 shows additional embodiments of X-L2-Y groups.
  • TABLE 9
    Exemplary X—L2—Y groups of the invention.
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00082
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00083
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00084
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00085
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00086
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00087
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00088
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00089
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00090
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00091
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00092
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00093
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00094
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00095
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00096
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00097
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00098
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00099
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00100
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00101
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00102
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00103
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00104
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00105
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00106
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00107
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00108
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00109
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00110
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00111
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00112
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00113
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00114
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00115
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00116
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00117
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00118
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00119
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00120
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00121
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00122
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00123
    Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00124

    Each X and Y in this table, is, for example, independently Cl—, Br— or I—.
  • Additional methods of forming peptidomimetic macrocycles which are envisioned as suitable to perform the present invention include those disclosed by Mustapa, M. Firouz Mohd et al., J. Org. Chem (2003), 68, pp. 8193-8198; Yang, Bin et al. Bioorg Med. Chem. Lett. (2004), 14, pp. 1403-1406; U.S. Pat. No. 5,364,851; U.S. Pat. No. 5,446,128; U.S. Pat. No. 5,824,483; U.S. Pat. No. 6,713,280; and U.S. Pat. No. 7,202,332. In such embodiments, aminoacid precursors are used containing an additional substituent R— at the alpha position. Such aminoacids are incorporated into the macrocycle precursor at the desired positions, which may be at the positions where the crosslinker is substituted or, alternatively, elsewhere in the sequence of the macrocycle precursor. Cyclization of the precursor is then effected according to the indicated method.
  • Assays
  • The properties of the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention are assayed, for example, by using the methods described below.
  • Assay to Determine α-Helicity.
  • In solution, the secondary structure of polypeptides with α-helical domains will reach a dynamic equilibrium between random coil structures and α-helical structures, often expressed as a “percent helicity”. Thus, for example, unmodified pro-apoptotic BH3 domains are predominantly random coils in solution, with α-helical content usually under 25%. Peptidomimetic macrocycles with optimized linkers, on the other hand, possess, for example, an alpha-helicity that is at least two-fold greater than that of a corresponding uncrosslinked polypeptide. In some embodiments, macrocycles of the invention will possess an alpha-helicity of greater than 50%. To assay the helicity of peptidomimetic macrocyles of the invention, such as BH3 domain-based macrocycles, the compounds are dissolved in an aqueous solution (e.g. 50 mM potassium phosphate solution at pH 7, or distilled H2O, to concentrations of 25-50 μM). Circular dichroism (CD) spectra are obtained on a spectropolarimeter (e.g., Jasco J-710) using standard measurement parameters (e.g. temperature, 20° C.; wavelength, 190-260 nm; step resolution, 0.5 nm; speed, 20 nm/sec; accumulations, 10; response, 1 sec; bandwidth, 1 nm; path length, 0.1 cm). The α-helical content of each peptide is calculated by dividing the mean residue ellipticity (e.g. [Φ]222 obs) by the reported value for a model helical decapeptide (Yang et al. (1986), Methods Enzymol. 130:208)).
  • Assay to Determine Melting Temperature (Tm).
  • A peptidomimetic macrocycle of the invention comprising a secondary structure such as an α-helix exhibits, for example, a higher melting temperature than a corresponding uncrosslinked polypeptide. Typically peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention exhibit Tm of >60° C. representing a highly stable structure in aqueous solutions. To assay the effect of macrocycle formation on meltine temperature, peptidomimetic macrocycles or unmodified peptides are dissolved in distilled H2O (e.g. at a final concentration of 50 μM) and the Tm is determined by measuring the change in ellipticity over a temperature range (e.g. 4 to 95° C.) on a spectropolarimeter (e.g., Jasco J-710) using standard parameters (e.g. wavelength 222 nm; step resolution, 0.5 nm; speed, 20 nm/sec; accumulations, 10; response, 1 sec; bandwidth, 1 nm; temperature increase rate: 1° C./min; path length, 0.1 cm).
  • Protease Resistance Assay.
  • The amide bond of the peptide backbone is susceptible to hydrolysis by proteases, thereby rendering peptidic compounds vulnerable to rapid degradation in vivo. Peptide helix formation, however, typically buries the amide backbone and therefore may shield it from proteolytic cleavage. The peptidomimetic macrocycles of the present invention may be subjected to in vitro trypsin proteolysis to assess for any change in degradation rate compared to a corresponding uncrosslinked polypeptide. For example, the peptidomimetic macrocycle and a corresponding uncrosslinked polypeptide are incubated with trypsin agarose and the reactions quenched at various time points by centrifugation and subsequent HPLC injection to quantitate the residual substrate by ultraviolet absorption at 280 nm. Briefly, the peptidomimetic macrocycle and peptidomimetic precursor (5 mcg) are incubated with trypsin agarose (Pierce) (S/E˜125) for 0, 10, 20, 90, and 180 minutes. Reactions are quenched by tabletop centrifugation at high speed; remaining substrate in the isolated supernatant is quantified by HPLC-based peak detection at 280 nm. The proteolytic reaction displays first order kinetics and the rate constant, k, is determined from a plot of ln [S] versus time (k=−1×slope).
  • Ex Vivo Stability Assay.
  • Peptidomimetic macrocycles with optimized linkers possess, for example, an ex vivo half-life that is at least two-fold greater than that of a corresponding uncrosslinked polypeptide, and possess an ex vivo half-life of 12 hours or more. For ex vivo serum stability studies, a variety of assays may be used. For example, a peptidomimetic macrocycle and/or a corresponding uncrosslinked polypeptide (2 mcg) are each incubated with fresh mouse, rat and/or human serum (e.g. 1-2 mL) at 37° C. for 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, and 24 hours. Samples of differing macrocycle concentration may be prepared by serial dilution with serum. To determine the level of intact compound, the following procedure may be used: The samples are extracted by transferring 100 μl of sera to 2 ml centrifuge tubes followed by the addition of 10 μL of 50% formic acid and 500 μL acetonitrile and centrifugation at 14,000 RPM for 10 min at 4±2° C. The supernatants are then transferred to fresh 2 ml tubes and evaporated on Turbovap under N2<10 psi, 37° C. The samples are reconstituted in 100 μL of 50:50 acetonitrile:water and submitted to LC-MS/MS analysis. Equivalent or similar procedures for testing ex vivo stability are known and may be used to determine stability of macrocycles in serum.
  • In Vitro Binding Assays.
  • To assess the binding and affinity of peptidomimetic macrocycles and peptidomimetic precursors to acceptor proteins, a fluorescence polarization assay (FPA) issued, for example. The FPA technique measures the molecular orientation and mobility using polarized light and fluorescent tracer. When excited with polarized light, fluorescent tracers (e.g., FITC) attached to molecules with high apparent molecular weights (e.g. FITC-labeled peptides bound to a large protein) emit higher levels of polarized fluorescence due to their slower rates of rotation as compared to fluorescent tracers attached to smaller molecules (e.g. FITC-labeled peptides that are free in solution).
  • For example, fluoresceinated peptidomimetic macrocycles (25 nM) are incubated with the acceptor protein (25-1000 nM) in binding buffer (140 mM NaCl, 50 mM Tris-HCL, pH 7.4) for 30 minutes at room temperature. Binding activity is measured, for example, by fluorescence polarization on a luminescence spectrophotometer (e.g. Perkin-Elmer LS50B). Kd values may be determined by nonlinear regression analysis using, for example, Graphpad Prism software (GraphPad Software, Inc., San Diego, Calif.). A peptidomimetic macrocycle of the invention shows, in some instances, similar or lower Kd than a corresponding uncrosslinked polypeptide.
  • Acceptor proteins for BH3-peptides such as BCL-2, BCL-XL, BAX or MCL1 may, for example, be used in this assay. Additional methods to perform such assays are described in the Example section below.
  • In Vitro Displacement Assays to Characterize Antagonists of Peptide-Protein Interactions.
  • To assess the binding and affinity of compounds that antagonize the interaction between a peptide (e.g. a BH3 peptide or a p53 peptide) and an acceptor protein, a fluorescence polarization assay (FPA) utilizing a fluoresceinated peptidomimetic macrocycle derived from a peptidomimetic precursor sequence is used, for example. The FPA technique measures the molecular orientation and mobility using polarized light and fluorescent tracer. When excited with polarized light, fluorescent tracers (e.g., FITC) attached to molecules with high apparent molecular weights (e.g. FITC-labeled peptides bound to a large protein) emit higher levels of polarized fluorescence due to their slower rates of rotation as compared to fluorescent tracers attached to smaller molecules (e.g. FITC-labeled peptides that are free in solution). A compound that antagonizes the interaction between the fluoresceinated peptidomimetic macrocycle and an acceptor protein will be detected in a competitive binding FPA experiment.
  • For example, putative antagonist compounds (1 nM to 1 mM) and a fluoresceinated peptidomimetic macrocycle (25 nM) are incubated with the acceptor protein (50 nM) in binding buffer (140 mM NaCl, 50 mM Tris-HCL, pH 7.4) for 30 minutes at room temperature. Antagonist binding activity is measured, for example, by fluorescence polarization on a luminescence spectrophotometer (e.g. Perkin-Elmer LS50B). Kd values may be determined by nonlinear regression analysis using, for example, Graphpad Prism software (GraphPad Software, Inc., San Diego, Calif.).
  • Any class of molecule, such as small organic molecules, peptides, oligonucleotides or proteins can be examined as putative antagonists in this assay. Acceptor proteins for BH3-peptides such as BCL2, BCL-XL, BAX or MCL1 can be used in this assay. Additional methods to perform such assays are described in the Example section below.
  • Binding Assays in Cell Lysates or Intact Cells.
  • It is possible to measure binding of peptides or peptidomimetic macrocycles to their natural acceptors in cell lysates or intact cells by immunoprecipitation and pull-down experiments. For example, intact cells are incubated with fluoresceinated (FITC-labeled) or biotinylated compounds for 4 hrs in the absence of serum, followed by serum replacement and further incubation that ranges from 4-18 hrs. Alternatively, cells can be incubated for the duration of the experiment in Opti-MEM (Invitrogen). Cells are then pelleted and incubated in lysis buffer (50 mM Tris [pH 7.6], 150 mM NaCl, 1% CHAPS and protease inhibitor cocktail) for 10 minutes at 4° C. 1% NP-40 or Triton X-100 may be used instead of CHAPS. Extracts are centrifuged at 14,000 rpm for 15 minutes and supernatants collected and incubated with 10 μl goat anti-FITC antibody or streptavidin-coated beads for 2 hrs, rotating at 4° C. followed by further 2 hrs incubation at 4° C. with protein A/G Sepharose (50 μl of 50% bead slurry).). No secondary step is necessary if using streptavidin beads to pull down biotinylated compounds. Alternatively FITC-labeled or biotinylated compounds are incubated with cell lysates, prepared as described above, for 2 hrs, rotating at 4° C. followed by incubation with 10 μl goat anti-FITC antibody or streptavidin-coated beads for 2 hrs, rotating at 4° C. followed by further 2 hrs incubation at 4° C. with protein A/G Sepharose (50 IA of 50% bead slurry), no secondary step is necessary if using streptavidin beads to pull down biotinylated compounds. After quick centrifugation, the pellets may be washed in lysis buffer containing increasing salt concentration (e.g., 150, 300, 500 mM of NaCl). The beads may be then re-equilibrated at 150 mM NaCl before addition of SDS-containing sample buffer and boiling. The beads and cell lysates may be electrophoresed using 4%-12% gradient Bis-Tris gels followed by transfer into Immobilon-P membranes. After blocking, blots may be incubated with an antibody that detects FITC or biotin, respectively and also with one or more antibodies that detect proteins that bind to the peptidomimetic macrocycle, including BCL2, MCL1, BCL-XL, A1, BAX, and BAK. The lysate blots are also probed with anti-Hsc-70 for loading control. Alternatively, after electrophoresis the gel may be silver stained to detect proteins that come down specifically with FITC-labeled or biotinylated compounds.
  • Cellular Penetrability Assays.
  • A peptidomimetic macrocycle is, for example, more cell permeable compared to a corresponding uncrosslinked polypeptide. In some embodiments, the peptidomimetic macrocycles are more cell permeable than a corresponding uncrosslinked polypeptides. Peptidomimetic macrocycles with optimized linkers possess, for example, cell penetrability that is at least two-fold greater than a corresponding uncrosslinked polypeptide, and often 20% or more of the applied peptidomimetic macrocycle will be observed to have penetrated the cell after 4 hours. To measure the cell penetrability of peptidomimetic macrocycles and corresponding uncrosslinked polypeptides, intact cells are incubated with fluoresceinated peptidomimetic macrocycles or corresponding uncrosslinked polypeptides (10 μM) for 4 hrs in serum free media at 37° C., washed twice with media and incubated with trypsin (0.25%) for 10 min at 37° C. The cells are washed again and resuspended in PBS. Cellular fluorescence is analyzed, for example, by using either a FACSCalibur flow cytometer or Cellomics' KineticScan® HCS Reader. Additional methods of quantitating cellular penetration may be used. A particular method is described in more details in the Examples provided.
  • Cellular Efficacy Assays.
  • The efficacy of certain peptidomimetic macrocycles is determined, for example, in cell-based killing assays using a variety of tumorigenic and non-tumorigenic cell lines and primary cells derived from human or mouse cell populations. Cell viability is monitored, for example, over 24-96 hrs of incubation with peptidomimetic macrocycles (0.5 to 50 μM) to identify those that kill at EC50<10 μM. In this context, EC50 refers to the half maximal effective concentration, which is the concentration of peptidomimetic macrocycle at which 50% the population is viable. Several standard assays that measure cell viability are commercially available and are optionally used to assess the efficacy of the peptidomimetic macrocycles. In addition, assays that measure Annexin V and caspase activation are optionally used to assess whether the peptidomimetic macrocycles kill cells by activating the apoptotic machinery. For example, the Cell Titer-glo assay is used which determines cell viability as a function of intracellular ATP concentration.
  • In Vivo Stability Assay.
  • To investigate the in vivo stability of the peptidomimetic macrocycles, the compounds are, for example, administered to mice and/or rats by IV, IP, SC, PO or inhalation routes at concentrations ranging from 0.1 to 50 mg/kg and blood specimens withdrawn at 0′, 5′, 15′, 30′, 1 hr, 4 hrs, 8 hrs, 12 hrs, 24 hrs and 48 hrs post-injection. Levels of intact compound in 25 μL of fresh serum are then measured by LC-MS/MS as described herein.
  • In Vivo Efficacy in Animal Models.
  • To determine the anti-oncogenic activity of peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in vivo, the compounds are, for example, given alone (IP, IV, SC, PO, by inhalation or nasal routes) or in combination with sub-optimal doses of relevant chemotherapy (e.g., cyclophosphamide, doxorubicin, etoposide). In one example, 5×106 SEMK2 cells (established from the bone marrow of a patient with acute lymphoblastic leukemia) that stably express luciferase are injected by tail vein in NOD-SCID, SCID-beige or NOD.IL2rg KO mice 3 hrs after they have been subjected to total body irradiation. Non-radiated mice may also be used for these studies. If left untreated, this form of leukemia is fatal in 3 weeks in this model. The leukemia is readily monitored, for example, by injecting the mice with D-luciferin (60 mg/kg) and imaging the anesthetized animals (e.g., Xenogen In Vivo Imaging System, Caliper Life Sciences, Hopkinton, Mass.). Total body bioluminescence is quantified by integration of photonic flux (photons/sec) by Living Image Software (Caliper Life Sciences, Hopkinton, Mass.). Peptidomimetic macrocycles alone or in combination with sub-optimal doses of relevant chemotherapeutics agents are, for example, administered to leukemic mice (8-10 days after injection/day 1 of experiment, in bioluminescence range of 14-16) by tail vein or IP routes at doses ranging from 0.1 mg/kg to 50 mg/kg for 7 to 21 days. Optionally, the mice are imaged throughout the experiment every other day and survival monitored daily for the duration of the experiment. Expired mice are optionally subjected to necropsy at the end of the experiment. Another animal model is implantation into NOD-SCID mice of DoHH2, a cell line derived from human follicular lymphoma, that stably expresses luciferase. These in vivo tests optionally generate preliminary pharmacokinetic, pharmacodynamic and toxicology data.
  • Clinical Trials.
  • To determine the suitability of the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention for treatment of humans, clinical trials are performed. For example, patients diagnosed with cancer and in need of treatment are selected and separated in treatment and one or more control groups, wherein the treatment group is administered a peptidomimetic macrocycle of the invention, while the control groups receive a placebo, a known anti-cancer drug, or the standard of care. The treatment safety and efficacy of the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention can thus be evaluated by performing comparisons of the patient groups with respect to factors such as survival and quality-of-life. In this example, the patient group treated with a peptidomimetic macrocyle show improved long-term survival compared to a patient control group treated with a placebo or the standard of care.
  • Pharmaceutical Compositions and Routes of Administration
  • Methods of administration include but are not limited to intradermal, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intravenous, subcutaneous, intranasal, epidural, oral, sublingual, intracerebral, intravaginal, transdermal, rectal, by inhalation, or topical by application to ears, nose, eyes, or skin.
  • The peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention also include pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives or prodrugs thereof. A “pharmaceutically acceptable derivative” means any pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, salt of an ester, pro-drug or other derivative of a compound of this invention which, upon administration to a recipient, is capable of providing (directly or indirectly) a compound of this invention. For example, pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives may increase the bioavailability of the compounds of the invention when administered to a mammal (e.g., by increasing absorption into the blood of an orally administered compound) or which increases delivery of the active compound to a biological compartment (e.g., the brain or lymphatic system) relative to the parent species. Some pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives include a chemical group which increases aqueous solubility or active transport across the gastrointestinal mucosa.
  • In some embodiments, the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention are modified by covalently or non-covalently joining appropriate functional groups to enhance selective biological properties. Such modifications include those which increase biological penetration into a given biological compartment (e.g., blood, lymphatic system, central nervous system), increase oral availability, increase solubility to allow administration by injection, alter metabolism, and alter rate of excretion.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the compounds of this invention include those derived from pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic and organic acids and bases. Examples of suitable acid salts include acetate, adipate, benzoate, benzenesulfonate, butyrate, citrate, digluconate, dodecylsulfate, formate, fumarate, glycolate, hemisulfate, heptanoate, hexanoate, hydrochloride, hydrobromide, hydroiodide, lactate, maleate, malonate, methanesulfonate, 2-naphthalenesulfonate, nicotinate, nitrate, palmoate, phosphate, picrate, pivalate, propionate, salicylate, succinate, sulfate, tartrate, tosylate and undecanoate. Salts derived from appropriate bases include alkali metal (e.g., sodium), alkaline earth metal (e.g., magnesium), ammonium and N-(alkyl)4 + salts.
  • For preparing pharmaceutical compositions from the compounds of the present invention, pharmaceutically acceptable carriers include either solid or liquid carriers. Solid form preparations include powders, tablets, pills, capsules, cachets, suppositories, and dispersible granules. A solid carrier can be one or more substances, which also acts as diluents, flavoring agents, binders, preservatives, tablet disintegrating agents, or an encapsulating material. Details on techniques for formulation and administration are well described in the scientific and patent literature, see, e.g., the latest edition of Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Maack Publishing Co, Easton Pa.
  • In powders, the carrier is a finely divided solid, which is in a mixture with the finely divided active component. In tablets, the active component is mixed with the carrier having the necessary binding properties in suitable proportions and compacted in the shape and size desired.
  • Suitable solid excipients are carbohydrate or protein fillers include, but are not limited to sugars, including dextrose, lactose, sucrose, mannitol, or sorbitol; starch from corn, wheat, rice, potato, or other plants; cellulose such as methyl cellulose, hydroxypropylmethyl-cellulose, or sodium carboxymethylcellulose; and gums including arabic and tragacanth; as well as proteins such as gelatin and collagen. If desired, disintegrating or solubilizing agents are added, such as the cross-linked polyvinyl pyrrolidone, agar, alginic acid, or a salt thereof, such as sodium alginate.
  • Liquid form preparations include solutions, suspensions, and emulsions, for example, water or water/propylene glycol solutions. For parenteral injection, liquid preparations can be formulated in solution in aqueous polyethylene glycol solution. The term “parenteral” as used herein refers modes of administration including intravenous, intraarterial, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intrasternal, and subcutaneous.
  • The pharmaceutical preparation is preferably in unit dosage form. In such form the preparation is subdivided into unit doses containing appropriate quantities of the active component. The unit dosage form can be a packaged preparation, the package containing discrete quantities of preparation, such as packeted tablets, capsules, and powders in vials or ampoules. Also, the unit dosage form can be a capsule, tablet, cachet, or lozenge itself, or it can be the appropriate number of any of these in packaged form.
  • When the compositions of this invention comprise a combination of a peptidomimetic macrocycle and one or more additional therapeutic or prophylactic agents, both the compound and the additional agent should be present at dosage levels of between about 1 to 100%, and more preferably between about 5 to 95% of the dosage normally administered in a monotherapy regimen. In some embodiments, the additional agents are administered separately, as part of a multiple dose regimen, from the compounds of this invention. Alternatively, those agents are part of a single dosage form, mixed together with the compounds of this invention in a single composition.
  • Methods of Use
  • In one aspect, the present invention provides novel peptidomimetic macrocycles that are useful in competitive binding assays to identify agents which bind to the natural ligand(s) of the proteins or peptides upon which the peptidomimetic macrocycles are modeled. For example, in the BH3/BCL-XL anti-apoptotic system labeled peptidomimetic macrocycles based on BH3 can be used in a BCL-XL binding assay along with small molecules that competitively bind to BCL-XL. Competitive binding studies allow for rapid in vitro evaluation and determination of drug candidates specific for the BH3/BCL-XL system. The invention further provides for the generation of antibodies against the peptidomimetic macrocycles. In some embodiments, these antibodies specifically bind both the peptidomimetic macrocycle and the BH3 peptidomimetic precursors upon which the peptidomimetic macrocycles are derived. Such antibodies, for example, disrupt the BH3/BCL-XL systems, respectively.
  • In other aspects, the present invention provides for both prophylactic and therapeutic methods of treating a subject at risk of (or susceptible to) a disorder or having a disorder associated with aberrant (e.g., insufficient or excessive) BCL-2 family member expression or activity (e.g., extrinsic or intrinsic apoptotic pathway abnormalities). It is believed that some BCL-2 type disorders are caused, at least in part, by an abnormal level of one or more BCL-2 family members (e.g., over or under expression), or by the presence of one or more BCL-2 family members exhibiting abnormal activity. As such, the reduction in the level and/or activity of the BCL-2 family member or the enhancement of the level and/or activity of the BCL-2 family member, is used, for example, to ameliorate or reduce the adverse symptoms of the disorder.
  • In one embodiment, the compounds of the invention are used to treat disorders associated with expression or overexpression of Mcl-1. Mcl-1 has been shown to be expressed in many tissues and neoplastic cell lines and is thought to participate in the development of malignancies (Thallinger et al. (2004) Clin. Cancer Res. 10:4185-4191). The peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention may be used for the treatment of such malignancies.
  • In one embodiment, the disorder being treated (e.g. cancer) is differentially responsive to the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention. In some embodiments, the cancer is treated with a BIM peptidomimetic macrocycle and is at least 2-fold less sensitive to treatment using a BID polypeptide (such as a BID peptidomimetic macrocycle or uncrosslinked polypeptide) as measured in an in vitro cell viability assay. In other embodiments, the cancer is at least 5-fold less sensitive to treatment using a BID polypeptide as measured in an in vitro cell viability assay. In yet other embodiments, the cancer is at least 8-fold less sensitive to treatment using a BID polypeptide as measured in an in vitro cell viability assay. In other embodiments, the cancer is treated with a BID peptidomimetic macrocycle and is at least 2-fold less sensitive to treatment using a BIM polypeptide (such as a BIM peptidomimetic macrocycle or uncrosslinked polypeptide) as measured in an in vitro cell viability assay. In other embodiments, the cancer is at least 5-fold less sensitive to treatment using a BIM polypeptide as measured in an in vitro cell viability assay. In yet other embodiments, the cancer is at least 8-fold less sensitive to treatment using a BIM polypeptide as measured in an in vitro cell viability assay.
  • In another embodiment, a method of treating a human patient is provided comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of a BCL-family protein and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of the BCL-family protein is detected. BCL-family proteins include, for example, BCL-2, BCL-XL, MCL-1, Bfl1/A1, BOO/DIVA, NRH/NR13, BAX, BAD, BAK, BOK, BIK, PUMA, BIM, BMF, BLK, BNIP3, HRK, NIX, SPIKE, and Noxa. In one embodiment, a method of treating a human patient is provided comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of BCL-2 in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of BCL-2 is detected. In another embodiment, a method of treating a human patient is provided comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of BCL-XL in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of BCL-XL is detected. In another embodiment, a method of treating a human patient is provided comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of MCL-1 in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of MCL-1 is detected. In another embodiment, a method of treating a human patient is provided comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of BAX in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of BAX is detected. In another embodiment, a method of treating a human patient is provided comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of BAD in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of BAD is detected. In another embodiment, a method of treating a human patient is provided comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of BAK in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of BAK is detected. In another embodiment, a method of treating a human patient is provided comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of PUMA in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of PUMA is detected. In another embodiment, a method of treating a human patient is provided comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of Noxa in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of Noxa is detected. In another embodiment, a method of treating a human patient is provided comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of Noxa in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of Noxa is detected. In another embodiment, a method of treating a human patient is provided comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of Bfl1/A1 in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of Bfl1/A1 is detected. In another embodiment, a method of treating a human patient is provided comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of BOO/DIVA in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of BOO/DIVA is detected. In another embodiment, a method of treating a human patient is provided comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of NRH/NR13 in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of NRH/NR13 is detected. In another embodiment, a method of treating a human patient is provided comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of BOK in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of BOK is detected. In another embodiment, a method of treating a human patient is provided comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of BIK in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of BIK is detected. In another embodiment, a method of treating a human patient is provided comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of BMF in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of BMF is detected. In another embodiment, a method of treating a human patient is provided comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of BLK in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of BLK is detected. In another embodiment, a method of treating a human patient is provided comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of BNIP3 in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of BNIP3 is detected. In another embodiment, a method of treating a human patient is provided comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of HRK in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of HRK is detected. In another embodiment, a method of treating a human patient is provided comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of Nix in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of Nix is detected. In another embodiment, a method of treating a human patient is provided comprising performing an assay to evaluate the levels of SPIKE in the patient and administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle if an abberant or irregular level of expression of SPIKE is detected.
  • As used herein, the term “treatment” is defined as the application or administration of a therapeutic agent to a patient, or application or administration of a therapeutic agent to an isolated tissue or cell line from a patient, who has a disease, a symptom of disease or a predisposition toward a disease, with the purpose to cure, heal, alleviate, relieve, alter, remedy, ameliorate, improve or affect the disease, the symptoms of disease or the predisposition toward disease.
  • In some embodiments, the peptidomimetics macrocycles of the invention is used to treat, prevent, and/or diagnose cancers and neoplastic conditions. As used herein, the terms “cancer”, “hyperproliferative” and “neoplastic” refer to cells having the capacity for autonomous growth, i.e., an abnormal state or condition characterized by rapidly proliferating cell growth. Hyperproliferative and neoplastic disease states may be categorized as pathologic, i.e., characterizing or constituting a disease state, or may be categorized as non-pathologic, i.e., a deviation from normal but not associated with a disease state. The term is meant to include all types of cancerous growths or oncogenic processes, metastatic tissues or malignantly transformed cells, tissues, or organs, irrespective of histopathologic type or stage of invasiveness. A metastatic tumor can arise from a multitude of primary tumor types, including but not limited to those of breast, lung, liver, colon and ovarian origin. “Pathologic hyperproliferative” cells occur in disease states characterized by malignant tumor growth. Examples of non-pathologic hyperproliferative cells include proliferation of cells associated with wound repair. Examples of cellular proliferative and/or differentiative disorders include cancer, e.g., carcinoma, sarcoma, or metastatic disorders. In some embodiments, the peptidomimetics macrocycles are novel therapeutic agents for controlling breast cancer, ovarian cancer, colon cancer, lung cancer, metastasis of such cancers and the like.
  • Examples of cancers or neoplastic conditions include, but are not limited to, a fibrosarcoma, myosarcoma, liposarcoma, chondrosarcoma, osteogenic sarcoma, chordoma, angiosarcoma, endotheliosarcoma, lymphangiosarcoma, lymphangioendotheliosarcoma, synovioma, mesothelioma, Ewing's tumor, leiomyosarcoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, gastric cancer, esophageal cancer, rectal cancer, pancreatic cancer, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, uterine cancer, cancer of the head and neck, skin cancer, brain cancer, squamous cell carcinoma, sebaceous gland carcinoma, papillary carcinoma, papillary adenocarcinoma, cystadenocarcinoma, medullary carcinoma, bronchogenic carcinoma, renal cell carcinoma, hepatoma, bile duct carcinoma, choriocarcinoma, seminoma, embryonal carcinoma, Wilm's tumor, cervical cancer, testicular cancer, small cell lung carcinoma, non-small cell lung carcinoma, bladder carcinoma, epithelial carcinoma, glioma, astrocytoma, medulloblastoma, craniopharyngioma, ependymoma, pinealoma, hemangioblastoma, acoustic neuroma, oligodendroglioma, meningioma, melanoma, neuroblastoma, retinoblastoma, leukemia, lymphoma, or Kaposi sarcoma.
  • Examples of proliferative disorders include hematopoietic neoplastic disorders. As used herein, the term “hematopoietic neoplastic disorders” includes diseases involving hyperplastic/neoplastic cells of hematopoietic origin, e.g., arising from myeloid, lymphoid or erythroid lineages, or precursor cells thereof. Preferably, the diseases arise from poorly differentiated acute leukemias, e.g., erythroblastic leukemia and acute megakaryoblastic leukemia. Additional exemplary myeloid disorders include, but are not limited to, acute promyeloid leukemia (APML), acute myelogenous leukemia (AML) and chronic myelogenous leukemia (CML) (reviewed in Vaickus (1991), Crit Rev. Oncol./Hemotol. 11:267-97); lymphoid malignancies include, but are not limited to acute lymphoblastic leukemia (ALL) which includes B-lineage ALL and T-lineage ALL, chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL), prolymphocytic leukemia (PLL), hairy cell leukemia (HLL) and Waldenstrom's macroglobulinemia (WM). Additional forms of malignant lymphomas include, but are not limited to non-Hodgkin lymphoma and variants thereof, peripheral T cell lymphomas, adult T cell leukemia/lymphoma (ATL), cutaneous T-cell lymphoma (CTCL), large granular lymphocytic leukemia (LGF), Hodgkin's disease and Reed-Stemberg disease.
  • Examples of cellular proliferative and/or differentiative disorders of the breast include, but are not limited to, proliferative breast disease including, e.g., epithelial hyperplasia, sclerosing adenosis, and small duct papillomas; tumors, e.g., stromal tumors such as fibroadenoma, phyllodes tumor, and sarcomas, and epithelial tumors such as large duct papilloma; carcinoma of the breast including in situ (noninvasive) carcinoma that includes ductal carcinoma in situ (including Paget's disease) and lobular carcinoma in situ, and invasive (infiltrating) carcinoma including, but not limited to, invasive ductal carcinoma, invasive lobular carcinoma, medullary carcinoma, colloid (mucinous) carcinoma, tubular carcinoma, and invasive papillary carcinoma, and miscellaneous malignant neoplasms. Disorders in the male breast include, but are not limited to, gynecomastia and carcinoma.
  • Examples of cellular proliferative and/or differentiative disorders of the lung include, but are not limited to, bronchogenic carcinoma, including paraneoplastic syndromes, bronchioloalveolar carcinoma, neuroendocrine tumors, such as bronchial carcinoid, miscellaneous tumors, and metastatic tumors; pathologies of the pleura, including inflammatory pleural effusions, noninflammatory pleural effusions, pneumothorax, and pleural tumors, including solitary fibrous tumors (pleural fibroma) and malignant mesothelioma.
  • Examples of cellular proliferative and/or differentiative disorders of the colon include, but are not limited to, non-neoplastic polyps, adenomas, familial syndromes, colorectal carcinogenesis, colorectal carcinoma, and carcinoid tumors.
  • Examples of cellular proliferative and/or differentiative disorders of the liver include, but are not limited to, nodular hyperplasias, adenomas, and malignant tumors, including primary carcinoma of the liver and metastatic tumors.
  • Examples of cellular proliferative and/or differentiative disorders of the ovary include, but are not limited to, ovarian tumors such as, tumors of coelomic epithelium, serous tumors, mucinous tumors, endometrioid tumors, clear cell adenocarcinoma, cystadenofibroma, Brenner tumor, surface epithelial tumors; germ cell tumors such as mature (benign) teratomas, monodermal teratomas, immature malignant teratomas, dysgerminoma, endodermal sinus tumor, choriocarcinoma; sex cord-stomal tumors such as, granulosa-theca cell tumors, the comafibromas, and roblastomas, hill cell tumors, and gonadoblastoma; and metastatic tumors such as Krukenberg tumors.
  • Breast Cancer
  • In one aspect, the invention provides methods of treating breast cancer by administering the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention. Breast cancer includes invasive breast carcinomas, such as invasive ductal carcinoma, invasive lobular carcinoma, tubular carcinoma, invasive cribriform carcinoma, medullary carcinoma, mucinous carcinoma and other tumours with abundant mucin, cystadenocarcinoma, columnar cell mucinous carcinoma, signet ring cell carcinoma, neuroendocrine tumours (including solid neuroendocrine carcinoma, atypical carcinoid tumour, small cell/oat cell carcinoma, or large cell neuroendocrine carcioma), invasive papillary carcinoma, invasive micropapillary carcinoma, apocrine carcinoma, metaplastic carcinomas, pure epithelial metaplastic carciomas, mixed epithelial/mesenchymal metaplastic carcinomas, lipid-rich carcinoma, secretory carcinoma, oncocytic carcinoma, adenoid cystic carcinoma, acinic cell carcinoma, glycogen-rich clear cell carcinoma, sebaceous carcinoma, inflammatory carcinoma or bilateral breast carcinoma; mesenchymal tumors such as haemangioma, angiomatosis, haemangiopericytoma, pseudoangiomatous stromal hyperplasia, myofibroblastoma, fibromatosis (aggressive), inflammatory myofibroblastic tumour, lipoma, angiolipoma, granular cell tumour, neurofibroma, schwannoma, angiosarcoma, liposarcoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, osteosarcoma, leiomyoma, or leiomysarcoma; myoepithelial lesions such as myoepitheliosis, adenomyoepithelial adenosis, adenomyoepithelioma, or malignant myoepithelioma; fibroepithelial tumours such as fibroadenoma, phyllodes tumour, low grade periductal stromal sarcoma, or mammary hamartoma; and tumours of the nipple such as nipple adenoma, syringomatous adenoma, or Paget's disease of the nipple.
  • Treatment of breast cancer may be effected in conjunction with any additional therapy, such as a therapy that is part of the standard of care. A surgical technique such as lumpectomy or mastectomy may be performed prior to, during, or following treatment with the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention. Alternatively, radiation therapy may be used for the treatment of breast cancer in conjunction with the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention. In other cases, the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention are administered in combination with a second therapeutic agent. Such an agent may be a chemotherapeutic agent such as an individual drug or combination of drugs and therapies. For example, the chemotherapeutic agent can be an adjuvant chemotherapeutic treatment such as CMF (cyclophosphamide, methotrexate, and 5-fluorouracil); FAC or CAF (5-fluorouracil, doxorubicin, cyclophosphamide); AC or CA (doxorubicin and cyclophosphamide); AC-Taxol (AC followed by paclitaxel); TAC (docetaxel, doxorubicin, and cyclophosphamide); FEC (5-fluorouracil, epirubicin and cyclophosphamide); FECD (FEC followed by docetaxel); TC (docetaxel and cyclophosphamide). In addition to chemotherapy, trastuzumab may also be added to the regimen depending on the tumor characteristics (i.e. HER2/neu status) and risk of relapse. Hormonal therapy may also be appropriate before, during or following chemotherapeutic treatment. For example, tamoxifen may be administered or a compound in the category of aromatase inhibitors including, but not limited to aminogluthetimide, anastrozole, exemestane, formestane, letrozole, or vorozole. In other embodiments, an antiangiogenic agent may be used in combination therapy for the treatment of breast cancer. The antiangiogenic agent may be an anti-VEGF agent including, but not limited to bevacizumab.
  • Ovarian Cancer
  • In another aspect, the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention may be used to treat ovarian cancer. Ovarian cancers include ovarian tumors such as, tumors of coelomic epithelium, serous tumors, mucinous tumors, endometrioid tumors, clear cell adenocarcinoma, cystadenofibroma, Brenner tumor, surface epithelial tumors; germ cell tumors such as mature (benign) teratomas, monodermal teratomas, immature malignant teratomas, dysgerminoma, endodermal sinus tumor, choriocarcinoma; sex cord-stomal tumors such as, granulosa-theca cell tumors, the comafibromas, and roblastomas, hill cell tumors, and gonadoblastoma; and metastatic tumors such as Krukenberg tumors.
  • The peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention may be administered in conjunction with a second therapy such as a therapy that is part of the standard of care. Surgery, immunotherapy, chemotherapy, hormone therapy, radiation therapy, or a combination thereof are some possible treatments available for ovarian cancer. Some possible surgical procedures include debulking, and a unilateral or bilateral oophorectomy and/or a unilateral or bilateral salpigectomy.
  • Anti-cancer drugs that may be used include cyclophosphamide, etoposide, altretamine, and ifosfamide. Hormone therapy with the drug tamoxifen may be used to shrink ovarian tumors. Radiation therapy may be external beam radiation therapy and/or brachytherapy.
  • Prostate Cancer
  • In another aspect, the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention may be used to treat prostate cancer. Prostate cancers include adenocarcinomas and metastasized adenocarcinomas. The peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention may be administered in conjunction with a second therapy such as a therapy that is part of the standard of care. Treatment for prostate cancer may involve surgery, radiation therapy, High Intensity Focused Ultrasound (HIFU), chemotherapy, cryosurgery, hormonal therapy, or any combination thereof. Surgery may involve prostatectomy, radical perineal prostatectomy, laparoscopic radical prostatectomy, transurethral resection of the prostate or orchiectomy. Radiation therapy may include external beam radiation therapy and/or brachytherapy. Hormonal therapy may include orchiectomy; administration of antiandrogens such as flutamide, bicalutamide, nilutamide, or cyproterone acetate; medications which inhibit the production of adrenal androgens such as DHEA, such as ketoconazole and aminoglutethimide; and GnRH antagonists or agonists such as Abarelix (Plenaxis®), Cetrorelix (Cetrotide®), Ganirelix (Antagon®), leuprolide, goserelin, triptorelin, or buserelin. Treatment with an anti-androgen agent, which blocks androgen activity in the body, is another available therapy. Such agents include flutamide, bicalutamide, and nilutamide. This therapy is typically combined with LHRH analog administration or an orchiectomy, which is termed a combined androgen blockade (CAB). Chemotherapy includes, but is not limited to, administration of docetaxel, for example with a corticosteroid such as prednisone. Anti-cancer drugs such as doxorubicin, estramustine, etoposide, mitoxantrone, vinblastine, paclitaxel, carboplatin may also be administered to slow the growth of prostate cancer, reduce symptoms and improve the quality of life. Additional compounds such as bisphosphonate drugs may also be administered.
  • Renal Cancer
  • In another aspect, the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention may be used to treat renal cancer. Renal cancers include, but are not limited to, renal cell carcinomas, metastases from extra-renal primary neoplasms, renal lymphomas, squamous cell carcinomas, juxtaglomerular tumors (reninomas), transitional cell carcinomas, angiomyolipomas, oncocytomas and Wilm's tumors. The peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention may be administered in conjunction with a second therapy such as a therapy that is part of the standard of care. Treatment for renal cancer may involve surgery, percutaneous therapies, radiation therapies, chemotherapy, vaccines, or other medication. Surgical techniques useful for treatment of renal cancer in combination with the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention include nephrectomy, which may include removal of the adrenal gland, retroperitoneal lymph nodes, and any other surrounding tissues affected by the invasion of the tumor. Percutaneous therapies include, for example, image-guided therapies which may involve imaging of a tumor followed by its targeted destruction by radiofrequency ablation or cryotherapy. In some cases, other chemotherapeutic or other medications useful in treating renal cancer may be alpha-interferon, interleukin-2, bevacizumab, sorafenib, sunitib, temsirolimus or other kinase inhibitors.
  • Pancreatic Cancer
  • In other aspects, the invention provides methods of treating pancreatic cancer by administering peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention, such as a pancreatic cancer selected from the following: an epitheliod carcinoma in the pancreatic duct tissue and an adenocarcinoma in a pancreatic duct. The most common type of pancreatic cancer is an adenocarcinoma, which occurs in the lining of the pancreatic duct. Possible treatments available for pancreatic cancer include surgery, immunotherapy, radiation therapy, and chemotherapy. Possible surgical treatment options include a distal or total pancreatectomy and a pancreaticoduodenectomy (Whipple procedure). Radiation therapy may be an option for pancreatic cancer patients, specifically external beam radiation where radiation is focused on the tumor by a machine outside the body. Another option is intraoperative electron beam radiation administered during an operation. Chemotherapy may also be used to treat pancreatic cancer patients. Suitable anti-cancer drugs include, but are not limited to, 5-fluorouracil (5-FU), mitomycin, ifosfamide, doxorubicin, streptozocin, chlorozotocin, and combinations thereof. The methods provided by the invention can provide a beneficial effect for pancreatic cancer patients, by administration of a polypeptide of the invention or a combination of administration of a peptidomimetic macrocycle and surgery, radiation therapy, or chemotherapy.
  • Colon Cancer
  • In one aspect, peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention may be used for the treatment of colon cancer, including but not limited to non-neoplastic polyps, adenomas, familial syndromes, colorectal carcinogenesis, colorectal carcinoma, and carcinoid tumors. Possible treatments available for colon cancer that may be used in conjunction with the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention include surgery, chemotherapy, radiation therapy or targeted drug therapy.
  • Radiation therapy may include external beam radiation therapy and/or brachytherapy. Chemotherapy may be used to reduce the likelihood of metastasis developing, shrink tumor size, or slow tumor growth. Chemotherapy is often applied after surgery (adjuvant), before surgery (neo-adjuvant), or as the primary therapy if surgery is not indicated (palliative). For example, exemplary regimens for adjuvant chemotherapy involve the combination of infusional 5-fluorouracil, leucovorin, and oxaliplatin (FOLFOX). First line chemotherapy regimens may involve the combination of infusional 5-fluorouracil, leucovorin, and oxaliplatin (FOLFOX) with a targeted drug such as bevacizumab, cetuximab or panitumumab or infusional 5-fluorouracil, leucovorin, and irinotecan (FOLFIRI) with targeted drug such as bevacizumab, cetuximab or panitumumab. Other chemotherapeutic agents that may be useful in the treatment or prevention of colon cancer in combination with the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention are Bortezomib (Velcade®), Oblimersen (Genasense®, G3139), Gefitinib and Erlotinib (Tarceva®) and Topotecan (Hycamtin®).
  • Lung Cancer
  • Some embodiments provide methods for the treatment of lung cancer using the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention. Examples of cellular proliferative and/or differentiative disorders of the lung include, but are not limited to, bronchogenic carcinoma, including paraneoplastic syndromes, bronchioloalveolar carcinoma, neuroendocrine tumors, such as bronchial carcinoid, miscellaneous tumors, and metastatic tumors; pathologies of the pleura, including inflammatory pleural effusions, noninflammatory pleural effusions, pneumothorax, and pleural tumors, including solitary fibrous tumors (pleural fibroma) and malignant mesothelioma.
  • The most common type of lung cancer is non-small cell lung cancer (NSCLC), which accounts for approximately 80-85% of lung cancers and is divided into squamous cell carcinomas, adenocarcinomas, and large cell undifferentiated carcinomas. Small cell lung cancer, e.g. small cell lung carcinomas, accounts for 15-20% of lung cancers. Treatment options for lung cancer include surgery, immunotherapy, radiation therapy, chemotherapy, photodynamic therapy, or a combination thereof. Some possible surgical options for treatment of lung cancer are a segmental or wedge resection, a lobectomy, or a pneumonectomy. Radiation therapy may be external beam radiation therapy or brachytherapy. Some anti-cancer drugs that may be used in chemotherapy to treat lung cancer in combination with the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention include cisplatin, carboplatin, paclitaxel, docetaxel, gemcitabine, vinorelbine, irinotecan, etoposide, vinblastine, gefitinib, ifosfamide, methotrexate, or a combination thereof. Photodynamic therapy (PDT) may be used to treat lung cancer patients. The methods described herein can provide a beneficial effect for lung cancer patients, by administration of a peptidomimetic macrocycle or a combination of administration of a peptidomimetic macrocycle and surgery, radiation therapy, chemotherapy, photodynamic therapy, or a combination thereof.
  • Examples of cellular proliferative and/or differentiative disorders of the liver include, but are not limited to, nodular hyperplasias, adenomas, and malignant tumors, including primary carcinoma of the liver and metastatic tumors.
  • Immunoproliferative Disorders
  • Immunoproliferative disorders (also known as “immunoproliferative diseases” or “immunoproliferative neoplasms”) are disorders of the immune system that are characterized by the abnormal proliferation of the primary cells of the immune system, which includes B cells, T cells and Natural Killer (NK) cells, or by the excessive production of immunoglobulins (also known as antibodies). Such disorders include the general categories of lymphoproliferative disorders, hypergammaglobulinemias, and paraproteinemias. Examples of such disorders include, but are not limited to, X-linked lymphoproliferative disorder, autosomal lymphoproliferative disorder, Hyper-IgM syndrome, heavy chain disease, and cryoglobulinemia. Other immunoproliferative disorders can be graft versus host disease (GVHD); psoriasis; immune disorders associated with graft transplantation rejection; T cell lymphoma; T cell acute lymphoblastic leukemia; testicular angiocentric T cell lymphoma; benign lymphocytic angiitis; and autoimmune diseases such as lupus erythematosus, Hashimoto's thyroiditis, primary myxedema, Graves' disease, pernicious anemia, autoimmune atrophic gastritis, Addison's disease, insulin dependent diabetes mellitis, good pasture's syndrome, myasthenia gravis, pemphigus, Crohn's disease, sympathetic ophthalmia, autoimmune uveitis, multiple sclerosis, autoimmune hemolytic anemia, idiopathic thrombocytopenia, primary biliary cirrhosis, chronic action hepatitis, ulceratis colitis, Sjogren's syndrome, rheumatoid arthritis, polymyositis, scleroderma, and mixed connective tissue disease.
  • Combination Treatments
  • In one embodiment, peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention may be used for the treatment of cancer in conjunction with alkylating and alkylating-like agents. Such agents include, for example, nitrogen mustards such as chlorambucil, chlormethine, cyclophosphamide, ifosfamide, and melphalan; nitrosoureas such as carmustine, fotemustine, lomustine, and streptozocin; platinum therapeutic agents such as carboplatin, cisplatin, oxaliplatin, BBR3464, and satraplatin; or other agents, including but not limited to busulfan, dacarbazine, procarbazine, temozolomide, thiotepa, treosulfan, or uramustine.
  • In another embodiment, peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention may be used in conjunction with an antineoplastic agent which is an antimetabolite. For example, such an antineoplastic agent may be a folic acid such as aminopterin, methotrexate, pemetrexed, or raltitrexed. Alternatively, the antineoplastic agent may be a purine, including but not limited to cladribine, clofarabine, fludarabine, mercaptopurine, pentostatin, thioguanine. In further embodiments, the antineoplastic agent may be a pyrimidine such as capecitabine, cytarabine, fluorouracil, floxuridine, and gemcitabine.
  • In still other embodiments, peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention may be used in conjunction with an antineoplastic agent which is an spindle poison/mitotic inhibitor. Agents in this category include taxanes, for example docetaxel and paclitaxel; and vinca alkaloids such as vinblastine, vincristine, vindesine, and vinorelbine. In yet other embodiments, peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention may be used in combination with an antineoplastic agent which is a cytotoxic/antitumor antibiotic from the anthracycline family such as daunorubicin, doxorubicin, epirubicin, idarubicin, mitoxantrone, pixantrone, or valrubicin; an antibiotic from the streptomyces family such as actinomycin, bleomycin, mitomycin, or plicamycin; or hydroxyurea. Alternatively, agents used for combination therapy may be topoisomerase inhibitors including, but not limited to camptothecin, topotecan, irinotecan, etoposide, or teniposide.
  • Alternatively, the antineoplastic agent may be an antibody or antibody-derived agent. For example, a receptor tyrosine kinase-targeted antibody such as cetuximab, panitumumab, or trastuzumab may be used Alternatively, the antibody may be an anti-CD20 antibody such as rituximab or tositumomab, or any other suitable antibody including but not limited to alemtuzumab, bevacizumab, and gemtuzumab. In other embodiments, the antineoplastic agent is a photosensitizer such as aminolevulinic acid, methyl aminolevulinate, porfimer sodium, or verteporfin. In still other embodiments, the antineoplastic agent is a tyrosine kinase inhibitor such as dediranib, dasatinib, erlotinib, gefitinib, imatinib, lapatinib, nilotinib, sorafenib, sunitinib, or vandetanib. Other neoplastic agents suitable in the use of the invention include, for example, alitretinoin, tretinoin, altretamine, amsacrine, anagrelide, arsenic trioxide, asparaginase (pegaspargase), bexarotene, bortezomib, denileukin diftitox, estramustine, ixabepilone, masoprocol, or mitotane.
  • In other or further embodiments, the peptidomimetics macrocycles described herein are used to treat, prevent or diagnose conditions characterized by overactive cell death or cellular death due to physiologic insult, etc. Some examples of conditions characterized by premature or unwanted cell death are or alternatively unwanted or excessive cellular proliferation include, but are not limited to hypocellular/hypoplastic, acellular/aplastic, or hypercellular/hyperplastic conditions. Some examples include hematologic disorders including but not limited to fanconi anemia, aplastic anemia, thalaessemia, congenital neutropenia, myelodysplasia
  • In other or further embodiments, the peptidomimetics macrocycles of the invention that act to decrease apoptosis are used to treat disorders associated with an undesirable level of cell death. Thus, in some embodiments, the anti-apoptotic peptidomimetics macrocycles of the invention are used to treat disorders such as those that lead to cell death associated with viral infection, e.g., infection associated with infection with human immunodeficiency virus (HIV). A wide variety of neurological diseases are characterized by the gradual loss of specific sets of neurons, and the anti-apoptotic peptidomimetics macrocycles of the invention are used, in some embodiments, in the treatment of these disorders. Such disorders include Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS) retinitis pigmentosa, spinal muscular atrophy, and various forms of cerebellar degeneration. The cell loss in these diseases does not induce an inflammatory response, and apoptosis appears to be the mechanism of cell death. In addition, a number of hematologic diseases are associated with a decreased production of blood cells. These disorders include anemia associated with chronic disease, aplastic anemia, chronic neutropenia, and the myelodysplastic syndromes. Disorders of blood cell production, such as myelodysplastic syndrome and some forms of aplastic anemia, are associated with increased apoptotic cell death within the bone marrow. These disorders could result from the activation of genes that promote apoptosis, acquired deficiencies in stromal cells or hematopoietic survival factors, or the direct effects of toxins and mediators of immune responses. Two common disorders associated with cell death are myocardial infarctions and stroke. In both disorders, cells within the central area of ischemia, which is produced in the event of acute loss of blood flow, appear to die rapidly as a result of necrosis. However, outside the central ischemic zone, cells die over a more protracted time period and morphologically appear to die by apoptosis.
  • Other Methods of Use
  • In other or further embodiments, the anti-apoptotic peptidomimetics macrocycles of the invention are used to treat all such disorders associated with undesirable cell death.
  • Some examples of immunologic disorders that are treated with the peptidomimetics macrocycles described herein include but are not limited to organ transplant rejection, arthritis, lupus, IBD, Crohn's disease, asthma, multiple sclerosis, diabetes, etc.
  • Some examples of neurologic disorders that are treated with the peptidomimetics macrocycles described herein include but are not limited to Alzheimer's Disease, Down's Syndrome, Dutch Type Hereditary Cerebral Hemorrhage Amyloidosis, Reactive Amyloidosis, Familial Amyloid Nephropathy with Urticaria and Deafness, Muckle-Wells Syndrome, Idiopathic Myeloma; Macroglobulinemia-Associated Myeloma, Familial Amyloid Polyneuropathy, Familial Amyloid Cardiomyopathy, Isolated Cardiac Amyloid, Systemic Senile Amyloidosis, Adult Onset Diabetes, Insulinoma, Isolated Atrial Amyloid, Medullary Carcinoma of the Thyroid, Familial Amyloidosis, Hereditary Cerebral Hemorrhage With Amyloidosis, Familial Amyloidotic Polyneuropathy, Scrapie, Creutzfeldt-Jacob Disease, Gerstmann Straussler-Scheinker Syndrome, Bovine Spongiform Encephalitis, a prion-mediated disease, and Huntington's Disease.
  • Some examples of endocrinologic disorders that are treated with the peptidomimetics macrocycles described herein include but are not limited to diabetes, hypothyroidism, hypopituitarism, hypoparathyroidism, hypogonadism, etc.
  • Examples of cardiovascular disorders (e.g., inflammatory disorders) that are treated or prevented with the peptidomimetics macrocycles of the invention include, but are not limited to, atherosclerosis, myocardial infarction, stroke, thrombosis, aneurism, heart failure, ischemic heart disease, angina pectoris, sudden cardiac death, hypertensive heart disease; non-coronary vessel disease, such as arteriolosclerosis, small vessel disease, nephropathy, hypertriglyceridemia, hypercholesterolemia, hyperlipidemia, xanthomatosis, asthma, hypertension, emphysema and chronic pulmonary disease; or a cardiovascular condition associated with interventional procedures (“procedural vascular trauma”), such as restenosis following angioplasty, placement of a shunt, stent, synthetic or natural excision grafts, indwelling catheter, valve or other implantable devices. Preferred cardiovascular disorders include atherosclerosis, myocardial infarction, aneurism, and stroke.
  • EXAMPLES
  • The following section provides illustrative examples of the present invention.
  • Example 1 Synthesis of Peptidomimetic Macrocycles of the Invention
  • α-helical BID and BIM peptidomimetic macrocycles were synthesized, purified and analyzed as previously described (Walensky et al (2004) Science 305:1466-70; Walensky et al (2006) Mol Cell 24:199-210) and as indicated below. The macrocycles used in this study are shown below. The corresponding uncrosslinked polypeptides are indicated as “WT Sequence” and represent the natural counterparts of the peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention.
  • Cal-
    Calculated culated Found
    WT SEQ ID m/z m/z m/z
    Macrocycle Sequence Sequence NO: (M + H) (M + 3H) (M + 3H)
    SP-1 BID-BH3 Ac-DIIRNIARHLA$VGD$NleDRSI-NH2 95 2438.40 813.47 813.7
    SP-2 BID-BH3 Ac-DIIRNIARHLA$VED$NleDRSI-NH2 96 2510.42 837.48 837.25
    SP-3 BID-BH3 Ac-DIIRNIARHLAQVGDSNleDRSI-NH2 97 2403.32 801.78 801.89
    SP-4 BIM-BH3 Ac-IWIAQELR$IGD$FNAYYARR-NH2 98 2646.43 882.82 883.15
    SP-5 BIM-BH3 Ac-IWIAQELR$IED$FNAYYARR-NH2 99 2718.45 906.82 906.9
    SP-6 BIM-BH3 Ac-IWIAQELRRIGDEFNAYYARR-NH2 100 2681.41 894.47 894.69
    SP-7 BID-BH3 Pr-RNIARHLA$VAibD$NleDRSI-NH2 101 2139.25 713.76 713.79
    SP-8 BID-BH3 Pr-RNIARHLAib$VAibD$NleDRSI-NH2 102 2153.27 718.43 718.56
    SP-9 BID-BH3 Pr-RNIARHLA$VAibD$FARSI-NH2 103 2129.25 710.42 710.3
    SP-10 BID-BH3 Pr-RNIARHLA$VGD$NleAibRSI-NH2 104 2081.25 694.42 694.42
    SP-11 BIM-BH3 Ac-IWIAQALR$IGD$FNAYYARR-NH2 105 2588.43 863.48 863.85
    SP-12 BIM-BH3 Ac-RWIAQALR$IGNle$FNAYYARR- 106 2629.5 877.17 877.8
    NH2
    SP-13 BIM-BH3 Pr-RNChgARHLA$VAibD$FNAYYARR- 107 2622.45 874.82 875.22
    NH2
    SP-14 BIM-BH3 Ac-IWIAQALR$IGD$FNAibYYARR-NH2 108 2602.44 868.15 868.54
    SP-15 BIM-BH3 Ac-RWIAQALR$IGD$FNAFYARR-NH2 109 2615.45 872.49 872.64
    SP-16 BIM-BH3 Ac-RWIAQALR$IGA$FNAYYARR-NH2 110 2587.45 863.16 863.39
    SP-17 BIM-BH3 Ac-IWIAQAibLR$IGD$FNAibYYARR- 111 2616.46 872.82 872.91
    NH2
    SP-18 BIM-BH3 Ac-IWIAQQLR$IGD$FNAYYARR-NH2 112 2645.45 882.49 882.62
    SP-19 BIM-BH3 Ac-RWIAQQLR$IGD$FNAYYARR-NH2 113 2688.46 896.83 896.84
    SP-20 BIM-BH3 Ac-IWIAQALR$IGD$FNARRA-NH2 114 2262.3 754.77 755.08
    SP-21 BIM-BH3 Ac-IWIAQALR$IGD$FNAYKA-NH2 115 2241.26 747.76 748.12
    SP-22 BIM-BH3 Ac-IWIAQALR$IGD$FNAYK-NH2 116 2170.22 724.08 724.35
    SP-23 BIM-BH3 Ac-RWIAQALR$IGN$FNAYYARR-NH2 117 2630.45 877.48 877.36
    SP-24 BIM-BH3 Ac-IWIAQAAR$DIG$ANAYYARR-NH2 118 2470.34 824.11 824.10
    SP-25 BIM-BH3 Ac-IWIAQALR$IGN$FNAYYARR-NH2 119 2587.43 863.14 863.00
    SP-26 BIM-BH3 Ac-IWIAQALRRIGDEFNAYYARR-NH2 120 2623.39 875.13 874.97
  • Alpha, alpha-disubstituted non-natural amino acids containing olefinic side chains were synthesized according to Williams et al. (1991) J. Am. Chem. Soc. 113:9276; and Schafmeister et al. (2000) J. Am. Chem Soc. 122:5891. BID-BH3 and BIM-BH3 peptidomimetic macrocycles were designed by replacing two naturally occurring amino acids with the corresponding synthetic amino acids. Substitutions were made at the i and i+4 positions. BID BH3 and BIM-BH3 macrocycles were generated by solid phase peptide synthesis followed by olefin metathesis-based crosslinking of the synthetic amino acids via their olefin-containing side chains. The control sequences for BID and BIM peptidomimetic macrocycles, as well as specific sequence mutations generated are shown above.
  • In the sequences shown, “Nle” represents norleucine, “Aib” represents 2-aminoisobutyric acid, “Chg” represents cyclohexylglycine, “Ac” represents acetyl and “Pr” represents propionyl. Amino acids represented as $ connect an all-carbon crosslinker comprising one double bond and wherein each α-carbon atom to which the crosslinker is attached is additionally substituted with a methyl group. In all cases, the crosslinker is a linear all-carbon crosslinker comprising eight carbon atoms between the alpha carbons of each amino acid. If a double bond is present, it is positioned between the fourth and fifth carbon atom.
  • The non-natural amino acids (R and S enantiomers of the 5-carbon olefinic amino acid and the S enantiomer of the 8-carbon olefinic amino acid) were characterized by nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR) spectroscopy (Varian Mercury 400) and mass spectrometry (Micromass LCT). Peptide synthesis was performed either manually or on an automated peptide synthesizer (Applied Biosystems, model 433A), using solid phase conditions, rink amide AM resin (Novabiochem), and Fmoc main-chain protecting group chemistry. For the coupling of natural Fmoc-protected amino acids (Novabiochem), 10 equivalents of amino acid and a 1:1:2 molar ratio of coupling reagents HBTU/HOBt (Novabiochem)/DIEA were employed. Non-natural amino acids (4 equiv) were coupled with a 1:1:2 molar ratio of HATU (Applied Biosystems)/HOBt/DIEA. Olefin metathesis was performed in the solid phase using 10 mM Grubbs catalyst (Blackewell et al. 1994 supra) (Strem Chemicals) dissolved in degassed dichloromethane and reacted for 2 hours at room temperature. Isolation of metathesized compounds was achieved by trifluoroacetic acid-mediated deprotection and cleavage, ether precipitation to yield the crude product, and high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) (Varian ProStar) on a reverse phase C18 column (Varian) to yield the pure compounds. Chemical composition of the pure products was confirmed by LC/MS mass spectrometry (Micromass LCT interfaced with Agilent 1100 HPLC system) and amino acid analysis (Applied Biosystems, model 420A).
  • Cell Lines:
  • Cell lines used in this study are indicated in the table below:
  • Cells Type Source
    Jurkat human acute T cell leukemia ATCC
    K562 human chronic myelogeneous leukemia ATCC
    Karpas299 human T cell lymphoma ATCC
    MOLT4 human T cell leukemia NCI
    RPMI8226 human B lymphoblastoma NCI
    Ramos human B cell lymphoma ATCC
    Raji human B cell lymphoma ATCC
    HL-60 Human myeloid leukemia NCI
    Malme-3M lung malignant melanoma NCI
    SKMEL2 human malignant melanoma NCI
    SKMEL5 human malignant melanoma NCI
    PC3 human prostate adenocarcinoma NCI
    Cakil human kidney clear cell carcinoma NCI
    HCT116 human colorectal carcinoma NCI
    HT-29 Colorectal adeno carcinoma NCI
    HEPG2 human hepatocellular carcinoma ATCC
    MDAMB2 human breast adenocarcinoma NCI
    31
    MCF7 human breast adenocarcinoma NCI
    A549 human non-small cell lung carcinoma NCI
    H460 human non-small cell lung carcinoma NCI
    NCI-H220 human small cell lung carcinoma NCI
    NCI-H146 human small cell lung carcinoma NCI
    NCI-H128 human small cell lung cancer ATCC
    SKOV3 human ovary adenocarcinoma NCI
    Panc-1 human pancreas carcinoma ATCC
    U251 Human glioblastoma ATCC
    NCI-H82 Human small cell lung carcinoma
    Supt1 Human T cell lymphoma
    DHL-6 Human B cell lymphoma
    RS4; 11 Human lymphoblastic leukemia
    MM1S Human multiple myeloma
    SEMK2 Human mixed lineage leukemia
    A375 Human malignant melanoma
    OVCAR8 Human ovarian carcinoma
  • Example 2 Cell Viability Assays
  • Cell viability assays shown in FIGS. 1-32 were performed according to the following protocol. Tumor cell lines were grown in specific serum-supplemented media (growth media) as necessary. A day prior to the initiation of the study, cells were plated at optimal cell density (15,000 to 25,000 cells/well) in 200 μl growth media in microtiter plates. The next day, cells were washed twice in serum-free/phenol red-free RPMI complete media (assay buffer) and a final volume of 100 μl assay buffer was added to each well. Human peripheral blood lymphocytes (hPBLs) were isolated from Buffy coats (San Diego Blood Bank) using Ficoll-Paque gradient separation and plated on the day of the experiment at 25,000 cells/well.
  • Peptidomimetic macrocycles were diluted from 1 mM stocks (100% DMSO) in sterile water to prepare 400 μM working solutions. The peptidomimetic macrocycles and controls were then diluted 10 or 40 fold or alternatively serially two-fold diluted in assay buffer in dosing plates to provide concentrations of either 40 and 20 μM or between 1.2 and 40 μM, respectively. 100 μL of each dilution was then added to the appropriate wells of the test plate to achieve final concentrations of the peptidomimetic macrocycles equal to 20 or 5 μM, or between 0.6 to 20 μM, respectively. Controls included wells without peptidomimetic macrocycles containing the same concentration of DMSO as the wells containing the peptidomimetic macrocycles, wells containing 0.1% Triton X-100, wells containing a chemo cocktail comprised of 1 μM Velcade, 100 μM Etoposide and 20 μM Taxol and wells containing no cells. Plates were incubated for 4 hours at 37° C. in humidified 5% CO2 atmosphere.
  • Towards the end of the 4 hour incubation time, 22 μl FBS was added to each well for a total concentration of 10% FBS. After addition of serum, the plates were incubated for an additional 44 hours at 37° C. in humidified 5% CO2 atmosphere. At the end of the incubation period, MTT assay was performed according to manufacturer's instructions (Sigma, catalog #M2128) and absorbance was measured at 560 nm using Dynex Opsys MR Plate reader.
  • In FIGS. 1-3, the values were plotted as percent cytotoxicity, i.e as a percentage of the positive control corresponding to 100% cell death. In FIGS. 4-15, 25 and 26, values were plotted as percent viable, i.e as percent of negative control corresponding to 100% viable cells. All assays were performed in quadruplicates.
  • FIG. 1 shows human tumor cell lines treated with SP-1 (20 μM) and assessed for cell viability by an MTT assay 48 hrs post test article addition. All leukemia/lymphoma lines tested were sensitive to SP-1. In addition, SP-1 also induced apoptosis of several solid tumor lines including three small cell lung carcinoma (SCLC) lines, NCI-H220, NCI-H128 and NCI-H146. Conversely, there were several solid tumor lines resistant to SP-1 including non-small cell lung carcinoma (NSCLC) lines A-549 and H-460, MCF7 (breast cancer) and U251 (glioma). FIG. 2 shows seven leukemia/lymphoma human cell lines were treated with 5 μM of either SP-1 or SP-4 for 48 hrs and assessed for cell viability. As shown, all cell lines exhibited similar sensitivity to both macrocycles at this concentration.
  • FIG. 3 shows twelve human solid tumor lines tested for sensitivity to either SP-1 or SP-4 (20 μM). As shown, there seems to be a cell-specific difference of sensitivity for each macrocycle tested. EC50 curves for SP-1, SP-2, SP-3, SP-4, SP-5 and SP-6 for individual cell lines are shown in FIGS. 4-15.
  • Cell viability assays shown in FIGS. 34-52 were performed according to a similar protocol. Cells were split at optimal cell density a day prior to the initiation of the study. The next day, cells were washed twice in serum-free Opti-MEM media and 4000 cells/well were added to each well in a final volume of 100 μl Opti-MEM. For serum-free experiments, macrocycles were diluted from 2 mM stocks (100% DMSO) in sterile water to prepare 400 μM working solutions. A 40 μM solution was then generated by ten-fold dilution in assay buffer. The macrocycle and controls were then serially diluted two-fold in assay buffer in dosing plates to provide concentrations between 1.2 and 40 μM, respectively. For experiments in 2% human serum, macrocycles were diluted from 10 mM stocks (100% DMSO) in sterile water to prepare 1 mM working solutions. A 100 μM solution was generated by ten-fold dilution in assay buffer. The macrocycles and controls were then serially diluted two-fold in assay buffer in dosing plates to provide concentrations between 3 and 100 μM, respectively. 50 μl of each dilution was then added to the appropriate wells of the test plate to achieve final concentrations of the macrocycle between 0.6 to 20 μM (for serum free experiment) or 1.5 to 50 μM (for 2% serum experiment), respectively. Controls included wells without macrocycles containing the same concentration of DMSO as the macrocycle-containing wells, wells containing 0.1% Triton X-100, and wells containing no cells. Plates were incubated for 24 hours at 37° C. in a humidified 5% CO2 atmosphere. At the end of a 24 hr incubation period, a CellTiter-Glo Luminescent Cell Viability Assay was performed according to manufacturer's instructions (Promega, catalog #G7571) and the luminescence was measured using a BIO-TEK synergy HT Plate reader. Values were plotted as percent viable, i.e. as a percentage of the negative control value (derived from cells exposed to DMSO only). All assays were performed in duplicate.
  • The following tables summarize the EC50 values (μM) observed with peptidomimetic macrocycles of the invention in various cell lines:
  • EC50 values in serum-free media
    NCI-
    MDA- H82
    MB231- (SCLC-
    Compound Met A375 PC3 OVCAR8 MCL1+)
    SP-1 9.8 11 20 20 2.5
    SP-2 >20 >20 ND >20 >20
    SP-9 2.9 4.1 5.7 7.1 4.2
    SP-10 3.1 5.2 6 8.1 5.7
    SP-4 8.5 8 5 20 4.9
    SP-11 2 4.3 4.6 3.2 1.2
    SP-15 0.9 0.8 2.1 1.8 ND
    SP-23 0.6 1 2 0.9 0.6
    SP-12 0.5 0.7 1.9 0.7 0.9
    SP-24 >20 >20 >20 >20 >20
    SP-25 1 1 0.6 1.4 0.5
  • EC50 values in 2% human serum
    MDA-
    MB231-
    Compound Met A375 PC3 OVCAR8
    SP-9 ND ND 25.5 18.4
    SP-10 ND ND 24.4 19.1
    SP-4 40 27 >50 >50
    SP-11 ND ND 23.4 10.7
    SP-15 2.6 2.7 9.3 6.4
    SP-23 3.8 2.7 4.2 4
    SP-24 >50 >50 >50 >50
    SP-25 4.3 3.8 9.5 6.9
    SP-26 >50 >50 >50 >50
  • EC50 values for various liquid tumors
    Molt- RS4; DHL-
    Compound Jurkat SEMK2 4 11 Raji 6 MM1S
    SP-1 2.5 10 4.3 >20 13 7 3.5
    SP-2 >20 >20 >20 >20 >20 ND >20
    SP-3 >20 >20 >20 >20 >20 >20 >20
    SP-9 1.9 8.1 1 4.3 5.7 2.7 5.5
    SP-10 1.9 8.2 1.9 3.5 5 1.9 2.5
    SP-4 1.6 4 2.2 10 9 3.8 4.9
    SP-11 0.9 2.6 1.6 3.7 2.7 0.9 1.9
    SP-15 0.4 0.8 0.7 1.7 1 0.5 0.6
    SP-23 0.9 1 0.6 1 1.8 0.5 0.7
    SP-12 0.4 0.5 0.7 1.71 0.3 ND ND
    SP-24 >20 ND ND ND ND ND ND
    SP-25 0.5 0.9 0.9 1 1.8 0.6 0.6
  • Example 3 BrdU Cell Proliferation Assay
  • hPBLs isolated from two different donors were stimulated or not with 5 μg/ml PHA, 1 μM Ionomycin and 1 μg/ml LPS and treated with either 5 or 20 μM of SP-1 in assay buffer. 1 μM Rapamycin was used as a positive control to inhibit BrdU incorporation. The cells were incubated for 48 hrs under the conditions indicated in FIG. 17. BrdU incorporation was assayed by ELISA according to manufacturer's instructions (Roche, catalog number 11444611001). In FIG. 7, the Y axis shows OD=Absorbance (A405 nm/A492 nm.)
  • Example 4 Efficacy of Peptidomimetic Macrocycles in a Human Leukemia Xenograft Model
  • SEMK2-LN cells stably expressing luciferase were generated as previously described (Armstrong et al (2003) Cancer Cell 3:173-83). 6-8 week old female NOD-SCID mice (Jackson Laboratory) were injected with 5×106 SEMK2-LN cells by tail vein. The animals were imaged as described (Walensky et al., Science 305:1466-1470 (2004)) using Xenogen's In Vivo Imaging System (Caliper Life Sciences) and total body bioluminescence quantified by integration of photonic flux (photons/sec) (Living Imaging Software for Xenogen In Vivo Imaging System, Caliper Life Sciences). Animals were imaged on days 8 and 12, post-injection of leukemic cells, to identify animals with established leukemia. On day 12, prior to the initiation of treatment (treatment day 1), animals were divided into cohorts with statistically equivalent bioluminescence. Leukemic mice received a daily tail vein injection of peptidomimetic macrocycle at 3 or 10 mg/Kg/day for 21 days or 30 mg/Kg/day for 12 days. Animals were imaged at days 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 13 and 17 during treatment, and the resulting tumor reduction is shown in FIG. 18.
  • Example 5 Immunogenicity Determination
  • 6-8 week old Balb/c or KM female mice were immunized with unconjugated SP-1 or SP-4. Sera were collected pre-immunization and 25 μg of each peptide in D5W were injected by tail vein using the following immunization schedule: sera were collected seven days following the first two immunizations at days 1 and 14 and 14 days following the third and fourth immunizations. Antibody titers were determined by indirect ELISA. In brief, microtiter plates were coated with either SP-1 or SP-3 (5 μg/ml) overnight at 4° C. The next day, the plates were washed 5 times with PBS/0.05% Tween20 (PBST) and blocked with 5% non-fat milk/PBST for one hour at 37° C., followed by additional washing with PBST. The anti-sera was serially diluted and added to the coated plates for 1 hr at 37° C. The plates were then washed extensively with PBST and further incubated with either HRP-conjugated anti-mouse IgG or IgM for 1 hr at 37° C. and washed 5 times with PBST prior to the addition of HRP substrate. Plates were incubated at room temperature for 10 minutes and the reaction stopped with 0.5 M oxalic acid solution. Absorbance was read at 450 nm in an ELISA microplate reader. The OD values were determined for both control- and anti-sera at 1:100 dilution. The graphs in FIG. 20 are plotted as the ratio of OD anti-sera/OD control sera. A ratio below 4 was considered negative.
  • Example 6 Melting Temperature (Tm) Determination
  • Lyophilized SP-1 was dissolved in ddH2O to a final concentration of 50 μM. Tm was determined by measuring the circular dichroism (CD) spectra in a Jasco-810 spectropolarimeter at a fixed wavelength of 222 nm between the temperatures of 5-95° C. The following parameters were used for the measurement: data pitch, 0.1° C.; bandwidth, 1 nm and path length, 0.1 cm averaging the signal for 16 seconds. The results are shown in FIG. 21.
  • Example 7 Sample Preparation for Plasma Stability Determination
  • For ex-vivo plasma stability studies 10 μM of SP-1, SP-3, SP-4 and SP-6 were incubated with pre-cleared human and mouse plasma at 37° C. for 0, 15 and 120 minutes. At the end of each incubation time, 100 μL of sample was removed, placed in a fresh low retention eppendorf tube with 300 μl of ice cold MEOH. The samples were centrifuged at 10,000 rpm, the supernatant removed and placed in a fresh low retention eppendorf tube and 200 μl of water was added to each sample. Samples were then analyzed by LC-MS/MS as indicated below. The results are shown in FIGS. 22 and 23.
  • Example 8 Intravenous Pharmacokinetic Analysis
  • The IV dose formulation was prepared by dissolving SP-1 or SP-4 in 5% DMSO/D5W to achieve a 10 mg/Kg/dose. Canulated Crl:CD®(SD) male rats (7-8 weeks old, Charles River Laboratories) were used in these studies. Intravenous doses were administered via the femoral cannula and the animals were dosed at 10 mL/kg per single injection. Blood for pharmacokinetic analysis was collected at 10 time points (0.0833, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 12 and 24 hrs post-dose). Animals were terminated (without necropsy) following their final sample collection.
  • The whole blood samples were centrifuged (˜1500×g) for 10 min at ˜4° C. Plasma was prepared and transferred within 30 min of blood collection/centrifugation to fresh tubes that were frozen and stored in the dark at ˜−70° C. until they were prepared for LC-MS/MS analysis.
  • Sample extraction was achieved by adding 10 μl of 50% formic acid to 100 μL plasma (samples or standards), following by vortexing for 10 seconds. 500 μl acetonitrile was added to the followed by vortexing for 2 minutes and centrifuged at 14,000 rpm for 10 minutes at ˜4° C. Supernatants were transferred to clean tubes and evaporated on trubovap <10 psi at 37° C. Prior to LC-MS/MS analysis samples were reconstituted with 100 μL of 50:50 acetonitrile:water.
  • The peak plasma concentration (Cmax), the time required to achieve the peak plasma concentration (tmax), the plasma terminal half-life (t1/2), the area under the plasma concentration time curve (AUC), the clearance and volume of distribution were calculated from the plasma concentration data. All pharmacokinetic calculations were done using WinNonlin version 4.1 (Pharsight Corp) by non-compartmental analysis. FIG. 24 summarizes the observed results.
  • The following LC-MS/MS method was used. In brief, the LC-MS/MS instruments used was an API 365 (Applied Biosystems). The analytical column was a Phenomenex Synergi (4μ, Polar-RP, 50 mm×2 mm) and mobile phases A (0.1% formic acid in water) and B (0.1% formic acid in methanol) were pumped at a flow rate of 0.4 ml/min to achieve the following gradient:
  • MRM: 814.0 to 374.2 (positive ionization)
    Time
    (min) % B
    0 15
    0.5 15
    1.5 95
    4.5 95
    4.6 15
    8.0 Stop
  • Example 9 FACS Analysis of Detection of FITC-Labeled Peptidomimetic Macrocycles in Treated Cells
  • Cells (e.g. Jurkat cells) were cultured in suspension in RPMI1640 medium with 2 mM L-Glutamine (Invitrogen) and supplemented with 10% FBS and 1% penicillin-Streptomycin. Cells were subcultured a day prior to the day of experiment to keep them in an exponential growing phase. To analyze the uptake of FITC-labeled peptidomimetic macrocycles by FACS, exponentially growing Jurkat cells were seeded in 0.9 ml of serum-free medium at density of 1×106 cells. Cells were allowed to settle down until compounds were diluted. Test compounds were diluted to 2 mM stock in DMSO, followed by dilution to 400 μM in sterile water; further dilution to 100 μM was done using OptiMEM. Thus 100 μl of 100 uM FITC-labeled peptidomimetic macrocycle was then added to appropriate wells to achieve a final concentration of 10 μM in 1 ml volume. Plates were returned to 37° C., 5% CO2 incubators for designated time points. At the end of each time point, the cell suspension was diluted with media, washed twice and subjected to trypsin (0.25%) for 15 min at 37° C. Cells were then washed with OptiMem and finally resuspended in 500 μl of PBS. Cellular fluorescence was measured using Beckman Coulter FACS instrument counting at least 20000 events per sample. Analysis was done using Summit version 4, Dako Colorado, Inc.
  • Example 10 Protein-Ligand Binding Experiments
  • Protein-ligand binding experiments were conducted according to the following representative procedure outlined for a system-wide control experiment using 1 μM SP-4 plus 5 μM Bcl-xL. A 1 μl DMSO aliquot of a 40 μM stock solution of peptidomimetic macrocycle was dissolved in 19 μl of PBS (Phosphate-buffered saline: 50 mM, pH 7.5 Phosphate buffer containing 150 mM NaCl). The resulting solution was mixed by repeated pipetting and clarified by centrifugation at 10 000 g for 10 min. To a 4 μl aliquot of the resulting supernatant was added 4 μl of 10 μM BCL-xL in PBS. Each 8.0 μl experimental sample thus contained 40 pmol (1.5 μg) of protein at 5.0 μM concentration in PBS plus 1 μM peptidomimetic macrocycle and 2.5% DMSO. Duplicate samples thus prepared for each concentration point were incubated for 60 min at room temperature, and then chilled to 4° C. prior to size-exclusion chromatography-LC-MS analysis of 5.0 μL injections. Samples containing a target protein, protein-ligand complexes, and unbound compounds were injected onto an SEC column, where the complexes were separated from non-binding component by a rapid SEC step. The SEC column eluate was monitored using UV detectors to confirm that the early-eluting protein fraction, which elutes in the void volume of the SEC column, was well resolved from unbound components that are retained on the column. After the peak containing the protein and protein-ligand complexes elutes from the primary UV detector, it entered a sample loop where it was excised from the flow stream of the SEC stage and transferred directly to the LC-MS via a valving mechanism. The (M+3H)3′ ion of ALRN-0034 is observed by ESI-MS at m/z 883.8, confirming the detection of the protein-ligand complex.
  • Example 11 Competitive Binding Experiments
  • A mixture of ligands at 40 μM per component was prepared by combining 2 μL aliquots of 400 μM stocks of each of the three compounds with 14 μL of DMSO. Then, 1 μL aliquots of this 40 μM per component mixture were combined with 1 μl DMSO aliquots of a serially diluted stock solution of titrant peptidomimetic macrocycle (10, 5, 2.5, . . . , 0.078 mM). These 2 μL samples were dissolved in 38 μL of PBS. The resulting solutions were mixed by repeated pipetting and clarified by centrifugation at 10 000 g for 10 min. To 4.0 μL aliquots of the resulting supernatants was added 4.0 μl of 10 μM BCL-xL in PBS. Each 8.0 μL experimental sample thus contained 40 pmol (1.5 μg) of protein at 5.0 μM concentration in PBS plus 0.5 μM ligand, 2.5% DMSO, and varying concentrations (125, 62.5, . . . , 0.98 μM) of the titrant peptidomimetic macrocycle. Duplicate samples thus prepared for each concentration point were incubated at room temperature for 60 min, then chilled to 4° C. prior to SEC-LC-MS analysis of 2.0 μl injections. Additional details on these and other methods are provided in “A General Technique to Rank Protein-Ligand Binding Affinities and Determine Allosteric vs. Direct Binding Site Competition in Compound Mixtures.” Annis, D. A.; Nazef, N.; Chuang, C. C.; Scott, M. P.; Nash, H. M. J. Am. Chem. Soc. 2004, 126, 15495-15503; also in “ALIS: An Affinity Selection-Mass Spectrometry System for the Discovery and Characterization of Protein-Ligand Interactions” D. A. Annis, C.-C. Chuang, and N. Nazef. In Mass Spectrometry in Medicinal Chemistry. Edited by Wanner K, Wither G: Wiley-VCH; 2007:121-184. Mannhold R, Kubinyi H, Folkers G (Series Editors): Methods and Principles in Medicinal Chemistry.
  • Example 12 Quantitative Analysis of FITC-Labeled Peptidomimetic Macrocycle Uptake Using Fluorimetry
  • Cells (e.g. INA-6 or Jurkat cells) were cultured in suspension in RPMI1640 medium with 2 mM L-Glutamine and (Invitrogen) supplemented with 10% FBS and 1% penicillin-Streptomycin as well as 1 ng/ml of recombinant human IL-6 supplements in the case of INA-6 cells. Cells were subcultured a day prior to the day of experiment to keep them in an exponential growing phase. To analyze the uptake of FITC-labeled peptidomimetic macrocycles in cells, exponentially growing cells were seeded in 0.9 ml of serum-free medium at density of 0.5×106 cells. Cells were allowed to settle down until compounds were diluted. Test compounds were diluted to 2 mM stock in DMSO, followed by dilution to 400 μM in sterile water; further dilution to 100 μM was done using OptiMEM. Thus 100 μl of 100 uM FITC-labeled peptidomimetic macrocycle was then added to appropriate wells to achieve a final concentration of 10 μM in 1 ml volume. Plates were returned to 37′C, 5% CO2 incubators for designated time points. If needed, further dilutions of test compounds were also prepared in OptiMEM. At the end of each time point, cells were harvested, washed twice with RPMI supplemented with FBS, and washed once with PBS+0.5% BSA. Pelleted cells were resuspended and incubated with 0.25% Trypsin-EDTA for 15 min at 37° C., 5% CO2. Post-incubation, cells were washed with media containing serum once and twice with PBS with 0.5% BSA. At the end of washes, cells were lysed with Triton X-100-containing cell lysis buffer from Cell Signaling Technologies. Fluorescence intensity was measured on a BioTek Synergy 4 instrument. Dilutions of FITC-labeled peptidomimetic macrocycles for the standard curves made in cell lysis buffer and were used for quantitation of the amount of peptidomimetic macrocycles in cells. Analysis was done using Gen 5 software provided by Biotek Inc.
  • Example 13 Efficacy of Peptidomimetic Macrocycles in an Orthotopic Prostate Tumor Model
  • Experiments were conducted using a Bioware® Cell Line (PC-3M-Luc-C6) and using 5×106 cells/mouse/100 μl. A total of 70 nu/nu male mice were used (7-10 weeks old). Male nu/nu mice were anesthetized and incisions along the posterior midline of their abdomens, right above the prostate, were created. The bladder was refracted and pressed lightly to expose the prostate. PC-3M-luc-C6 cells (5×105) were slowly injected into either dorsal prostatic lobe. The peritoneal incision was sutured and the skin was closed. The mice were given buprenorphine (0.1 mg/kg in 50 μl) subcutaneously after the surgical procedure. Animals were first imaged on day 7 after wound healing. The final 50 mice were grouped into 5 groups (10 mice per group) based on BLI before the start of the treatment. The experimental mice were imaged twice weekly starting from day 14 for 2.5 weeks. At the end of the experiment, the tumors were dissected and weighed. The tumors were then cut into two pieces for snap freeze and fixed in 10% formalin. Test compound treatment was initiated after two stable or increasing bioluminescent signals were registered from the tumor cell inoculation site. Several test groups were used: Group 1 (Vehicle, IV daily dosing), Group 2 (test compound, IV daily dosing at 10 mg/kg), Group 3 (Vehicle, i.p. daily dosing), Group 4 (test compound, i.p. daily dosing at 10 mg/kg), and Group 5 (Taxotere, IV weekly dosing for two doses at 30 mg/kg). The test peptidomimetic macrocycles were formulated as follows. Only low retention/siliconized plastic tubes and tips were used. A 60 mg/mL stock solution of each peptidomimetic macrocycle was prepared by dissolving 140 mg of each macrocycle into 2.3 mL of 100% DMSO. The stock solution was divided into 10 aliquots of 0.23 mL for daily dosing (14 mg per vial) and kept frozen at −20 C. One vial was thawed on each day of dosing. Working concentrations (2 mg/mL) of each macrocycle were prepared by diluting one aliquot of the stock solution into 6.5 mL of filter sterilized 5% dextrose. The DMSO stock was added dropwise into the D5W with constant stirring. The solution was adjusted to a final volume of 7 mL with 5% dextrose, without filter sterilizing the final dose formation. The dosing volume was 5 μL/g (125 μL for a 25 g mouse). The dose is delivered to the mouse by slow bolus (over 30 seconds). FIG. 45 shows a time treatment for the prostate cancer orthotopic xenograft model. The bioluminescence of the prostate region of each experimental animal was measured and expressed as photons/second. The in vivo tumor growth kinetics were graphed and two-way ANOVA for repeated measure (using time and treatment as two main factors) were used. The kinetic mouse images from representative mice from each group were obtained and are shown in FIG. 43.
  • Example 14 Orthotopic Xenograft Tumor Model Using Ovarian Cancer (SKOV3-Luc) Tumors
  • 1×106 SKOV3-Luc cells stably expressing firefly luciferase are injected into the ovarian bursa of anesthetized SCID-beige mice (9 weeks old, female). The animals are monitored weekly by bioluminescent imaging (BLI). Test compound treatment is initiated after two stable or increasing bioluminescent signals are registered from the tumor cell inoculation site (up to 9 weeks in this model). Prior to the initiation of the treatment animals are randomized into control and treatment groups (10 mice/group). Animals are treated by daily injection (IP, IV or SC) of test compound (low, med, high doses) and vehicle control for 10, 14 and/or 21 days, as needed. Efficacy is determined by comparison of the tumor burden between peptidomimetic macrocycle and vehicle control treated animals. Tumor growth/volume is monitored by BLI after IP injection of 150 mg/kg D-luciferin and imaged by IVIS Imaging System both dorsally and ventrally. Metastatic lesions can be imaged by shielding the primary tumor bioluminescence. At the conclusion of the experiment, the animals are humanely euthanized and the ovarian tumor is excised, weighed and prepared for subsequent analysis.
  • Example 15 Orthotopic Xenograft Tumor Model Using Breast Cancer (MDA-MB-231-Luc) Tumors
  • 1×106 MDA-MB-231-Luc cells stably expressing firefly luciferase are injected into the breast tissue of anesthetized SCID-beige mice (9 weeks old, female). The animals are monitored weekly by bioluminescent imaging. Test compound treatment is initiated after two stable or increasing bioluminescent signals are registered from the tumor cell inoculation site. Prior to the initiation of the treatment animals are randomized into control and treatment groups (10 mice/group). Animals are treated by daily injection (IP, IV or SC) of test compound (low, med, high doses) and vehicle control for 10, 14 and/or 21 days, as needed. Efficacy is determined by comparison of the tumor burden between test compound and vehicle control treated animals. Tumor growth/volume is monitored by bioluminescent imaging (BLI) after IP injection of 150 mg/kg D-luciferin and imaged by IVIS Imaging System both dorsally and ventrally. Metastatic lesions can be imaged by shielding the primary tumor bioluminescence. At the conclusion of the experiment, the animals are humanely euthanized and the ovarian tumor is excised, weighed and prepared for subsequent analysis.
  • Example 16 Subcutaneous Xenograft Tumor Model Using Melanoma (A375) or Small Cell Lung Cancer (NCI-H-82) Tumors
  • An optimized amount of tumor cells is injected into the flank of anesthetized NOD/SCID or nu/nu mice, as required, by subcutaneous injection. When the tumors reach an average volume of 20-50 mm3, the animals are sorted into control and treatment groups (10 mice/group). Animals are treated by daily injection (IP, IV or SC) of test compound (low, medium, and high doses) and vehicle control for 10, 14 and/or 21 days, as needed. Efficacy is determined by comparison of the tumor volume between test compound and vehicle control treated animals. Tumor growth/volume is monitored by external caliper measurement (L×W×D). At the conclusion of the experiment, the animals are humanely euthanized and the tumor is excised, weighed and prepared for subsequent analysis.
  • Example 17 Metastatic Tumor Model Using Metastatic Breast Cancer (MDA-MB-231-Met-Luc) Tumors
  • Anesthetized NOD/SCID mice (9 weeks old, female) are injected with the optimized amount of MDA-MB-213-MET-Luc cells stably expressing firefly luciferase into the left ventricle of the heart (hence directly into arterial system). A successful intracardiac injection is indicated by day zero images showing a systemic bioluminescence distributed throughout the animals and only mice with evidence of a satisfactory injection will remain in the experiment. The animals are sorted into control and treatment groups (10 mice/group). Animals are treated by daily injection (IP, IV or SC) of test compound (low, medium, and high doses) and vehicle control for 10, 14 and/or 21 days, as needed. The development of subsequent metastasis is monitored twice a week in vivo by BLI after IP injection of 150 mg/kg D-luciferin and imaged by IVIS Imaging System both dorsally and ventrally. Lung and bone metastases in particular are monitored. At the conclusion of the experiment, the animals are humanely euthanized and tissues of interest are excised and prepared for ex vivo imaging and subsequent analysis.
  • The above tumor models are described in more detail in Jenkins, D. E. et al., Clin. & Exp. Metastasis. 2003, 20, 745-756.; Scatena C. D. et al., Prostate 2004, 59, 292-303; Greenaway J. Et al., Mol. Cancer Ther. 2009, 8, 64-74; Guan, J. et al., Cancer Chemo Pharma. 2008, Online Pub December 24; and Lelekakis, M. et al., Clin & Exp Metastasis. 1999, 163-170.
  • While preferred embodiments of the present invention have been shown and described herein, it will be obvious to those skilled in the art that such embodiments are provided by way of example only. Numerous variations, changes, and substitutions will now occur to those skilled in the art without departing from the invention. It should be understood that various alternatives to the embodiments of the invention described herein may be employed in practicing the invention. It is intended that the following claims define the scope of the invention and that methods and structures within the scope of these claims and their equivalents be covered thereby.

Claims (31)

1.-87. (canceled)
88. A peptidomimetic macrocycle capable of binding MCL-1, wherein the peptidomimetic macrocycle comprises a polypeptide and a crosslinker connecting two amino acid residues of the polypeptide and has Formula (I):
Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00125
wherein:
each A, C, D, and E, is independently a natural or non-natural amino acid;
each B is independently a natural or non-natural amino acid, an amino acid analog,
Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00126
[—NH-L3-CO-], [—NH-L3-SO2-], or [—NH-L3-];
each R1 and R2 is independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroalkyl, or heterocycloalkyl, each of which except —H is unsubstituted or substituted with halo-;
each R3 is independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, each of which except —H is optionally substituted with R5;
each L is independently a macrocycle-forming linker of the formula -L1-L2- or the formula -L1-L2-L3-;
each L1 and L2 and L3 is independently alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, heteroalkylene, cycloalkylene, heterocycloalkylene, arylene, heteroarylene, or [—R4—K—R4-]n, each being optionally substituted with R5;
each R4 is independently alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, heteroalkylene, cycloalkylene, heterocycloalkylene, arylene, or heteroarylene;
each K is independently O, S, SO, SO2, CO, CO2, or CONR3;
each R5 is independently halogen, alkyl, —OR6, —N(R6)2, —SR6, —SORE, —SO2R6, —CO2R6, a fluorescent moiety, a radioisotope, or a therapeutic agent;
each R6 is independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, a fluorescent moiety, a radioisotope, or a therapeutic agent;
each R7 is independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, each of which except —H is optionally substituted with R5, or part of a cyclic structure with a D residue;
each R8 is independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, each of which except —H is optionally substituted with R5, or part of a cyclic structure with an E residue;
each v and w is independently an integer from 1-1000;
each x, y, and z is independently an integer from 0-10;
u is an integer from 1-10;
each n is independently an integer from 1-5; and
wherein the peptidomimetic macrocycle possesses an affinity (KD) of 1 μM or less for MCL-1.
89. The peptidomimetic macrocycle of claim 88, wherein the peptidomimetic macrocycle possesses an affinity (KD) of about 100 nM or less for MCL-1.
90. The peptidomimetic macrocycle of claim 88, wherein the peptidomimetic macrocycle antagonizes the interaction between MCL-1 and a pro-apoptotic protein.
91. The peptidomimetic macrocycle of claim 88, wherein the peptidomimetic macrocycle comprises a BH3 domain.
92. The peptidomimetic macrocycle of claim 88, wherein the peptidomimetic macrocycle is at least about 60% identical to an amino acid sequence IWIAQELR*IGD*FNAYYARR (SEQ ID NO:1) wherein each * is independently a non-natural amino acid.
93. The peptidomimetic macrocycle of claim 88, wherein the peptidomimetic macrocycle is at least about 80% identical to an amino acid sequence IWIAQELR*IGD*FNAYYARR (SEQ ID NO:1) wherein each * is independently a non-natural amino acid.
94. The peptidomimetic macrocycle of claim 88, wherein the peptidomimetic macrocycle comprises an α-helix.
95. The peptidomimetic macrocycle of claim 88, wherein an α-carbon atom in the peptidomimetic macrocycle is additionally substituted with independent substituents of formula R—, wherein R— is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroalkyl, or heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with halo-.
96. The peptidomimetic macrocycle of claim 88, wherein L is the formula -L1-L2-, and each L1 and L2 is independently C3-C6 alkylene or C3-C6 alkenylene.
97. The peptidomimetic macrocycle of claim 88, wherein L is the formula -L1-L2-L3-, and each L1 and L3 is independently C3-C6 alkylene, and L2 is heteroarylene.
98. The peptidomimetic macrocycle of claim 88, wherein R1 and R2 are methyl.
99. The peptidomimetic macrocycle of claim 88, wherein R1 and R2 are H.
100. The peptidomimetic macrocycle of claim 88, wherein x+y+z is 6.
101. The peptidomimetic macrocycle of claim 88, wherein x+y+z is 3.
102. The peptidomimetic macrocycle of claim 88, wherein [A]x-[B]y—[C]z is IGD.
103. The peptidomimetic macrocycle of claim 88, wherein w is 3.
104. The peptidomimetic macrocycle of claim 88, wherein w is 8.
105. The peptidomimetic macrocycle of claim 88, wherein v is 8.
106. A method of treating a disorder in a human patient in need thereof comprising administering to the patient a peptidomimetic macrocycle capable of binding MCL-1, wherein the peptidomimetic macrocycle comprises a polypeptide and a crosslinker connecting two amino acid residues of the polypeptide and has Formula (I):
Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00127
wherein:
each A, C, D, and E, is independently a natural or non-natural amino acid;
each B is independently a natural or non-natural amino acid, an amino acid analog,
Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00128
[—NH-L3-CO-], [—NH-L3-SO2-], or [—NH-L3-];
each R1 and R2 is independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroalkyl, or heterocycloalkyl, each of which except —H is unsubstituted or substituted with halo-;
each R3 is independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, each of which except —H is optionally substituted with R5;
each L is independently a macrocycle-forming linker of the formula -L1-L2- or the formula -L1-L2-L3-;
each L1 and L2 and L3 is independently alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, heteroalkylene, cycloalkylene, heterocycloalkylene, arylene, heteroarylene, or [—R4—K—R4-]n, each being optionally substituted with R5;
each R4 is independently alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, heteroalkylene, cycloalkylene, heterocycloalkylene, arylene, or heteroarylene;
each K is independently O, S, SO, SO2, CO, CO2, or CONR3;
each R5 is independently halogen, alkyl, —OR6, —N(R6)2, —SR6, —SORE, —SO2R6, —CO2R6, a fluorescent moiety, a radioisotope, or a therapeutic agent;
each R6 is independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, a fluorescent moiety, a radioisotope, or a therapeutic agent;
each R7 is independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, each of which except —H is optionally substituted with R5, or part of a cyclic structure with a D residue;
each R8 is independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, each of which except —H is optionally substituted with R5, or part of a cyclic structure with an E residue;
each v and w is independently an integer from 1-1000;
each x, y, and z is independently an integer from 0-10;
u is an integer from 1-10;
each n is independently an integer from 1-5; and
wherein the peptidomimetic macrocycle possesses an affinity (KD) of 1 μM or less for MCL-1.
107. The method of claim 106, wherein the disorder is cancer.
108. The method of claim 107, wherein the cancer is selected from the group consisting of ovarian cancer, skin cancer, prostate cancer, renal cancer, breast cancer, pancreatic cancer, small-cell lung cancer, colon cancer, liver cancer, Multiple myeloma, Burkitt's lymphoma, acute lymphocytic leukemia (ALL) of T cell lineage or B cell lineage or mixed lineage, Chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL), Ph+ acute lymphocytic leukemia, Cutaneous T cell lymphoma (CTCL), Acute myelocytic leukemia (AML), Chronic Myelocytic leukemia, and follicular lymphoma.
109. The method of claim 107, wherein the cancer is resistant to a compound that possesses an affinity greater than 10 μM for MCL-1.
110. The method of claim 107, wherein the cancer is resistant to ABT-737 or an analog thereof.
111. The method of claim 107, wherein, the peptidomimetic macrocycle is a BIM polypeptide and the cancer is at least 2-fold less sensitive to treatment using a corresponding uncrosslinked polypeptide or a corresponding crosslinked BID polypeptide as measured in an in vitro cell viability assay.
112. The method of claim 107, wherein the peptidomimetic macrocycle shows an EC50 lower than 5 μM when tested in an in vitro cell viability assay against a cell line derived from the cancer.
113. The method of claim 106, wherein the disorder is a metabolic disorder or an immunoproliferative disorder.
114. The method of claim 106, wherein the peptidomimetic macrocycle is administered in conjunction with a standard method of care selected from the group consisting of chemotherapy, radiation therapy, and surgery.
115. The method of claim 106, wherein the method further comprises performing an assay to detect a level of MCL-1 in the patient and administering to the patient the peptidomimetic macrocycle if the detected level of MCL-1 is aberrant or irregular.
116. The method of claim 106, wherein the peptidomimetic macrocycle has a reduced immune response in an in vivo assay as compared to a corresponding uncrosslinked polypeptide.
117. A method of preparing a therapeutic peptidomimetic macrocycle capable of binding MCL-1 comprising:
(a) preparing a peptidomimetic macrocycle by forming a crosslinking two amino acid residues of a polypeptide to stabilize a secondary structure of the peptidomimetic macrocycle;
(b) testing the peptidomimetic macrocycle for a reduced antibody response in an in vivo assay as compared to a corresponding uncrosslinked polypeptide; and
(c) selecting the tested peptidomimetic macrocycle as the therapeutic peptidomimetic macrocycle if the tested peptidomimetic macrocycle has a reduced immune response relative to the corresponding uncrosslinked polypeptide; and
wherein the peptidomimetic macrocycle comprises a polypeptide and a crosslinker connecting two amino acid residues of the polypeptide and has Formula (I):
Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00129
wherein:
each A, C, D, and E, is independently a natural or non-natural amino acid;
each B is independently a natural or non-natural amino acid, an amino acid analog,
Figure US20150038430A1-20150205-C00130
[—NH-L3-CO-], [—NH-L3-SO2-], or [—NH-L3-];
each R1 and R2 is independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heteroalkyl, or heterocycloalkyl, each of which except —H is unsubstituted or substituted with halo-;
each R3 is independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, each of which except —H is optionally substituted with R5;
each L is independently a macrocycle-forming linker of the formula -L1-L2- or the formula -L1-L2-L3-;
each L1 and L2 and L3 is independently alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, heteroalkylene, cycloalkylene, heterocycloalkylene, arylene, heteroarylene, or [—R4—K—R4-]n, each being optionally substituted with R5;
each R4 is independently alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, heteroalkylene, cycloalkylene, heterocycloalkylene, arylene, or heteroarylene;
each K is independently O, S, SO, SO2, CO, CO2, or CONR3;
each R5 is independently halogen, alkyl, —OR6, —N(R6)2, —SR6, —SORE, —SO2R6, —CO2R6, a fluorescent moiety, a radioisotope, or a therapeutic agent;
each R6 is independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, a fluorescent moiety, a radioisotope, or a therapeutic agent;
each R7 is independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, each of which except —H is optionally substituted with R5, or part of a cyclic structure with a D residue;
each R8 is independently —H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, each of which except —H is optionally substituted with R5, or part of a cyclic structure with an E residue;
each v and w is independently an integer from 1-1000;
each x, y, and z is independently an integer from 0-10;
u is an integer from 1-10;
each n is independently an integer from 1-5; and
wherein the peptidomimetic macrocycle possesses an affinity (KD) of 1 μM or less for MCL-1.
US14/325,933 2008-02-08 2014-07-08 Therapeutic peptidomimetic macrocycles Abandoned US20150038430A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US14/325,933 US20150038430A1 (en) 2008-02-08 2014-07-08 Therapeutic peptidomimetic macrocycles
US16/023,606 US20190071469A1 (en) 2008-02-08 2018-06-29 Therapeutic peptidomimetic macrocycles

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US2732608P 2008-02-08 2008-02-08
US12038008P 2008-12-05 2008-12-05
US12/378,047 US20090275519A1 (en) 2008-02-08 2009-02-09 Therapeutic peptidomimetic macrocycles
US13/352,223 US8808694B2 (en) 2008-02-08 2012-01-17 Therapeutic peptidomimetic macrocycles
US14/325,933 US20150038430A1 (en) 2008-02-08 2014-07-08 Therapeutic peptidomimetic macrocycles

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/352,223 Continuation US8808694B2 (en) 2008-02-08 2012-01-17 Therapeutic peptidomimetic macrocycles

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US16/023,606 Continuation US20190071469A1 (en) 2008-02-08 2018-06-29 Therapeutic peptidomimetic macrocycles

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20150038430A1 true US20150038430A1 (en) 2015-02-05

Family

ID=40952614

Family Applications (4)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US12/378,047 Abandoned US20090275519A1 (en) 2008-02-08 2009-02-09 Therapeutic peptidomimetic macrocycles
US13/352,223 Expired - Fee Related US8808694B2 (en) 2008-02-08 2012-01-17 Therapeutic peptidomimetic macrocycles
US14/325,933 Abandoned US20150038430A1 (en) 2008-02-08 2014-07-08 Therapeutic peptidomimetic macrocycles
US16/023,606 Abandoned US20190071469A1 (en) 2008-02-08 2018-06-29 Therapeutic peptidomimetic macrocycles

Family Applications Before (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US12/378,047 Abandoned US20090275519A1 (en) 2008-02-08 2009-02-09 Therapeutic peptidomimetic macrocycles
US13/352,223 Expired - Fee Related US8808694B2 (en) 2008-02-08 2012-01-17 Therapeutic peptidomimetic macrocycles

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US16/023,606 Abandoned US20190071469A1 (en) 2008-02-08 2018-06-29 Therapeutic peptidomimetic macrocycles

Country Status (12)

Country Link
US (4) US20090275519A1 (en)
EP (2) EP2242503A4 (en)
JP (2) JP2011511076A (en)
KR (1) KR20100126361A (en)
CN (2) CN104474529A (en)
BR (1) BRPI0907754A2 (en)
CA (1) CA2714251C (en)
DE (1) DE112009000300T5 (en)
GB (1) GB2471588A (en)
IL (2) IL207421A0 (en)
WO (1) WO2009099677A2 (en)
ZA (1) ZA201005741B (en)

Cited By (15)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9493509B2 (en) 2007-02-23 2016-11-15 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Triazole macrocycle systems
US9522947B2 (en) 2011-10-18 2016-12-20 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Peptidomimetic macrocycles
US9604919B2 (en) 2012-11-01 2017-03-28 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Disubstituted amino acids and methods of preparation and use thereof
US9957299B2 (en) 2010-08-13 2018-05-01 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Peptidomimetic macrocycles
US10022422B2 (en) 2009-01-14 2018-07-17 Alleron Therapeutics, Inc. Peptidomimetic macrocycles
US10023613B2 (en) 2015-09-10 2018-07-17 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Peptidomimetic macrocycles as modulators of MCL-1
US10059741B2 (en) 2015-07-01 2018-08-28 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Peptidomimetic macrocycles
US10227380B2 (en) 2012-02-15 2019-03-12 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Triazole-crosslinked and thioether-crosslinked peptidomimetic macrocycles
US10253067B2 (en) 2015-03-20 2019-04-09 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Peptidomimetic macrocycles and uses thereof
US10300109B2 (en) 2009-09-22 2019-05-28 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Peptidomimetic macrocycles
US10301351B2 (en) 2007-03-28 2019-05-28 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Stitched polypeptides
US10328117B2 (en) 2006-12-14 2019-06-25 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Bis-sulfhydryl macrocyclization systems
US10471120B2 (en) 2014-09-24 2019-11-12 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Peptidomimetic macrocycles and uses thereof
US10905739B2 (en) 2014-09-24 2021-02-02 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Peptidomimetic macrocycles and formulations thereof
US11541027B2 (en) 2014-04-04 2023-01-03 Del Mar Pharmaceuticals (Bc) Ltd. Use of dianhydrogalactitol and analogs or derivatives thereof in combination with platinum-containing antineoplastic agents to treat non-small-cell carcinoma of the lung and brain metastases

Families Citing this family (37)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP2997973A1 (en) 2006-11-15 2016-03-23 Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, Inc. Stabalized maml peptides and uses thereof
US7981998B2 (en) * 2006-12-14 2011-07-19 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Bis-sulfhydryl macrocyclization systems
US8889632B2 (en) 2007-01-31 2014-11-18 Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, Inc. Stabilized p53 peptides and uses thereof
US20090275519A1 (en) 2008-02-08 2009-11-05 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Therapeutic peptidomimetic macrocycles
CN102482336B (en) * 2008-09-22 2015-05-06 爱勒让治疗公司 Peptidomimetic macrocycles
US9458202B2 (en) 2008-11-24 2016-10-04 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Peptidomimetic macrocycles with improved properties
BR112012008831A2 (en) * 2009-10-14 2019-09-24 Aileron Therapeutics Inc enhanced peptideomimetic macrocycles.
GB0918579D0 (en) 2009-10-22 2009-12-09 Imp Innovations Ltd Gadd45beta targeting agents
WO2011150360A1 (en) 2010-05-28 2011-12-01 The Board Of Regents Of The University Of Texas System Oligo-benzamide compounds and their use
US9169295B2 (en) 2010-10-13 2015-10-27 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Macrocycles and macrocycle stabilized peptides
CA2817568A1 (en) 2010-11-12 2012-05-18 The Salk Institute For Biological Studies Intellectual Property And Tech Nology Transfer Cancer therapies and diagnostics
WO2012083078A2 (en) 2010-12-15 2012-06-21 The Research Foundation Of State University Of New York Croos-linked peptides and proteins, methods of making same, and uses thereof
WO2013078277A1 (en) 2011-11-23 2013-05-30 The Board Of Regents Of The University Of Texas System Oligo-benzamide compounds and their use in treating cancers
WO2013078288A1 (en) * 2011-11-23 2013-05-30 The Board Of Regents Of The University Of Texas System Oligo-benzamide compounds for use in treating cancers
WO2013116829A1 (en) 2012-02-03 2013-08-08 The Trustees Of Princeton University Novel engineered potent cytotoxic stapled bh3 peptides
WO2013123266A1 (en) 2012-02-15 2013-08-22 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Peptidomimetic macrocycles
CN104797267A (en) * 2012-06-26 2015-07-22 德玛医药 Methods for treating tyrosine-kinase-inhibitor-resistant malignancies in patients with genetic polymorphisms or ahi1 dysregulations or mutations employing dianhydrogalactitol, diacetyldianhydrogalactitol, dibromodulcitol, or analogs or derivatives thereof
WO2014138429A2 (en) 2013-03-06 2014-09-12 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Peptidomimetic macrocycles and use thereof in regulating hif1alpha
WO2014168986A1 (en) 2013-04-08 2014-10-16 Brown Dennis M Therapeutic benefit of suboptimally administered chemical compounds
CA2924109A1 (en) 2013-09-13 2015-03-19 The California Institute For Biomedical Research Modified therapeutic agents and compositions thereof
KR102455171B1 (en) 2013-12-18 2022-10-14 더 스크립스 리서치 인스티튜트 Modified therapeutic agents, stapled peptide lipid conjugates, and compositions thereof
CN106604928A (en) * 2014-04-02 2017-04-26 罗契斯特大学 Macrocyclic peptidomimetics for alpha-helix mimicry
CA2979999A1 (en) * 2015-03-18 2016-09-22 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Selective mcl-1 binding peptides
US10286079B2 (en) 2015-09-22 2019-05-14 The Regents Of The University Of California Modified cytotoxins and their therapeutic use
KR20180045001A (en) 2015-09-22 2018-05-03 더 리젠츠 오브 더 유니버시티 오브 캘리포니아 Modified cytotoxins and their therapeutic uses
JP7286317B2 (en) 2015-10-27 2023-06-05 エフ. ホフマン-ラ ロシュ アーゲー Peptide macrocycles against Acinetobacter baumannii
US20190077840A1 (en) * 2015-10-30 2019-03-14 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Selective mcl-1 binding peptides
JP2019525947A (en) 2016-06-01 2019-09-12 エムスリー・バイオテクノロジー・インコーポレイテッドM3 Biotechnology, Inc. Compound
US11198715B2 (en) 2016-07-22 2021-12-14 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Selective Bfl-1 peptides
EP3388444A1 (en) 2017-04-10 2018-10-17 F. Hoffmann-La Roche AG Anti-bacterial peptide macrocycles and use thereof
US11524979B2 (en) 2017-06-15 2022-12-13 University Of Washington Macrocyclic polypeptides
US11505573B2 (en) 2018-03-28 2022-11-22 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Peptide macrocycles against Acinetobacter baumannii
US11819532B2 (en) 2018-04-23 2023-11-21 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Peptide macrocycles against Acinetobacter baumannii
US11091522B2 (en) 2018-07-23 2021-08-17 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Peptidomimetic macrocycles and uses thereof
EP3852783A1 (en) 2018-09-17 2021-07-28 Massachusetts Institute of Technology Peptides selective for bcl-2 family proteins
US20200289609A1 (en) * 2019-03-15 2020-09-17 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Peptidomimetic macrocycles and uses thereof
WO2023069332A1 (en) * 2021-10-22 2023-04-27 Merck Sharp & Dohme Llc Cell permeable macrocyclic peptides useful for eif4e cap-binding site inhibition

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6815426B2 (en) * 2001-02-16 2004-11-09 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Angiogenesis-inhibitory tripeptides, compositions and their methods of use

Family Cites Families (63)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US753819A (en) * 1903-04-08 1904-03-01 George Jones Atkins Electrode.
US5712418A (en) * 1989-10-23 1998-01-27 Research Corporation Technologies, Inc. Synthesis and use of amino acid fluorides as peptide coupling reagents
DE69118826T2 (en) 1990-11-27 1996-11-14 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Propenamide derivatives, their polymers, copolymers and their use
US5364851A (en) 1991-06-14 1994-11-15 International Synthecon, Llc Conformationally restricted biologically active peptides, methods for their production and uses thereof
AU691645B2 (en) * 1992-04-03 1998-05-21 California Institute Of Technology High activity ruthenium or osmium metal carbene complexes for olefin metathesis reactions and synthesis thereof
US5411860A (en) * 1992-04-07 1995-05-02 The Johns Hopkins University Amplification of human MDM2 gene in human tumors
US5446128A (en) 1993-06-18 1995-08-29 The Board Of Trustees Of The University Of Illinois Alpha-helix mimetics and methods relating thereto
US5622852A (en) * 1994-10-31 1997-04-22 Washington University Bcl-x/Bcl-2 associated cell death regulator
US5824483A (en) * 1994-05-18 1998-10-20 Pence Inc. Conformationally-restricted combinatiorial library composition and method
US6407059B1 (en) * 1994-06-08 2002-06-18 Peptor Limited Conformationally constrained backbone cyclized peptide analogs
IL109943A (en) * 1994-06-08 2006-08-01 Develogen Israel Ltd Conformationally constrained backbone cyclized peptide analogs
US7553929B2 (en) * 1994-06-13 2009-06-30 Vanderbilt University Cell permeable peptides for inhibition of inflammatory reactions and methods of use
US5807746A (en) 1994-06-13 1998-09-15 Vanderbilt University Method for importing biologically active molecules into cells
US5770377A (en) * 1994-07-20 1998-06-23 University Of Dundee Interruption of binding of MDM2 and P53 protein and therapeutic application thereof
US5672584A (en) * 1995-04-25 1997-09-30 The University Of Kansas Cyclic prodrugs of peptides and peptide nucleic acids having improved metabolic stability and cell membrane permeability
US5811515A (en) 1995-06-12 1998-09-22 California Institute Of Technology Synthesis of conformationally restricted amino acids, peptides, and peptidomimetics by catalytic ring closing metathesis
AU4385696A (en) * 1996-01-18 1997-08-11 Christian Gronhoj Larsen Synthetic il-10 analogues
US5663316A (en) * 1996-06-18 1997-09-02 Clontech Laboratories, Inc. BBC6 gene for regulation of cell death
US7083983B2 (en) * 1996-07-05 2006-08-01 Cancer Research Campaign Technology Limited Inhibitors of the interaction between P53 and MDM2
US5955593A (en) * 1996-09-09 1999-09-21 Washington University BH3 interacting domain death agonist
US5965703A (en) * 1996-09-20 1999-10-12 Idun Pharmaceuticals Human bad polypeptides, encoding nucleic acids and methods of use
US5856445A (en) * 1996-10-18 1999-01-05 Washington University Serine substituted mutants of BCL-XL /BCL-2 associated cell death regulator
US6271198B1 (en) * 1996-11-06 2001-08-07 Genentech, Inc. Constrained helical peptides and methods of making same
US7064193B1 (en) * 1997-09-17 2006-06-20 The Walter And Eliza Hall Institute Of Medical Research Therapeutic molecules
US6165732A (en) 1997-10-14 2000-12-26 Washington University Method for identifying apoptosis modulating compounds
US6030997A (en) * 1998-01-21 2000-02-29 Eilat; Eran Acid labile prodrugs
AP1117A (en) 1998-04-15 2002-11-02 Aventis Pharma Inc Process for the preparation of resin-bound cyclic peptides.
US6326354B1 (en) * 1998-08-19 2001-12-04 Washington University Modulation of apoptosis with bid
SK13082001A3 (en) * 1999-03-29 2002-03-05 The Procter & Gamble Company Cyclic peptide analogue and production thereof
US6713280B1 (en) 1999-04-07 2004-03-30 Thomas Jefferson University Enhancement of peptide cellular uptake
WO2000059526A1 (en) * 1999-04-07 2000-10-12 Thomas Jefferson University Enhancement of peptide cellular uptake
US7192713B1 (en) 1999-05-18 2007-03-20 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Stabilized compounds having secondary structure motifs
US6495674B1 (en) 2000-02-25 2002-12-17 The Salk Institute For Biological Studies Evectins and their use
WO2002013833A2 (en) * 2000-08-16 2002-02-21 Georgetown University Medical Center SMALL MOLECULE INHIBITORS TARGETED AT Bcl-2
WO2002064790A2 (en) 2000-12-19 2002-08-22 The Johns Hopkins University Jfy1 protein induces rapid apoptosis
WO2003057158A2 (en) * 2001-12-31 2003-07-17 Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, Inc. Method of treating apoptosis and compositions thereof
SE0201863D0 (en) 2002-06-18 2002-06-18 Cepep Ab Cell penetrating peptides
US20040171809A1 (en) * 2002-09-09 2004-09-02 Korsmeyer Stanley J. BH3 peptides and method of use thereof
US7166575B2 (en) * 2002-12-17 2007-01-23 Nastech Pharmaceutical Company Inc. Compositions and methods for enhanced mucosal delivery of peptide YY and methods for treating and preventing obesity
US20070032417A1 (en) 2002-12-24 2007-02-08 Walter And Eliza Hall Institute Of Medical Research Peptides and therapeutic uses thereof
WO2004063963A2 (en) * 2003-01-08 2004-07-29 Xencor, Inc. Novel proteins with altered immunogenicity
EP1673386A2 (en) 2003-10-16 2006-06-28 AplaGen GmbH Stabilized alpha-helical peptides
PL2332968T3 (en) 2003-11-05 2017-08-31 Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, Inc. Alpha-helical peptides suitable for activating or inhibiting cell death
WO2005090388A1 (en) 2004-03-19 2005-09-29 The University Of Queensland Alpha helical mimics, their uses and methods for their production
US7202332B2 (en) 2004-05-27 2007-04-10 New York University Methods for preparing internally constrained peptides and peptidomimetics
US7501397B2 (en) 2004-06-04 2009-03-10 The Brigham And Women's Hospital, Inc. Helical peptidomimetics with enhanced activity
US7842815B2 (en) * 2004-06-17 2010-11-30 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for inhibiting the interaction of BCL proteins with binding partners
JP5064213B2 (en) * 2004-06-17 2012-10-31 インフィニティ・ディスカバリー・インコーポレイテッド Compounds and methods for inhibiting the interaction of a BCL protein with a binding partner
WO2006103666A2 (en) 2005-03-28 2006-10-05 Yeda Research And Development Co. Ltd. Isolated bid polypeptides, polynucleotides encoding same and antibodies directed thereagainst and methods of using same for inducing cell cycle arrest or apoptosis
US7538190B2 (en) 2006-02-17 2009-05-26 Polychip Pharmaceuticals Pty Ltd Methods for the synthesis of two or more dicarba bridges in organic compounds
US7745573B2 (en) * 2006-02-17 2010-06-29 Polychip Pharmaceuticals Pty Ltd. Conotoxin analogues and methods for synthesis of intramolecular dicarba bridge-containing peptides
CN105061577A (en) * 2006-12-14 2015-11-18 爱勒让治疗公司 Bis-sulfhydryl macrocyclization systems
US7981998B2 (en) * 2006-12-14 2011-07-19 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Bis-sulfhydryl macrocyclization systems
CN109627287A (en) * 2007-02-23 2019-04-16 爱勒让治疗公司 Triazole macrocycle systems
CN101730708B (en) * 2007-03-28 2013-09-18 哈佛大学校长及研究员协会 Stitched polypeptides
US10716828B2 (en) * 2007-05-02 2020-07-21 Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, Inc. Methods of modulating cellular homeostatic pathways and cellular survival
WO2009042237A2 (en) * 2007-09-26 2009-04-02 Dana Farber Cancer Institute Methods and compositions for modulating bcl-2 family polypeptides
EP2221160A4 (en) * 2007-11-20 2011-12-28 Asahi Kasei Constr Mat Co Ltd Process for producing heat curing resin foamed plate
US20090275519A1 (en) 2008-02-08 2009-11-05 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Therapeutic peptidomimetic macrocycles
US20090326192A1 (en) 2008-04-08 2009-12-31 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Biologically active peptidomimetic macrocycles
CN102482336B (en) * 2008-09-22 2015-05-06 爱勒让治疗公司 Peptidomimetic macrocycles
US9458202B2 (en) 2008-11-24 2016-10-04 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Peptidomimetic macrocycles with improved properties
BR112012008831A2 (en) * 2009-10-14 2019-09-24 Aileron Therapeutics Inc enhanced peptideomimetic macrocycles.

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6815426B2 (en) * 2001-02-16 2004-11-09 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Angiogenesis-inhibitory tripeptides, compositions and their methods of use

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
Weller et al. ("Weller", Int. J. Cancer, 1998, 79, 640-644) *

Cited By (22)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US10328117B2 (en) 2006-12-14 2019-06-25 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Bis-sulfhydryl macrocyclization systems
US10030049B2 (en) 2007-02-23 2018-07-24 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Triazole macrocycle systems
US9957296B2 (en) 2007-02-23 2018-05-01 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Triazole macrocycle systems
US9493509B2 (en) 2007-02-23 2016-11-15 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Triazole macrocycle systems
US10301351B2 (en) 2007-03-28 2019-05-28 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Stitched polypeptides
US10022422B2 (en) 2009-01-14 2018-07-17 Alleron Therapeutics, Inc. Peptidomimetic macrocycles
US10300109B2 (en) 2009-09-22 2019-05-28 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Peptidomimetic macrocycles
US9957299B2 (en) 2010-08-13 2018-05-01 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Peptidomimetic macrocycles
US11008366B2 (en) 2010-08-13 2021-05-18 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Peptidomimetic macrocycles
US10703780B2 (en) 2010-08-13 2020-07-07 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Peptidomimetic macrocycles
US10308699B2 (en) 2011-10-18 2019-06-04 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Peptidomimetic macrocycles
US9522947B2 (en) 2011-10-18 2016-12-20 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Peptidomimetic macrocycles
US10227380B2 (en) 2012-02-15 2019-03-12 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Triazole-crosslinked and thioether-crosslinked peptidomimetic macrocycles
US10669230B2 (en) 2012-11-01 2020-06-02 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Disubstituted amino acids and methods of preparation and use thereof
US9604919B2 (en) 2012-11-01 2017-03-28 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Disubstituted amino acids and methods of preparation and use thereof
US9845287B2 (en) 2012-11-01 2017-12-19 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Disubstituted amino acids and methods of preparation and use thereof
US11541027B2 (en) 2014-04-04 2023-01-03 Del Mar Pharmaceuticals (Bc) Ltd. Use of dianhydrogalactitol and analogs or derivatives thereof in combination with platinum-containing antineoplastic agents to treat non-small-cell carcinoma of the lung and brain metastases
US10471120B2 (en) 2014-09-24 2019-11-12 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Peptidomimetic macrocycles and uses thereof
US10905739B2 (en) 2014-09-24 2021-02-02 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Peptidomimetic macrocycles and formulations thereof
US10253067B2 (en) 2015-03-20 2019-04-09 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Peptidomimetic macrocycles and uses thereof
US10059741B2 (en) 2015-07-01 2018-08-28 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Peptidomimetic macrocycles
US10023613B2 (en) 2015-09-10 2018-07-17 Aileron Therapeutics, Inc. Peptidomimetic macrocycles as modulators of MCL-1

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
GB201014734D0 (en) 2010-10-20
US8808694B2 (en) 2014-08-19
CA2714251A1 (en) 2009-08-13
JP2011511076A (en) 2011-04-07
EP2242503A4 (en) 2012-04-25
CN101980718A (en) 2011-02-23
IL243240A (en) 2016-11-30
DE112009000300T5 (en) 2011-01-20
IL207421A0 (en) 2010-12-30
US20120149648A1 (en) 2012-06-14
BRPI0907754A2 (en) 2015-07-21
US20090275519A1 (en) 2009-11-05
WO2009099677A3 (en) 2009-12-17
WO2009099677A2 (en) 2009-08-13
AU2009210682A1 (en) 2009-08-13
JP2015078208A (en) 2015-04-23
EP2926827A2 (en) 2015-10-07
EP2926827A3 (en) 2015-11-04
EP2242503A2 (en) 2010-10-27
ZA201005741B (en) 2018-11-28
US20190071469A1 (en) 2019-03-07
KR20100126361A (en) 2010-12-01
CA2714251C (en) 2017-08-15
CN104474529A (en) 2015-04-01
GB2471588A (en) 2011-01-05

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20190071469A1 (en) Therapeutic peptidomimetic macrocycles
US10300109B2 (en) Peptidomimetic macrocycles
AU2008218116B2 (en) Triazole macrocycle systems
US9175045B2 (en) Peptidomimetic macrocycles
AU2007333846B2 (en) Bis-sulfhydryl macrocyclization systems
US20120115783A1 (en) Peptidomimetic macrocycles
AU2016216698A1 (en) Peptidomimetic macrocycles with improved properties
WO2012173846A2 (en) Peptidomimetic macrocycles
AU2014201269B2 (en) Therapeutic peptidomimetic macrocycles
AU2009210682B2 (en) Therapeutic peptidomimetic macrocycles
AU2017201310A1 (en) Bis-sulfhydryl macrocyclization systems
AU2012203906A1 (en) Triazole macrocycle systems

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: AILERON THERAPEUTICS, INC., MASSACHUSETTS

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:NASH, HUW M.;SAWYER, TOMI K.;ANNIS, DAVID ALLEN;AND OTHERS;SIGNING DATES FROM 20090505 TO 20090508;REEL/FRAME:033804/0586

AS Assignment

Owner name: AILERON THERAPEUTICS, INC., MASSACHUSETTS

Free format text: CHANGE OF ADDRESS;ASSIGNOR:AILERON THERAPEUTICS, INC.;REEL/FRAME:034113/0794

Effective date: 20141031

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION